Added .globl, fix in Xfit call
This commit is contained in:
commit
8feda2f95c
19
.distr
Normal file
19
.distr
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
|
||||
Action
|
||||
Copyright
|
||||
NEW
|
||||
README
|
||||
TakeAction
|
||||
bin
|
||||
doc
|
||||
emtest
|
||||
etc
|
||||
first
|
||||
h
|
||||
include
|
||||
modules
|
||||
lang
|
||||
lib
|
||||
mach
|
||||
man
|
||||
mkun
|
||||
util
|
||||
59
Action
59
Action
@ -7,12 +7,25 @@ end
|
||||
name "EM definition"
|
||||
dir etc
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "C preprocessor"
|
||||
dir util/cpp
|
||||
name "LL(1) Parser generator"
|
||||
dir util/LLgen
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "EM definition library"
|
||||
dir util/data
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "C utilities"
|
||||
dir util/cmisc
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Modules"
|
||||
dir modules/src
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "C preprocessor"
|
||||
dir util/cpp
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "ACK object utilities"
|
||||
dir util/amisc
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Encode/Decode"
|
||||
dir util/misc
|
||||
end
|
||||
@ -25,6 +38,10 @@ end
|
||||
name "EM Peephole optimizer"
|
||||
dir util/opt
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "EM Global optimizer"
|
||||
dir util/ego
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "ACK archiver"
|
||||
dir util/arch
|
||||
end
|
||||
@ -34,18 +51,24 @@ end
|
||||
name "Bootstrap for backend tables"
|
||||
dir util/cgg
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "LL(1) Parser generator"
|
||||
dir util/LLgen
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Bootstrap for newest form of backend tables"
|
||||
dir util/ncgg
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "LED link editor"
|
||||
dir util/led
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "TOPGEN target optimizer generator"
|
||||
dir util/topgen
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "C frontend"
|
||||
dir lang/cem/comp
|
||||
dir lang/cem/cemcom
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Basic frontend"
|
||||
dir lang/basic/src
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Occam frontend"
|
||||
dir lang/occam/comp
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Intel 8086 support"
|
||||
dir mach/i86
|
||||
indir
|
||||
@ -82,10 +105,6 @@ name "4-4 Interpreter support"
|
||||
dir mach/int44
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "IBM PC/IX support"
|
||||
dir mach/ix
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Motorola 68000 2-4 support"
|
||||
dir mach/m68k2
|
||||
indir
|
||||
@ -114,14 +133,26 @@ name "Signetics 2650 support"
|
||||
dir mach/s2650
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Vax 2-4 support"
|
||||
dir mach/vax2
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Vax 4-4 support"
|
||||
dir mach/vax4
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "M68020 System V/68 support"
|
||||
dir mach/m68020
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Sun 3 M68020 support"
|
||||
dir mach/sun3
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Sun 2 M68000 support"
|
||||
dir mach/sun2
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Mantra M68000 System V.0 support"
|
||||
dir mach/mantra
|
||||
indir
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Z80 support"
|
||||
dir mach/z80
|
||||
indir
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
|
||||
/*
|
||||
* (c) copyright 1983 by the Vrije Universiteit, Amsterdam, The Netherlands.
|
||||
* A M S T E R D A M C O M P I L E R K I T
|
||||
*
|
||||
* This product is part of the Amsterdam Compiler Kit.
|
||||
* (c) copyright 1987 by the Vrije Universiteit, Amsterdam, The Netherlands.
|
||||
*
|
||||
* Permission to use, sell, duplicate or disclose this software must be
|
||||
* obtained in writing. Requests for such permissions may be sent to
|
||||
@ -14,4 +14,3 @@
|
||||
* The Netherlands
|
||||
*
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
35
Makefile
Normal file
35
Makefile
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
|
||||
cmp: # compile everything and compare
|
||||
(cd etc ; make cmp )
|
||||
(cd util ; make cmp )
|
||||
(cd lang ; make cmp )
|
||||
(cd mach ; make cmp )
|
||||
|
||||
install: # compile everything to machine code
|
||||
(cd etc ; make install )
|
||||
(cd util ; make install )
|
||||
(cd lang/cem ; make install )
|
||||
(cd mach ; make install )
|
||||
(cd lang/pc ; make install )
|
||||
|
||||
clean: # remove all non-sources, except boot-files
|
||||
(cd doc ; make clean )
|
||||
(cd man ; make clean )
|
||||
(cd h ; make clean )
|
||||
(cd etc ; make clean )
|
||||
(cd util ; make clean )
|
||||
(cd lang ; make clean )
|
||||
(cd mach ; make clean )
|
||||
|
||||
opr: # print all sources
|
||||
make pr | opr
|
||||
|
||||
pr: # print all sources
|
||||
@( pr Makefile ; \
|
||||
(cd doc ; make pr ) ; \
|
||||
(cd man ; make pr ) ; \
|
||||
(cd h ; make pr ) ; \
|
||||
(cd etc ; make pr ) ; \
|
||||
(cd lang ; make pr ) ; \
|
||||
(cd util ; make pr ) ; \
|
||||
(cd mach ; make pr ) \
|
||||
)
|
||||
38
NEW
38
NEW
@ -1,17 +1,27 @@
|
||||
What's new:
|
||||
A lot of things have changed since that previous distribution.
|
||||
A lot of things have changed since the previous distribution.
|
||||
It is not wise to mix files created by the previous version of the Kit
|
||||
with files belonging to this version, although that might sometimes work.
|
||||
The major additions are:
|
||||
- Basic frontend
|
||||
- New codegenerator
|
||||
- LL(1) parser generator
|
||||
- Vax backend with 4-byte wordsize
|
||||
- Motorola 68000 backend with 4-byte wordsize
|
||||
- Motorola 68000 interpreter for 2- and 4-byte wordsize
|
||||
- Z8000 assembler and backend.
|
||||
- 6805 assembler
|
||||
- NatSem 16032 assembler
|
||||
- Intel 8080 backend
|
||||
- Zilog Z80 backend
|
||||
- Signetics 2650 assembler
|
||||
The major changes are:
|
||||
- a new C-compiler and runtime system
|
||||
- a new C preprocessor
|
||||
- new assembler framework, allowing the generation of relocatable
|
||||
object code for most processors
|
||||
- new versions of all assemblers, using the new assembler framework
|
||||
- a new link-editor, linking is now a separate and fast phase for most
|
||||
machines
|
||||
- improved Pascal compiler, now also handles 4-byte wordsize
|
||||
- Motorola M68020 backend and assembler
|
||||
- Support for (some) SUN systems
|
||||
- improved version of LL(1) parser generator, producing faster code
|
||||
- a new language: Occam
|
||||
- better System V support, the Kit should now just compile and run
|
||||
|
||||
Ceriel J.H. Jacobs
|
||||
Dept. of Math. and Computer Science
|
||||
Vrije Universiteit
|
||||
Postbus 7161
|
||||
1007 MC Amsterdam
|
||||
The Netherlands
|
||||
|
||||
(UseNet: ceriel@cs.vu.nl)
|
||||
|
||||
16
TakeAction
16
TakeAction
@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ RETC=0
|
||||
do
|
||||
eval set $LINE
|
||||
case x"$1" in
|
||||
x#*) ;;
|
||||
x!*) ;;
|
||||
xname) SYS="$2"
|
||||
ACTION='make $PAR'
|
||||
DIR=.
|
||||
@ -44,12 +44,18 @@ do
|
||||
FAIL="$2" ;;
|
||||
xsuccess) SUCC="$2" ;;
|
||||
xdir) DIR="$2" ;;
|
||||
xsystem) case `ack_sys` in
|
||||
$2) ;;
|
||||
*) echo "Sorry, $SYS can only be made on $2 systems"
|
||||
xsystem) PAT="$2"
|
||||
oIFS=$IFS
|
||||
IFS="|"
|
||||
eval set $2
|
||||
case x`ack_sys` in
|
||||
x$1|x$2|x$3|x$4|x$5|x$6|x$7) ;;
|
||||
*) echo "Sorry, $SYS can only be made on $PAT systems"
|
||||
DOIT=no
|
||||
;;
|
||||
esac ;;
|
||||
esac
|
||||
IFS=$oIFS
|
||||
;;
|
||||
xend) case $DOIT in
|
||||
no) continue ;;
|
||||
esac
|
||||
|
||||
1
bin/.distr
Normal file
1
bin/.distr
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1 @@
|
||||
em.pascal
|
||||
@ -1 +1 @@
|
||||
exec /usr/em/doc/em.doc/int/em /usr/em/doc/em.doc/int/tables ${1-e.out} core
|
||||
exec /usr/em/doc/em/int/em /usr/em/doc/em/int/tables ${1-e.out} core
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1,15 +1,12 @@
|
||||
name "Installation manual"
|
||||
dir doc
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "EM documentation"
|
||||
dir doc/em.doc
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "Pascal bootstrap files"
|
||||
dir lang/pc/pem
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "LLgen bootstrap files"
|
||||
dir util/LLgen
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "MSC6500 vend_library"
|
||||
dir mach/6500/libem
|
||||
name "ego share pop_push file"
|
||||
dir util/ego/share
|
||||
end
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1,6 +1,9 @@
|
||||
name "vax2/cg bootstrap files"
|
||||
dir mach/vax2/cg
|
||||
name "m68k2/cg bootstrap files"
|
||||
dir mach/m68k2/cg
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "vax4/cg bootstrap files"
|
||||
dir mach/vax4/cg
|
||||
end
|
||||
name "m68020/ncg bootstrap files"
|
||||
dir mach/m68020/ncg
|
||||
end
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1,5 +1,3 @@
|
||||
-- ./bin/em.pascal no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./doc/em.doc/doc.pr no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./doc/install.pr no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./h/em_mnem.h no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./h/em_pseu.h no RCS file
|
||||
@ -8,29 +6,15 @@
|
||||
-- ./lang/basic/src/y.tab.h no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./lang/pc/pem/pem22.m no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./lang/pc/pem/pem24.m no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./lang/pc/pem/pem44.m no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./lib/LLgen/incl no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./lib/LLgen/rec no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./lib/ix/head_em no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./lib/ix/head_i no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./lib/ix/tail_em no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./lib/ix/tail_em.vend no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./lib/ix/tail_mon no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./mach/6500/libem/tail_em.ve.s.a no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./mach/vax2/cg/tables1.c no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./mach/vax2/cg/tables1.h no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./mach/m68k2/cg/tables1.c no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./mach/m68k2/cg/tables1.h no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./mach/m68020/ncg/tables1.c no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./mach/m68020/ncg/tables1.h no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./mach/vax4/cg/tables1.c no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./mach/vax4/cg/tables1.h no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./mach/z80/int/libpc/pc_tail.c.a no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./mkun/pubmac no distr2 yet
|
||||
-- ./mkun/tmac.q no distr2 yet
|
||||
-- ./mkun/tmac.q1 no distr2 yet
|
||||
-- ./mkun/tmac.q2 no distr2 yet
|
||||
-- ./mkun/tmac.q3 no distr2 yet
|
||||
-- ./mkun/tmac.q4 no distr2 yet
|
||||
-- ./mkun/tmac.q5 no distr2 yet
|
||||
-- ./mkun/tmac.q6 no distr2 yet
|
||||
-- ./mkun/tmac.q7 no distr2 yet
|
||||
-- ./mkun/tmac.q8 no distr2 yet
|
||||
-- ./util/LLgen/src/parser no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./util/LLgen/src/LLgen.c no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./util/LLgen/src/Lpars.c no RCS file
|
||||
@ -39,4 +23,4 @@
|
||||
-- ./util/data/em_flag.c no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./util/data/em_mnem.c no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./util/data/em_pseu.c no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./util/data/em_ptyp.c no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./util/ego/share/pop_push.h no RCS file
|
||||
|
||||
22
distr/How_To
22
distr/How_To
@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ The EM home directory contains a file called ".distr". It contains
|
||||
the names of all the files and directories you want to have in the distribution.
|
||||
The directories should contain .distr files, the other files should
|
||||
be placed under RCS.
|
||||
The current RCS revision name is "distr2".
|
||||
The current RCS revision name is "distr3".
|
||||
The are files that derive from other files and yet should be placed
|
||||
in the distribution.
|
||||
These files should not be placed under RCS.
|
||||
@ -25,12 +25,12 @@ destination tree.
|
||||
For each file mentioned there it performes certain actions:
|
||||
1- Directory Change to that directory and call yourself recursively.
|
||||
2- File
|
||||
a- Try to do "co -rdistr2 destination_tree/path/destination_file"
|
||||
a- Try to do "co -rdistr3 destination_tree/path/destination_file"
|
||||
on succes "chmod +w destination_file"
|
||||
else
|
||||
b- Try to do "co destination_tree/destination_file"
|
||||
on succes "chmod +w destination_file" and
|
||||
give message that says "Missing distr2 entry" (or some such).
|
||||
give message that says "Missing distr3 entry" (or some such).
|
||||
else
|
||||
c- I Does a file LIST exist in this directory AND
|
||||
is the first line of LIST equal to the name of the
|
||||
@ -52,23 +52,23 @@ Some files derive from other files in the tree, those derivations should
|
||||
be done with the use of an already installed distribution.
|
||||
The files Action and Action1 in this directory contain the actions
|
||||
we now take. (Confession: most of the time we use /usr/em)
|
||||
One warning, to re-nroff the IR-81 report it takes more then just nroff
|
||||
because most nroff's can't stand that report and stop half-way.
|
||||
The ntroff program does the trick, but only on the 11's.
|
||||
tbl sources | ntroff -Tlp | ntlp
|
||||
|
||||
After running these re-derivation programs the distrubtion tree starts
|
||||
to look like the tree you need.
|
||||
There are too many files there though, especially the files created by
|
||||
the derivation process.
|
||||
That is why we now give the command:
|
||||
dtar cdf distr2 .
|
||||
The file distr2 is the one you should put on tape!
|
||||
dtar cdf distr3 .
|
||||
The file distr3 is the one you should put on tape!
|
||||
But,.... before doing that: Try it out!
|
||||
Repeat the process described in the installation manual.
|
||||
Only if that succeeds you are sure that you included the files needed,
|
||||
and gave all other files the correct "distr2" RCS id.
|
||||
After you sent the tape away, forbid ANYBODY to touch the distr2 id
|
||||
and gave all other files the correct "distr3" RCS id.
|
||||
After you sent the tape away, forbid ANYBODY to touch the distr3 id
|
||||
in your RCS files.
|
||||
Good Luck,
|
||||
Ed Keizer, 85/4/15.
|
||||
|
||||
Updated for 3rd distribution by Ceriel Jacobs, 87/3/11.
|
||||
And again,
|
||||
Good Luck!
|
||||
|
||||
@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ do
|
||||
${DD-:} $CDIR $i
|
||||
CDIR=$CDIR/$i
|
||||
export CDIR
|
||||
exec /usr/em/distr/dwalk
|
||||
exec /proj/em/distr/dwalk
|
||||
else
|
||||
echo ++ Could not access $CDIR/$i
|
||||
fi
|
||||
|
||||
28
distr/f.attf
28
distr/f.attf
@ -1,5 +1,3 @@
|
||||
-- ./bin/em.pascal no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./doc/em.doc/doc.pr no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./doc/install.pr no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./h/em_mnem.h no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./h/em_pseu.h no RCS file
|
||||
@ -8,29 +6,15 @@
|
||||
-- ./lang/basic/src/y.tab.h no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./lang/pc/pem/pem22.m no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./lang/pc/pem/pem24.m no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./lang/pc/pem/pem44.m no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./lib/LLgen/incl no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./lib/LLgen/rec no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./lib/ix/head_em no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./lib/ix/head_i no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./lib/ix/tail_em no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./lib/ix/tail_em.vend no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./lib/ix/tail_mon no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./mach/6500/libem/tail_em.ve.s.a no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./mach/vax2/cg/tables1.c no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./mach/vax2/cg/tables1.h no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./mach/m68k2/cg/tables1.c no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./mach/m68k2/cg/tables1.h no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./mach/m68020/ncg/tables1.c no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./mach/m68020/ncg/tables1.h no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./mach/vax4/cg/tables1.c no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./mach/vax4/cg/tables1.h no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./mach/z80/int/libpc/pc_tail.c.a no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./mkun/pubmac no distr2 yet
|
||||
-- ./mkun/tmac.q no distr2 yet
|
||||
-- ./mkun/tmac.q1 no distr2 yet
|
||||
-- ./mkun/tmac.q2 no distr2 yet
|
||||
-- ./mkun/tmac.q3 no distr2 yet
|
||||
-- ./mkun/tmac.q4 no distr2 yet
|
||||
-- ./mkun/tmac.q5 no distr2 yet
|
||||
-- ./mkun/tmac.q6 no distr2 yet
|
||||
-- ./mkun/tmac.q7 no distr2 yet
|
||||
-- ./mkun/tmac.q8 no distr2 yet
|
||||
-- ./util/LLgen/src/parser no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./util/LLgen/src/LLgen.c no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./util/LLgen/src/Lpars.c no RCS file
|
||||
@ -39,4 +23,4 @@
|
||||
-- ./util/data/em_flag.c no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./util/data/em_mnem.c no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./util/data/em_pseu.c no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./util/data/em_ptyp.c no RCS file
|
||||
-- ./util/ego/share/pop_push.h no RCS file
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1,10 +1,10 @@
|
||||
if co -q -rdistr2 $DESTDIR/$1/$2 >/dev/null 2>&1
|
||||
if co -q -rdistr3 $DESTDIR/$1/$2 >/dev/null 2>&1
|
||||
then
|
||||
chmod +w $DESTDIR/$1/$2
|
||||
elif co -q $DESTDIR/$1/$2 >/dev/null 2>&1
|
||||
then
|
||||
chmod +w $DESTDIR/$1/$2
|
||||
echo -- $1/$2 no distr2 yet
|
||||
echo -- $1/$2 no distr3 yet
|
||||
elif grep LIST .distr >/dev/null 2>&1 &&
|
||||
(test "$2" = "`head -1 $DESTDIR/$1/LIST`") >/dev/null 2>&1 &&
|
||||
${DA-false} "$1" "$2"
|
||||
|
||||
@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ case $# in
|
||||
1) ;;
|
||||
*) echo $0 directory ; exit 1 ;;
|
||||
esac
|
||||
DDIR=/usr/em/distr
|
||||
DDIR=/proj/em/distr
|
||||
case $1 in
|
||||
/*) DESTDIR=$1 ;;
|
||||
*) DESTDIR=`pwd`/$1 ;;
|
||||
|
||||
@ -23,4 +23,4 @@ esac
|
||||
case x$REV in
|
||||
x) exit 2 ;;
|
||||
esac
|
||||
rcs -ndistr2:$REV $FLAGS $FILE
|
||||
rcs -ndistr3:$REV $FLAGS $FILE
|
||||
|
||||
23
doc/.distr
Normal file
23
doc/.distr
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
|
||||
Makefile
|
||||
ack.doc
|
||||
basic.doc
|
||||
cg.doc
|
||||
crefman.doc
|
||||
em
|
||||
install.doc
|
||||
install.pr
|
||||
ncg.doc
|
||||
pcref.doc
|
||||
peep.doc
|
||||
regadd.doc
|
||||
toolkit.doc
|
||||
v7bugs.doc
|
||||
val.doc
|
||||
LLgen
|
||||
6500.doc
|
||||
i80.doc
|
||||
z80.doc
|
||||
m68020.doc
|
||||
top
|
||||
ego
|
||||
occam
|
||||
284
doc/6500.doc
284
doc/6500.doc
@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
|
||||
. \" $Header$"
|
||||
.po +10
|
||||
.ND
|
||||
.RP
|
||||
.ND Dec 1984
|
||||
.TL
|
||||
.B
|
||||
A backend table for the 6500 microprocessor
|
||||
@ -12,212 +12,6 @@ The backend table is part of the Amsterdam Compiler Kit (ACK).
|
||||
It translates the intermediate language family EM to a machine
|
||||
code for the MCS6500 microprocessor family.
|
||||
.AE
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
.bp
|
||||
.NH
|
||||
Introduction.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
As more and more organizations aquire many micro and minicomputers,
|
||||
the need for portable compilers is becoming more and more acute.
|
||||
The present situation, in which each harware vendor provides its
|
||||
own compilers -- each with its own deficiencies and extensions, and
|
||||
none of them compatible -- leaves much to be desired.
|
||||
The ideal situation would be an integrated system containing
|
||||
a family of (cross) compilers, each compiler accepting a standard
|
||||
source language and, producing code for a wide variety of target
|
||||
machines. Furthermore, the compilers should be compatible, so programs
|
||||
written in one language can call procedures written in another
|
||||
language. Finally, the system should be designed so as to make
|
||||
adding new languages and, new machines easy. Such an integerated
|
||||
system is being built at the Vrije Universiteit.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The compiler building system, which is called the "Amsterdam Compiler
|
||||
Kit" (ACK), can be thought of as a "tool kit." It consists of
|
||||
a number of parts that can be combined to form compilers (and
|
||||
interpreters) with various properties. The tool kit is based
|
||||
on an idea (UNCOL) that was first suggested in 1960 [5],
|
||||
but which never really caught on then. The problem which UNCOL
|
||||
attemps to solve is how to make a compiler for each of
|
||||
.B
|
||||
N
|
||||
.R
|
||||
languages on
|
||||
.B
|
||||
M
|
||||
.R
|
||||
different machines without having to write
|
||||
.B
|
||||
N
|
||||
.R
|
||||
x
|
||||
.B
|
||||
M
|
||||
.R
|
||||
programs.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
As shown in Fig. 1, the UNCOL approach is to write
|
||||
.B
|
||||
N
|
||||
.R
|
||||
"front ends," each of which translates
|
||||
one source language to a common
|
||||
intermediate language, UNCOL (UNiversal Computer Oriented
|
||||
Language), and
|
||||
.B
|
||||
M
|
||||
.R
|
||||
"back ends," each of which translates programs
|
||||
in UNCOL to a specific machine language. Under these conditions,
|
||||
only
|
||||
.B
|
||||
N
|
||||
.R
|
||||
+
|
||||
.B
|
||||
M
|
||||
.R
|
||||
programs must be written to provide all
|
||||
.B
|
||||
N
|
||||
.R
|
||||
languages on all
|
||||
.B
|
||||
M
|
||||
.R
|
||||
machines, instead of
|
||||
.B
|
||||
N
|
||||
.R
|
||||
x
|
||||
.B
|
||||
M
|
||||
.R
|
||||
programs.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Various reseachers have attempted to design a suitable UNCOL [1,6],
|
||||
but none of these have become popular. It is the believe of the
|
||||
designers of the Amsterdam Compiler Kit that previous attemps
|
||||
have failed because they have been too ambitious, that is, they have
|
||||
tried to cover all languages and all machines using a single UNCOL.
|
||||
The approach of the designers is more modest:
|
||||
they cater only to algebraic languages and machines whose memory
|
||||
consist of 8-bit bytes, each with its own address.
|
||||
Typical languages that could be handled include Ada, ALGOL 60,
|
||||
ALGOL 68, BASIC, C, FORTRAN, Modula, Pascal, PL/I, PL/M, PLAIN and
|
||||
RATFOR, where COBOL, LISP and SNOBOL would be less efficient.
|
||||
Examples of machines that could be included are the Intel 8080 and
|
||||
8086, Motorola 6800, 6809 and 68000, Zilog Z80 and Z8000, DEC PDP-11
|
||||
and Vax, MOS Technology MCS6500 family and IBM but not the Burroughs
|
||||
6700, CDC Cyber or Univac 1108 (because they are not byte_oriented).
|
||||
With these restrictions the designers believe that the old UNCOL
|
||||
idea can be used as the basis of a practical compiler-building
|
||||
system.
|
||||
.sp 10
|
||||
.bp
|
||||
.NH
|
||||
An overview of the Amsterdam Compiler kit
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The tool kit consists of eight components:
|
||||
.IP 1.
|
||||
The preprocessor.
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
The front ends.
|
||||
.IP 3.
|
||||
The peephole optimizer.
|
||||
.IP 4.
|
||||
The global optimizer.
|
||||
.IP 5.
|
||||
The back end.
|
||||
.IP 6.
|
||||
The target machine optimizer.
|
||||
.IP 7.
|
||||
The universal assembler/linker.
|
||||
.IP 8.
|
||||
The utility package.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A fully optimizing compiler, depicted in Fig. 2, has seven cascaded
|
||||
phases. Conceptually, each component reads an input file and writes
|
||||
a transformed output file to be used as input to the next component.
|
||||
In practice, some components may use temporary files to allow
|
||||
multiple passes over the input or internal intermediate files.
|
||||
.sp 20
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
In the following paragraphs a brief decription of each component
|
||||
is given.
|
||||
A more detailed description of the back end will be given in the
|
||||
rest of this document. For a more detailed descripiton on the rest
|
||||
of the components see [7]. A program to be compiled is first fed
|
||||
into the (language independed) preprocessor, which provides a
|
||||
simple macro facility and similar textual facilities.
|
||||
The preprocessor's ouput is a legal program in one of the programming
|
||||
languages supported, whereas the input is a program possibly
|
||||
augmented with macro's, etc.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
This output goes into the appropriate front end, whose job it is to
|
||||
produce intermediate cade.
|
||||
This intermediate code (the UNCOL of ACK) is the machine language
|
||||
for a simple stack machine EM (Encoding Machine).
|
||||
A typical front end might build a parse tree from the input
|
||||
and then use the parse tree to generate EM cade,
|
||||
which is similar to reverse Polish.
|
||||
In order to perform this work, the front end has to maintain tables of declare
|
||||
tables of declared variables, labels, etc., determine where
|
||||
to place the data structures in memory and so on.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The EM code generated by the front end is fed into the peephole
|
||||
optimizer, which scans it with a window of a view instructions,
|
||||
replacing certain inefficient code sequences by better ones.
|
||||
Such a search is important because EM contains instructions to
|
||||
handle numerous important special cases efficiently
|
||||
(e.g. incrementing a variable by 1).
|
||||
It is our strategy to relieve the front ends of the burden
|
||||
of hunting for special cases because there are many front ends
|
||||
and just one peephole optimizer.
|
||||
By handeling the special cases in the peephole optimizer,
|
||||
the front ends become simpler, easier to write and easier to maintain.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Following the peephole optimizer is a global optimizer [2],
|
||||
which unlike the peephole optimizer, examines the program as a whole.
|
||||
It builts a data flow graph to make possible a variety of global
|
||||
optimizations, among them, moving invariant code out of loops,
|
||||
avoiding redundant computations, live/dead analysis and
|
||||
eliminating tail recursion.
|
||||
Note that the output of the global optimizer is still EM code.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Next comes the back end, which differs from the front ends in a
|
||||
fundamental way.
|
||||
Each front end is a separate program, whereas the back end is a
|
||||
single program that is driven by a machine dependent driving table.
|
||||
The driving table for a specific machine tells how EM code is
|
||||
mapped onto the machine's assembly language.
|
||||
Although a simple driving table just might macro expand each
|
||||
EM instruction into a sequence of target machine instructions,
|
||||
a much more sophisticated translation strategy is normaly used,
|
||||
as described later.
|
||||
For speech, the back end does not actually read in the driving
|
||||
table at run time.
|
||||
Instead, the tables are compiled along with the back end in advance,
|
||||
resulting in one binairy program per machine.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The output of the back end is a program in the assembly language
|
||||
of some particular machine.
|
||||
The next component in the pipeline reads this program and performs
|
||||
peephole optimization on it.
|
||||
The optimizations performed here involve idiosyncrasies of the
|
||||
target machine that cannot be performed by the machine-independent
|
||||
EM-to-EM peephole optimizer.
|
||||
Typically these optimizations take advantage of the special
|
||||
instructions or special addressing modes.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The optimized target machine assembly code then goes into the final
|
||||
component in the pipeline, the universal assembler/linker.
|
||||
This program assembles the input to object format, extracting
|
||||
routines from libraries and including them as needed.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The final component of the tool kit is the utility package,
|
||||
which contains various test programs, interpreters for EM code,
|
||||
EM libraries, conversion programs and other aids for the
|
||||
implementer and user.
|
||||
.bp
|
||||
.DS C
|
||||
.B
|
||||
@ -264,7 +58,7 @@ manufactured by Acorn Computer Ltd..
|
||||
The MOS Technology MCS6500
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The MCS6500 is as a family of CPU devices developed by MOS
|
||||
Technology.
|
||||
Technology [1].
|
||||
The members of the MCS6500 family are the same chips in a
|
||||
different housing.
|
||||
The MCS6502, the big brother in the family, can handle 64k
|
||||
@ -861,7 +655,7 @@ The above description of the machine table is
|
||||
a description of the table for the MCS6500.
|
||||
It uses only a part of the possibilities which the code generator
|
||||
generator offers.
|
||||
For a more precise and detailed description see [4].
|
||||
For a more precise and detailed description see [2].
|
||||
.DS C
|
||||
.B
|
||||
THE BACK END TABLE.
|
||||
@ -1141,7 +935,7 @@ This subroutine expects the multiplicand in zero page
|
||||
at locations ARTH, ARTH+1, while the multiplier is in zero
|
||||
page locations ARTH+2, ARTH+3.
|
||||
For a description of the algorithms used for multiplication and
|
||||
division, see [9].
|
||||
division, see [3].
|
||||
A table content is:
|
||||
.sp 1
|
||||
.br
|
||||
@ -2071,34 +1865,6 @@ if it is to be used on a MCS6500.
|
||||
REFERENCES.
|
||||
.R
|
||||
.IP 1.
|
||||
Haddon. B.K., and Waite, W.M.
|
||||
Experience with the Universal Intermediate Language Janus.
|
||||
.B
|
||||
Software Practice & Experience 8
|
||||
.R
|
||||
,
|
||||
5 (Sept.-Oct. 1978), 601-616.
|
||||
.RS
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
An intermediate language for use with Algol 68, Pascal, etc.
|
||||
is described.
|
||||
The paper discusses some problems encountered and how they were
|
||||
dealt with.
|
||||
.RE
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
Lowry, E.S., and Medlock, C.W. Object Code Optimization.
|
||||
.B
|
||||
Commun. ACM 12
|
||||
.R
|
||||
,
|
||||
(Jan. 1969), 13-22.
|
||||
.RS
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A classical paper on global object code optimization.
|
||||
It covers data flow analysis, common subexpressions, code motion,
|
||||
register allocation and other techniques.
|
||||
.RE
|
||||
.IP 3.
|
||||
Osborn, A., Jacobson, S., and Kane, J. The Mos Technology MCS6500.
|
||||
.B
|
||||
An Introduction to Microcomputers ,
|
||||
@ -2109,7 +1875,7 @@ Volume II, Some Real Products (june 1977) chap. 9.
|
||||
A hardware description of some real existing CPU's, such as
|
||||
the Intel Z80, MCS6500, etc. is given in this book.
|
||||
.RE
|
||||
.IP 4.
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
van Staveren, H.
|
||||
The table driven code generator from the Amsterdam Compiler Kit.
|
||||
Vrije Universiteit, Amsterdam, (July 11, 1983).
|
||||
@ -2117,43 +1883,7 @@ Vrije Universiteit, Amsterdam, (July 11, 1983).
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The defining document for writing a back end table.
|
||||
.RE
|
||||
.IP 5.
|
||||
Steel, T.B., Jr. UNCOL: The Myth and the Fact. in
|
||||
.B
|
||||
Ann. Rev. Auto. Prog.
|
||||
.R
|
||||
Goodman, R. (ed.), vol 2., (1960), 325-344.
|
||||
.RS
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
An introduction to the UNCOL idea by its originator.
|
||||
.RE
|
||||
.IP 6.
|
||||
Steel. T.B., Jr. A first Version of UNCOL.
|
||||
.B
|
||||
Proc. Western Joint Comp. Conf.
|
||||
.R
|
||||
,
|
||||
(1961), 371-377.
|
||||
.IP 7.
|
||||
Tanenbaum, A.S., Stevenson, J.W., Keizer, E.G., and van Staveren,
|
||||
H.
|
||||
A Practical Tool Kit for Making Portable Compilers.
|
||||
Informatica Rapport 74, Vrije Universiteit, Amsterdam, 1983.
|
||||
.RS
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
An overview on the Amsterdam Compiler Kit.
|
||||
.RE
|
||||
.IP 8.
|
||||
Tanenbaum, A.S., Stevenson, J.W., Keizer, E.G., and van Staveren,
|
||||
H.
|
||||
Description of an Experimental Machine Architecture for use with
|
||||
Block Structured Languages.
|
||||
Informatica Rapport 81, Vrije Universiteit, Amsterdam, 1983.
|
||||
.RS
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The defining document for EM.
|
||||
.RE
|
||||
.IP 9.
|
||||
.IP 3.
|
||||
Tanenbaum, A.S. Structured Computer Organization.
|
||||
Prentice Hall. (1976).
|
||||
.RS
|
||||
|
||||
3
doc/LLgen/.distr
Normal file
3
doc/LLgen/.distr
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
|
||||
LLgen.n
|
||||
LLgen.refs
|
||||
Makefile
|
||||
1046
doc/LLgen/LLgen.n
Normal file
1046
doc/LLgen/LLgen.n
Normal file
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load Diff
54
doc/LLgen/LLgen.refs
Normal file
54
doc/LLgen/LLgen.refs
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
|
||||
%T An ALL(1) Compiler Generator
|
||||
%A D. R. Milton
|
||||
%A L. W. Kirchhoff
|
||||
%A B. R. Rowland
|
||||
%B Proc. of the SIGPLAN '79 Symposium on Compiler Construction
|
||||
%D August 1979
|
||||
%J SIGPLAN Notices
|
||||
%N 8
|
||||
%P 152-157
|
||||
%V 14
|
||||
|
||||
%T Lex - A Lexical Analyser Generator
|
||||
%A M. E. Lesk
|
||||
%I Bell Laboratories
|
||||
%D October 1975
|
||||
%C Murrey Hill, New Jersey
|
||||
%R Comp. Sci. Tech. Rep. No. 39
|
||||
|
||||
%T Yacc: Yet Another Compiler Compiler
|
||||
%A S. C. Johnson
|
||||
%I Bell Laboratories
|
||||
%D 1975
|
||||
%C Murray Hill, New Jersey
|
||||
%R Comp. Sci. Tech. Rep. No. 32
|
||||
|
||||
%T The C Programming Language
|
||||
%A B. W. Kernighan
|
||||
%A D. M. Ritchie
|
||||
%I Prentice-Hall, Inc.
|
||||
%C Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey
|
||||
%D 1978
|
||||
|
||||
%A M. Griffiths
|
||||
%T LL(1) Grammars and Analysers
|
||||
%E F. L. Bauer and J. Eickel
|
||||
%B Compiler Construction, An Advanced Course
|
||||
%I Springer-Verlag
|
||||
%C New York, N.Y.
|
||||
%D 1974
|
||||
|
||||
%T Make - A Program for Maintaining Computer Programs
|
||||
%A S. I. Feldman
|
||||
%J Software - Practice and Experience
|
||||
%V 10
|
||||
%N 8
|
||||
%P 255-265
|
||||
%D August 1979
|
||||
|
||||
%T Methods for the Automatic Construction of Error Correcting Parsers
|
||||
%A J. R\*:ohrich
|
||||
%J Acta Informatica
|
||||
%V 13
|
||||
%P 115-139
|
||||
%D 1980
|
||||
8
doc/LLgen/Makefile
Normal file
8
doc/LLgen/Makefile
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
|
||||
# $Header$
|
||||
|
||||
EQN=eqn
|
||||
REFER=refer
|
||||
TBL=tbl
|
||||
|
||||
../LLgen.doc: LLgen.n LLgen.refs
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -p LLgen.refs LLgen.n | $(EQN) | $(TBL) > $@
|
||||
83
doc/Makefile
83
doc/Makefile
@ -2,52 +2,67 @@
|
||||
|
||||
SUF=pr
|
||||
PRINT=cat
|
||||
RESFILES=cref.$(SUF) pcref.$(SUF) val.$(SUF) v7bugs.$(SUF) install.$(SUF)\
|
||||
ack.$(SUF) cg.$(SUF) regadd.$(SUF) peep.$(SUF) toolkit.$(SUF) LLgen.$(SUF)\
|
||||
basic.$(SUF) 6500.$(SUF) ncg.$(SUF)
|
||||
NROFF=nroff
|
||||
TBL=tbl
|
||||
EQN=eqn
|
||||
PIC=pic
|
||||
REFER=refer
|
||||
MS=-ms
|
||||
|
||||
cref.$(SUF): cref.doc
|
||||
tbl $? | $(NROFF) >$@
|
||||
v7bugs.$(SUF): v7bugs.doc
|
||||
$(NROFF) $(MS) $? >$@
|
||||
ack.$(SUF): ack.doc
|
||||
$(NROFF) $(MS) $? >$@
|
||||
cg.$(SUF): cg.doc
|
||||
$(NROFF) $(MS) $? >$@
|
||||
ncg.$(SUF): ncg.doc
|
||||
$(NROFF) $(MS) $? >$@
|
||||
regadd.$(SUF): regadd.doc
|
||||
$(NROFF) $(MS) $? >$@
|
||||
install.$(SUF): install.doc
|
||||
$(NROFF) $(MS) $? >$@
|
||||
pcref.$(SUF): pcref.doc
|
||||
$(NROFF) $? >$@
|
||||
basic.$(SUF): basic.doc
|
||||
$(NROFF) $(MS) $? >$@
|
||||
peep.$(SUF): peep.doc
|
||||
$(NROFF) $(MS) $? >$@
|
||||
val.$(SUF): val.doc
|
||||
$(NROFF) $? >$@
|
||||
toolkit.$(SUF): toolkit.doc
|
||||
$(NROFF) $(MS) $? >$@
|
||||
LLgen.$(SUF): LLgen.doc
|
||||
eqn $? | $(NROFF) $(MS) >$@
|
||||
RESFILES= \
|
||||
toolkit.$(SUF) install.$(SUF) em.$(SUF) ack.$(SUF) v7bugs.$(SUF) \
|
||||
peep.$(SUF) cg.$(SUF) ncg.$(SUF) regadd.$(SUF) LLgen.$(SUF) \
|
||||
basic.$(SUF) crefman.$(SUF) pcref.$(SUF) val.$(SUF) \
|
||||
6500.$(SUF) i80.$(SUF) z80.$(SUF) top.$(SUF) ego.$(SUF) \
|
||||
m68020.$(SUF) occam.$(SUF) nopt.$(SUF)
|
||||
|
||||
.SUFFIXES: .doc .$(SUF)
|
||||
|
||||
.doc.$(SUF):
|
||||
$(NROFF) $(MS) $< > $@
|
||||
|
||||
crefman.$(SUF): crefman.doc
|
||||
$(EQN) crefman.doc | $(NROFF) $(MS) >$@
|
||||
v7bugs.$(SUF): v7bugs.doc
|
||||
$(NROFF) v7bugs.doc >$@
|
||||
install.$(SUF): install.doc
|
||||
$(TBL) install.doc | $(NROFF) $(MS) >$@
|
||||
pcref.$(SUF): pcref.doc
|
||||
$(NROFF) pcref.doc >$@
|
||||
val.$(SUF): val.doc
|
||||
$(NROFF) val.doc >$@
|
||||
6500.$(SUF): 6500.doc
|
||||
$(NROFF) $(MS) $? >$@
|
||||
$(TBL) 6500.doc | $(NROFF) $(MS) >$@
|
||||
LLgen.doc: LLgen.X
|
||||
LLgen.X:
|
||||
cd LLgen; make "EQN="$(EQN) "TBL="$(TBL) "REFER="$(REFER)
|
||||
top.doc: top.X
|
||||
top.X:
|
||||
cd top; make "EQN="$(EQN) "TBL="$(TBL) "REFER="$(REFER)
|
||||
occam.doc: occam.X
|
||||
occam.X:
|
||||
cd occam; make "PIC="$(PIC) "TBL="$(TBL) "EQN="$(EQN)
|
||||
ego.doc: ego.X
|
||||
ego.X:
|
||||
cd ego; make "REFER="$(REFER)
|
||||
em.$(SUF): em.X
|
||||
em.X:
|
||||
cd em; make "TBL="$(TBL) "NROFF="$(NROFF) "SUF="$(SUF)
|
||||
|
||||
install cmp:
|
||||
|
||||
distr: install.doc
|
||||
nroff -Tlp install.doc >install.pr
|
||||
tbl install.doc | nroff -Tlp $(MS) >install.pr
|
||||
|
||||
pr:
|
||||
@make "SUF="$SUF "NROFF="$NROFF "PRINT="$PRINT $(RESFILES) \
|
||||
>make.pr.out 2>&1
|
||||
@make "SUF="$(SUF) "NROFF="$(NROFF) "EQN="$(EQN) "TBL="$(TBL) \
|
||||
"PIC="$(PIC) "MS="$(MS) \
|
||||
$(RESFILES) >make.pr.out 2>&1
|
||||
@$(PRINT) $(RESFILES)
|
||||
|
||||
opr:
|
||||
make pr | opr
|
||||
|
||||
clean:
|
||||
-rm -f *.old $(RESFILES) *.t
|
||||
-rm -f *.old $(RESFILES) *.t *.out LLgen.doc top.doc \
|
||||
occam.doc ego.doc
|
||||
|
||||
264
doc/ack.doc
264
doc/ack.doc
@ -1,7 +1,6 @@
|
||||
.\" $Header$
|
||||
.nr LL 7.5i
|
||||
.tr ~
|
||||
.nr PD 1v
|
||||
.tr ~
|
||||
.TL
|
||||
Ack Description File
|
||||
.br
|
||||
@ -9,7 +8,7 @@ Reference Manual
|
||||
.AU
|
||||
Ed Keizer
|
||||
.AI
|
||||
Wiskundig Seminarium
|
||||
Vakgroep Informatica
|
||||
Vrije Universiteit
|
||||
Amsterdam
|
||||
.NH
|
||||
@ -24,16 +23,16 @@ source file.
|
||||
Each transformation table entry tells which input suffixes are
|
||||
allowed and what suffix/name the output file has.
|
||||
When the output file does not already satisfy the request of the
|
||||
user, with the flag \fB-c.suffix\fP, the table is scanned
|
||||
user, with the flag \fB\-c.suffix\fP, the table is scanned
|
||||
starting with the next transformation in the table for another
|
||||
transformation that has as input suffix the output suffix of
|
||||
the previous transformation.
|
||||
A few special transformations are recognized, among them is the
|
||||
combiner.
|
||||
A program combining several files into one.
|
||||
When no stop suffix was specified (flag \fB-c.suffix\fP) \fIack\fP
|
||||
stops after executing the combiner with as arguments the -
|
||||
possibly transformed - input files and libraries.
|
||||
combiner, which is
|
||||
a program combining several files into one.
|
||||
When no stop suffix was specified (flag \fB\-c.suffix\fP) \fIack\fP
|
||||
stops after executing the combiner with as arguments the \-
|
||||
possibly transformed \- input files and libraries.
|
||||
\fIAck\fP will only perform the transformations in the order in
|
||||
which they are presented in the table.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
@ -60,7 +59,7 @@ convoluted.
|
||||
First, when the last filename in the program call name is not
|
||||
one of \fIack\fP, \fIcc\fP, \fIacc\fP, \fIpc\fP or \fIapc\fP,
|
||||
this filename is used as the backend description name.
|
||||
Second, when the \fB-m\fP is present the \fB-m\fP is chopped of this
|
||||
Second, when the \fB\-m\fP is present the \fB\-m\fP is chopped of this
|
||||
flag and the rest is used as the backend description name.
|
||||
Third, when both failed the shell environment variable ACKM is
|
||||
used.
|
||||
@ -75,7 +74,8 @@ This descriptions are simply files read in at compile time.
|
||||
At the moment of writing this document, the descriptions
|
||||
included are: pdp, fe, i86, m68k2, vax2 and int.
|
||||
The name of a description is first searched for internally,
|
||||
then in the directory lib/ack and finally in the current
|
||||
then in lib/descr/\fIname\fP, then in
|
||||
lib/\fIname\fP/descr, band finally in the current
|
||||
directory of the user.
|
||||
.NH
|
||||
Using the description file
|
||||
@ -119,8 +119,8 @@ Syntax: (\fIsuffix sequence\fP:\fIsuffix sequence\fP=\fItext\fP)
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Example: (.c.p.e:.e=tail_em)
|
||||
.br
|
||||
If the two suffix sequences have a common member -~\&.e in this
|
||||
case~- the text is produced.
|
||||
If the two suffix sequences have a common member \-~\&.e in this
|
||||
case~\- the text is produced.
|
||||
When no common member is present the empty string is produced.
|
||||
Thus the example given is a constant expression.
|
||||
Normally, one of the suffix sequences is produced by variable
|
||||
@ -134,17 +134,17 @@ the text following the \fIneed\fP is appended to both the HEAD and
|
||||
TAIL variable.
|
||||
The value of the variable RTS is determined by the first
|
||||
transformation used with a \fIrts\fP property.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.IP
|
||||
Two runtime flags have effect on the value of one or more of
|
||||
these variables.
|
||||
The flag \fB-.suffix\fP has the same effect on these three variables
|
||||
The flag \fB\-.suffix\fP has the same effect on these three variables
|
||||
as if a file with that \fBsuffix\fP was included in the argument list
|
||||
and had to be translated.
|
||||
The flag \fB-r.suffix\fP only has that effect on the TAIL
|
||||
The flag \fB\-r.suffix\fP only has that effect on the TAIL
|
||||
variable.
|
||||
The program call names \fIacc\fP and \fIcc\fP have the effect
|
||||
of an automatic \fB-.c\fB flag.
|
||||
\fIApc\fP and \fIpc\fP have the effect of an automatic \fB-.p\fP flag.
|
||||
of an automatic \fB\-.c\fP flag.
|
||||
\fIApc\fP and \fIpc\fP have the effect of an automatic \fB\-.p\fP flag.
|
||||
.IP "Line splitting"
|
||||
.br
|
||||
The string is transformed into a sequence of strings by replacing
|
||||
@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ of the line.
|
||||
Three special two-characters sequences exist: \e#, \e\e and
|
||||
\e<newline>.
|
||||
Their effect is described under 'backslashing' above.
|
||||
Each - nonempty - line starts with a keyword, possibly
|
||||
Each \- nonempty \- line starts with a keyword, possibly
|
||||
preceded by blank space.
|
||||
The keyword can be followed by a further specification.
|
||||
The two are separated by blank space.
|
||||
@ -193,7 +193,7 @@ The lines in between associate properties to a transformation
|
||||
and may be presented in any order.
|
||||
The identifier after the \fIname\fP keyword determines the name
|
||||
of the transformation.
|
||||
This name is used for debugging and by the \fB-R\fP flag.
|
||||
This name is used for debugging and by the \fB\-R\fP flag.
|
||||
The keywords are used to specify which input suffices are
|
||||
recognized by that transformation,
|
||||
the program to run, the arguments to be handed to that program
|
||||
@ -205,14 +205,13 @@ The possible keywords are:
|
||||
.br
|
||||
followed by a sequence of suffices.
|
||||
Each file with one of these suffices is allowed as input file.
|
||||
Preprocessor transformations, those with the \fBP\fP property
|
||||
after the \fIprop\fP keyword, do not need the \fIfrom\fP
|
||||
Preprocessor transformations do not need the \fIfrom\fP
|
||||
keyword. All other transformations do.
|
||||
.nr PD 0
|
||||
.IP \fIto\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
followed by the suffix of the output file name or in the case of a
|
||||
linker -~indicated by C option after the \fIprop\fP keyword~-
|
||||
linker
|
||||
the output file name.
|
||||
.IP \fIprogram\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
@ -235,9 +234,9 @@ assignment separated by blank space.
|
||||
As soon as both description files are read, \fIack\fP looks
|
||||
at all transformations in these files to find a match for the
|
||||
flags given to \fIack\fP.
|
||||
The flags \fB-m\fP, \fB-o\fP,
|
||||
\fI-O\fP, \fB-r\fP, \fB-v\fP, \fB-g\fP, -\fB-c\fP, \fB-t\fP,
|
||||
\fB-k\fP, \fB-R\fP and -\f-.\fP are specific to \fIack\fP and
|
||||
The flags \fB\-m\fP, \fB\-o\fP,
|
||||
\fB\-O\fP, \fB\-r\fP, \fB\-v\fP, \fB\-g\fP, \-\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-t\fP,
|
||||
\fB\-k\fP, \fB\-R\fP and \-\fB\-.\fP are specific to \fIack\fP and
|
||||
not handed down to any transformation.
|
||||
The matching is performed in the order in which the entries
|
||||
appear in the definition.
|
||||
@ -249,11 +248,11 @@ replaced by the characters matched by
|
||||
the * in the expression.
|
||||
The right hand part is also subject to variable replacement.
|
||||
The variable will probably be used in the program arguments.
|
||||
The \fB-l\fP flags are special,
|
||||
The \fB\-l\fP flags are special,
|
||||
the order in which they are presented to \fIack\fP must be
|
||||
preserved.
|
||||
The identifier LNAME is used in conjunction with the scanning of
|
||||
\fB-l\fP flags.
|
||||
\fB\-l\fP flags.
|
||||
The value assigned to LNAME is used to replace the flag.
|
||||
The example further on shows the use all this.
|
||||
.IP \fIargs\fP
|
||||
@ -261,39 +260,51 @@ The example further on shows the use all this.
|
||||
The keyword is followed by the program call arguments.
|
||||
It is subject to backslashing, variable replacement, expression
|
||||
replacement, line splitting and IO replacement.
|
||||
The variables assigned to by \fImapflags\P will probably be
|
||||
The variables assigned to by \fImapflags\fP will probably be
|
||||
used here.
|
||||
The flags not recognized by \fIack\fP or any of the transformations
|
||||
are passed to the linker and inserted before all other arguments.
|
||||
.IP \fIprop\fB
|
||||
.IP \fIstdin\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
This -~optional~- keyword is followed by a sequence of options,
|
||||
each option is indicated by one character
|
||||
signifying a special property of the transformation.
|
||||
This keyword indicates that the transformation reads from standard input.
|
||||
.IP \fIstdout\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
This keyword indicates that the transformation writes on standard output.
|
||||
.IP \fIoptimizer\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
This keyword indicates that this transformation is an optimizer.
|
||||
.IP \fIlinker\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
This keyword indicates that this transformation is the linker.
|
||||
.IP \fIcombiner\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
This keyword indicates that this transformation is a combiner. A combiner
|
||||
is a program combining several files into one, but is not a linker.
|
||||
An example of a combiner is the global optimizer.
|
||||
.IP \fIprep\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
This \-~optional~\- keyword is followed an option indicating its relation
|
||||
to the preprocessor.
|
||||
The possible options are:
|
||||
.DS X
|
||||
< the input file will be read from standard input
|
||||
> the output file will be written on standard output
|
||||
p the input files must be preprocessed
|
||||
m the input files must be preprocessed when starting with #
|
||||
O this transformation is an optimizer and may be skipped
|
||||
P this transformation is the preprocessor
|
||||
C this transformation is the linker
|
||||
always the input files must be preprocessed
|
||||
cond the input files must be preprocessed when starting with #
|
||||
is this transformation is the preprocessor
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.IP \fIrts\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
This -~optional~- keyword indicates that the rest of the line must be
|
||||
This \-~optional~\- keyword indicates that the rest of the line must be
|
||||
used to set the variable RTS, if it was not already set.
|
||||
Thus the variable RTS is set by the first transformation
|
||||
executed which such a property or as a result from \fIack\fP's program
|
||||
call name (acc, cc, apc or pc) or by the \fB-.suffix\fP flag.
|
||||
call name (acc, cc, apc or pc) or by the \fB\-.suffix\fP flag.
|
||||
.IP \fIneed\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
This -~optional~- keyword indicates that the rest of the line must be
|
||||
This \-~optional~\- keyword indicates that the rest of the line must be
|
||||
concatenated to the NEEDS variable.
|
||||
This is done once for every transformation used or indicated
|
||||
by one of the program call names mentioned above or indicated
|
||||
by the \fB-.suffix\fP flag.
|
||||
by the \fB\-.suffix\fP flag.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
.nr PD 1v
|
||||
.NH
|
||||
@ -302,119 +313,118 @@ Conventions used in description files
|
||||
\fIAck\fP reads two description files.
|
||||
A few of the variables defined in the machine specific file
|
||||
are used by the descriptions of the front-ends.
|
||||
Other variables, set by \fack\fB, are of use to all
|
||||
Other variables, set by \fIack\fP, are of use to all
|
||||
transformations.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
\fIAck\fP sets the variable EM to the home directory of the
|
||||
Amsterdam Compiler Kit.
|
||||
The variable SOURCE is set to the name of the argument that is currently
|
||||
being massaged, this is usefull for debugging.
|
||||
The variable SUFFIX is set to the suffix of the argument that is
|
||||
currently being massaged.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
The variable M indicates the
|
||||
directory in mach/{M}/lib/tail_..... and NAME is the string to
|
||||
be defined by the preprocessor with -D{NAME}.
|
||||
directory in lib/{M}/tail_..... and NAME is the string to
|
||||
be defined by the preprocessor with \-D{NAME}.
|
||||
The definitions of {w}, {s}, {l}, {d}, {f} and {p} indicate
|
||||
EM_WSIZE, EM_SSIZE, EM_LSIZE, EM_DSIZE, EM_FSIZE and EM_PSIZE
|
||||
respectively.
|
||||
.br
|
||||
The variable INCLUDES is used as the last argument to \fIcpp\fP,
|
||||
it is currently used to add the directory {EM}/include to
|
||||
The variable INCLUDES is used as the last argument to \fIcpp\fP.
|
||||
It is used to add directories to
|
||||
the list of directories containing #include files.
|
||||
{EM}/include contains a few files used by the library routines
|
||||
for part III from the
|
||||
.UX
|
||||
manual.
|
||||
These routines are included in the kit.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The variables HEAD, TAIL and RTS are set by \fIack\fP and used
|
||||
to compose the arguments for the linker.
|
||||
.NH
|
||||
Example
|
||||
.sp 1
|
||||
description for front-end
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Description for front-end
|
||||
.DS X
|
||||
name cpp # the C-preprocessor
|
||||
# no from, it's governed by the P property
|
||||
to .i # result files have suffix i
|
||||
program {EM}/lib/cpp # pathname of loadfile
|
||||
mapflag -I* CPP_F={CPP_F?} -I* # grab -I.. -U.. and
|
||||
mapflag -U* CPP_F={CPP_F?} -U* # -D.. to use as arguments
|
||||
mapflag -D* CPP_F={CPP_F?} -D* # in the variable CPP_F
|
||||
args {CPP_F?} {INCLUDES?} -D{NAME} -DEM_WSIZE={w} -DEM_PSIZE={p} \
|
||||
-DEM_SSIZE={s} -DEM_LSIZE={l} -DEM_FSIZE={f} -DEM_DSIZE={d} <
|
||||
# The arguments are: first the -[IUD]...
|
||||
# then the include dir's for this machine
|
||||
# then the NAME and size valeus finally
|
||||
# followed by the input file name
|
||||
prop >P # Output on stdout, is preprocessor
|
||||
.ta 4n 40n
|
||||
name cpp # the C-preprocessor
|
||||
# no from, it's governed by the P property
|
||||
to .i # result files have suffix i
|
||||
program {EM}/lib/cpp # pathname of loadfile
|
||||
mapflag \-I* CPP_F={CPP_F?} \-I* # grab \-I.. \-U.. and
|
||||
mapflag \-U* CPP_F={CPP_F?} \-U* # \-D.. to use as arguments
|
||||
mapflag \-D* CPP_F={CPP_F?} \-D* # in the variable CPP_F
|
||||
args {CPP_F?} {INCLUDES?} \-D{NAME} \-DEM_WSIZE={w} \-DEM_PSIZE={p} \e
|
||||
\-DEM_SSIZE={s} \-DEM_LSIZE={l} \-DEM_FSIZE={f} \-DEM_DSIZE={d} <
|
||||
# The arguments are: first the \-[IUD]...
|
||||
# then the include dir's for this machine
|
||||
# then the NAME and size valeus finally
|
||||
# followed by the input file name
|
||||
stdout # Output on stdout
|
||||
prep is # Is preprocessor
|
||||
end
|
||||
name cem # the C-compiler proper
|
||||
from .c # used for files with suffix .c
|
||||
to .k # produces compact code files
|
||||
program {EM}/lib/em_cem # pathname of loadfile
|
||||
mapflag -p CEM_F={CEM_F?} -Xp # pass -p as -Xp to cem
|
||||
mapflag -L CEM_F={CEM_F?} -l # pass -L as -l to cem
|
||||
args -Vw{w}i{w}p{p}f{f}s{s}l{l}d{d} {CEM_F?}
|
||||
# the arguments are the object sizes in
|
||||
# the -V... flag and possibly -l and -Xp
|
||||
prop <>p # input on stdin, output on stdout, use cpp
|
||||
rts .c # use the C run-time system
|
||||
need .c # use the C libraries
|
||||
name cem # the C-compiler proper
|
||||
from .c # used for files with suffix .c
|
||||
to .k # produces compact code files
|
||||
program {EM}/lib/em_cem # pathname of loadfile
|
||||
mapflag \-p CEM_F={CEM_F?} \-Xp # pass \-p as \-Xp to cem
|
||||
mapflag \-L CEM_F={CEM_F?} \-l # pass \-L as \-l to cem
|
||||
args \-Vw{w}i{w}p{p}f{f}s{s}l{l}d{d} {CEM_F?}
|
||||
# the arguments are the object sizes in
|
||||
# the \-V... flag and possibly \-l and \-Xp
|
||||
stdin # input from stdin
|
||||
stdout # output on stdout
|
||||
prep always # use cpp
|
||||
rts .c # use the C run-time system
|
||||
need .c # use the C libraries
|
||||
end
|
||||
name decode # make human readable files from compact code
|
||||
from .k.m # accept files with suffix .k or .m
|
||||
to .e # produce .e files
|
||||
program {EM}/lib/em_decode # pathname of loadfile
|
||||
args < # the input file name is the only argument
|
||||
prop > # the output comes on stdout
|
||||
name decode # make human readable files from compact code
|
||||
from .k.m # accept files with suffix .k or .m
|
||||
to .e # produce .e files
|
||||
program {EM}/lib/em_decode # pathname of loadfile
|
||||
args < # the input file name is the only argument
|
||||
stdout # the output comes on stdout
|
||||
end
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
|
||||
.DS X
|
||||
.ta 4n 40n
|
||||
Example of a backend, in this case the EM assembler/loader.
|
||||
|
||||
var w=2 # wordsize 2
|
||||
var p=2 # pointersize 2
|
||||
var s=2 # short size 2
|
||||
var l=4 # long size 4
|
||||
var f=4 # float size 4
|
||||
var d=8 # double size 8
|
||||
var M=int # Unused in this example
|
||||
var NAME=int22 # for cpp (NAME=int results in #define int 1)
|
||||
var LIB=mach/int/lib/tail_ # part of file name for libraries
|
||||
var RT=mach/int/lib/head_ # part of file name for run-time startoff
|
||||
var SIZE_FLAG=-sm # default internal table size flag
|
||||
var INCLUDES=-I{EM}/include # use {EM}/include for #include files
|
||||
name asld # Assembler/loader
|
||||
from .k.m.a # accepts compact code and archives
|
||||
to e.out # output file name
|
||||
program {EM}/lib/em_ass # load file pathname
|
||||
mapflag -l* LNAME={EM}/{LIB}* # e.g. -ly becomes
|
||||
# {EM}/mach/int/lib/tail_y
|
||||
mapflag -+* ASS_F={ASS_F?} -+* # recognize -+ and --
|
||||
mapflag --* ASS_F={ASS_F?} --*
|
||||
mapflag -s* SIZE_FLAG=-s* # overwrite old value of SIZE_FLAG
|
||||
args {SIZE_FLAG} \
|
||||
({RTS}:.c={EM}/{RT}cc) ({RTS}:.p={EM}/{RT}pc) -o > < \
|
||||
(.p:{TAIL}={EM}/{LIB}pc) \
|
||||
(.c:{TAIL}={EM}/{LIB}cc.1s {EM}/{LIB}cc.2g) \
|
||||
(.c.p:{TAIL}={EM}/{LIB}mon)
|
||||
# -s[sml] must be first argument
|
||||
# the next line contains the choice for head_cc or head_pc
|
||||
# and the specification of in- and output.
|
||||
# the last three args lines choose libraries
|
||||
prop C # This is the final stage
|
||||
var w=2 # wordsize 2
|
||||
var p=2 # pointersize 2
|
||||
var s=2 # short size 2
|
||||
var l=4 # long size 4
|
||||
var f=4 # float size 4
|
||||
var d=8 # dou‹ÚXYÂHÈ\<5C>Ùˆš[H˜e startoff
|
||||
var SIZE_FLAG=\-sm # default internal table size flag
|
||||
var INCLUDES=\-I{EM}/include # use {EM}/include for #include files
|
||||
name asld # Assembler/loader
|
||||
from .k.m.a # accepts compact code and archives
|
||||
to e.out # output file name
|
||||
program {EM}/lib/em_ass # load file pathname
|
||||
mapflag \-l* LNAME={EM}/{LIB}* # e.g. \-ly becomes
|
||||
# {EM}/mach/int/lib/tail_y
|
||||
mapflag \-+* ASS_F={ASS_F?} \-+* # recognize \-+ and \-\-
|
||||
mapflag \-\-* ASS_F={ASS_F?} \-\-*
|
||||
mapflag \-s* SIZE_FLAG=\-s* # overwrite old value of SIZE_FLAG
|
||||
args {SIZE_FLAG} \e
|
||||
({RTS}:.c={EM}/{RT}cc) ({RTS}:.p={EM}/{RT}pc) \-o > < \e
|
||||
(.p:{TAIL}={EM}/{LIB}pc) \e
|
||||
(.c:{TAIL}={EM}/{LIB}cc.1s {EM}/{LIB}cc.2g) \e
|
||||
(.c.p:{TAIL}={EM}/{LIB}mon)
|
||||
# \-s[sml] must be first argument
|
||||
# the next line contains the choice for head_cc or head_pc
|
||||
# and the specification of in- and output.
|
||||
# the last three args lines choose libraries
|
||||
linker
|
||||
end
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
|
||||
The command "ack -mint -v -v -I../h -L -ly prog.c"
|
||||
would result in the following
|
||||
The command \fIack \-mint \-v \-v \-I../h \-L \-ly prog.c\fP
|
||||
would result in the following
|
||||
calls (with exec(II)):
|
||||
.DS X
|
||||
1) /lib/cpp -I../h -I/usr/em/include -Dint22 -DEM_WSIZE=2 -DEM_PSIZE=2
|
||||
-DEM_SSIZE=2 -DEM_LSIZE=4 -DEM_FSIZE=4 -DEM_DSIZE=8 prog.c
|
||||
2) /usr/em/lib/em_cem -Vw2i2p2f4s2l4d8 -l
|
||||
3) /usr/em/lib/em_ass -sm /usr/em/mach/int/lib/head_cc -o e.out prog.k
|
||||
/usr/em/mach/int/lib/tail_y /usr/em/mach/int/lib/tail_cc.1s
|
||||
/usr/em/mach/int/lib/tail_cc.2g /usr/em/mach/int/lib/tail_mon
|
||||
.ta 4n
|
||||
1) /lib/cpp \-I../h \-I/usr/em/include \-Dint22 \-DEM_WSIZE=2 \-DEM_PSIZE=2 \e
|
||||
\-DEM_SSIZE=2 \-DEM_LSIZE=4 \-DEM_FSIZE=4 \-DEM_DSIZE=8 prog.c
|
||||
2) /usr/em/lib/em_cem \-Vw2i2p2f4s2l4d8 \-l
|
||||
3) /usr/em/lib/em_ass \-sm /usr/em/mach/int/lib/head_cc \-o e.out prog.k
|
||||
/usr/em/mach/int/lib/tail_y /usr/em/mach/int/lib/tail_cc.1s
|
||||
/usr/em/mach/int/lib/tail_cc.2g /usr/em/mach/int/lib/tail_mon
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
|
||||
20
doc/cg.doc
20
doc/cg.doc
@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
|
||||
.\" $Header$
|
||||
.RP
|
||||
.ND Nov 1984
|
||||
.TL
|
||||
The table driven code generator from
|
||||
.br
|
||||
@ -17,6 +18,11 @@ The Amsterdam Compiler Kit is such a collection of tools.
|
||||
This document provides a description of the internal workings
|
||||
of the table driven code generator in the Amsterdam Compiler Kit,
|
||||
and a description of syntax and semantics of the driving table.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
>>> NOTE <<<
|
||||
.br
|
||||
This document pertains to the \fBold\fP code generator. Refer to the
|
||||
"Second Revised Edition" for the new code generator.
|
||||
.AE
|
||||
.NH 1
|
||||
Introduction
|
||||
@ -197,10 +203,10 @@ This is given as
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
FORMAT = string
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
The default for string is "%d" or "%ld" depending on the wordsize of
|
||||
the machine. For example on the PDP 11 one can use
|
||||
The default for string is "%ld".
|
||||
For example on the PDP 11 one can use
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
FORMAT= "0%o"
|
||||
FORMAT= "0%lo"
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
to satisfy the old UNIX assembler that reads octal unless followed by
|
||||
a period, and the ACK assembler that follows C conventions.
|
||||
@ -974,7 +980,7 @@ and their range depends on the machine at hand.
|
||||
The type 'int' is used for things like labelcounters that won't require
|
||||
more than 16 bits precision.
|
||||
The type 'word' is used among others to assemble datawords and
|
||||
is of type 'long' if EM_WSIZE>2.
|
||||
is of type 'long'.
|
||||
The type 'full' is used for addresses and is of type 'long' if
|
||||
EM_WSIZE>2 or EM_PSIZE>2.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
@ -1115,13 +1121,13 @@ Example mach.h for the PDP-11
|
||||
|
||||
#define cst_fmt "$%d."
|
||||
#define off_fmt "%d."
|
||||
#define ilb_fmt "I%02x%x"
|
||||
#define ilb_fmt "I%x_%x"
|
||||
#define dlb_fmt "_%d"
|
||||
#define hol_fmt "hol%d"
|
||||
|
||||
#define hol_off "%d.+hol%d"
|
||||
#define hol_off "%ld.+hol%d"
|
||||
|
||||
#define con_cst(x) fprintf(codefile,"%d.\en",x)
|
||||
#define con_cst(x) fprintf(codefile,"%ld.\en",x)
|
||||
#define con_ilb(x) fprintf(codefile,"%s\en",x)
|
||||
#define con_dlb(x) fprintf(codefile,"%s\en",x)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1,5 +1,4 @@
|
||||
.\" $Header$
|
||||
.ll 72
|
||||
.nr ID 4
|
||||
.de hd
|
||||
'sp 2
|
||||
|
||||
627
doc/crefman.doc
Normal file
627
doc/crefman.doc
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,627 @@
|
||||
.EQ
|
||||
delim $$
|
||||
.EN
|
||||
.RP
|
||||
.TL
|
||||
ACK/CEM Compiler
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Reference Manual
|
||||
.AU
|
||||
Erik H. Baalbergen
|
||||
.AI
|
||||
Department of Mathematics and Computer Science
|
||||
Vrije Universiteit
|
||||
Amsterdam
|
||||
The Netherlands
|
||||
.AB no
|
||||
.AE
|
||||
.NH
|
||||
C Language
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
This section discusses the extensions to and deviations from the C language,
|
||||
as described in [1].
|
||||
The issues are numbered according to the reference manual.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
2.2 Identifiers
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Upper and lower case letters are different.
|
||||
The number of significant letters
|
||||
is 32 by default, but may be set to another value using the \fB\-M\fP option.
|
||||
The identifier length should be set according to the rest of the compilation
|
||||
programs.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
2.3 Keywords
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
\f5asm\fP
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The keyword \f5asm\fP
|
||||
is recognized.
|
||||
However, the statement
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.ft 5
|
||||
asm(string);
|
||||
.ft R
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
is skipped, while a warning is given.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
\f5enum\fP
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The \f5enum\fP keyword is recognized and interpreted.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
\f5entry\fP, \f5fortran\fP
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The words \f5entry\fP and \f5fortran\fP
|
||||
are reserved under the restricted option.
|
||||
The words are not interpreted by the compiler.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
2.4.1 Integer Constants
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
An octal or hex constant which is less than or equal to the largest unsigned
|
||||
(target) machine integer is taken to be \f5unsigned\fP.
|
||||
An octal or hex constant which exceeds the largest unsigned (target) machine
|
||||
integer is taken to be \f5long\fP.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
2.4.3 Character Constants
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A character constant is a sequence of 1 up to \f5sizeof(int)\fP characters
|
||||
enclosed in single quotes.
|
||||
The value of a character constant '$c sub 1 c sub 2 ... c sub n$'
|
||||
is $d sub n + M \(mu d sub {n - 1} + ... + M sup {n - 1} \(mu d sub 2 + M sup n \(mu d sub 1$,
|
||||
where M is 1 + maximum unsigned number representable in an \f5unsigned char\fP,
|
||||
and $d sub i$ is the signed value (ASCII)
|
||||
of character $c sub i$.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
2.4.4 Floating Constants
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The compiler does not support compile-time floating point arithmetic.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
2.6 Hardware characteristics
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The compiler is capable of producing EM code for machines with the following
|
||||
properties
|
||||
.IP \(bu
|
||||
a \f5char\fP is 8 bits
|
||||
.IP \(bu
|
||||
the size of \f5int\fP is equal to the word size
|
||||
.IP \(bu
|
||||
the size of \f5short\fP may not exceed the size of \f5int\fP
|
||||
.IP \(bu
|
||||
the size of \f5int\fP may not exceed the size of \f5long\fP
|
||||
.IP \(bu
|
||||
the size of pointers is equal to the size of either \f5short\fP, \f5int\fP
|
||||
or \f5long\fP
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
4 What's in a name?
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
\f5char\fP
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Objects of type \f5char\fP are taken to be signed.
|
||||
The combination \f5unsigned char\fP is legal.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
\f5unsigned\fP
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The type combinations \f5unsigned char\fP, \f5unsigned short\fP and
|
||||
\f5unsigned long\fP are supported.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
\f5enum\fP
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The data type \f5enum\fP is implemented as described
|
||||
in \fIRecent Changes to C\fP (see appendix A).
|
||||
.I Cem
|
||||
treats enumeration variables as if they were \f5int\fP.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
\f5void\fP
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Type \f5void\fP is implemented.
|
||||
The type specifies an empty set of values, which takes no storage space.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
\fRFundamental types\fP
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The names of the fundamental types can be redefined by the user, using
|
||||
\f5typedef\fP.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
7 Expressions
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The order of evaluation of expressions depends on the complexity of the
|
||||
subexpressions.
|
||||
In case of commutative operations, the most complex subexpression is
|
||||
evaluated first.
|
||||
Parameter lists are evaluated from right to left.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
7.2 Unary operators
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The type of a \f5sizeof\fP expression is \f5unsigned int\fP.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
7.13 Conditional operator
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Both the second and the third expression in a conditional expression may
|
||||
include assignment operators.
|
||||
They may be structs or unions.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
7.14 Assignment operators
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Structures may be assigned, passed as arguments to functions, and returned
|
||||
by functions.
|
||||
The types of operands taking part must be the same.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
8.2 Type specifiers
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The combinations \f5unsigned char\fP, \f5unsigned short\fP
|
||||
and \f5unsigned long\fP are implemented.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
8.5 Structure and union declarations
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Fields of any integral type, either signed or unsigned,
|
||||
are supported, as long as the type fits in a word on the target machine.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Fields are left adjusted by default; the first field is put into the left
|
||||
part of a word, the next one on the right side of the first one, etc.
|
||||
The \f5-Vr\fP option in the call of the compiler
|
||||
causes fields to be right adjusted within a machine word.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The tags of structs and unions occupy a different name space from that of
|
||||
variables and that of member names.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
9.7 Switch statement
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The type of \fIexpression\fP in
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.ft 5
|
||||
\f5switch (\fP\fIexpression\fP\f5)\fP \fIstatement\fP
|
||||
.ft
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
must be integral.
|
||||
A warning is given under the restricted option if the type is \f5long\fP.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
10 External definitions
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
See [4] for a discussion on this complicated issue.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
10.1 External function definitions
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Structures may be passed as arguments to functions, and returned
|
||||
by functions.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
11.1 Lexical scope
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Typedef names may be redeclared like any other variable name; the ice mentioned
|
||||
in \(sc11.1 is walked correctly.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
12 Compiler control lines
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Lines which do not occur within comment, and with \f5#\fP as first
|
||||
character, are interpreted as compiler control line.
|
||||
There may be an arbitrary number of spaces, tabs and comments (collectively
|
||||
referred as \fIwhite space\fP) following the \f5#\fP.
|
||||
Comments may contain newline characters.
|
||||
Control lines with only white space between the \f5#\fP and the line separator
|
||||
are skipped.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The #\f5include\fP, #\f5ifdef\fP, #\f5ifndef\fP, #\f5undef\fP, #\f5else\fP and
|
||||
#\f5endif\fP control lines and line directives consist of a fixed number of
|
||||
arguments.
|
||||
The list of arguments may be followed an arbitrary sequence of characters,
|
||||
in which comment is interpreted as such.
|
||||
(I.e., the text between \f5/*\fP and \f5*/\fP is skipped, regardless of
|
||||
newlines; note that commented-out lines beginning with \f5#\fP are not
|
||||
considered to be control lines.)
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
12.1 Token replacement
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The replacement text of macros is taken to be a string of characters, in which
|
||||
an identifier may stand for a formal parameter, and in which comment is
|
||||
interpreted as such.
|
||||
Comments and newline characters, preceeded by a backslash, in the replacement
|
||||
text are replaced by a space character.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The actual parameters of a macro are considered tokens and are
|
||||
balanced with regard to \f5()\fP, \f5{}\fP and \f5[]\fP.
|
||||
This prevents the use of macros like
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.ft 5
|
||||
CTL([)
|
||||
.ft
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Formal parameters of a macro must have unique names within the formal-parameter
|
||||
list of that macro.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A message is given at the definition of a macro if the macro has
|
||||
already been #\f5defined\fP, while the number of formal parameters differ or
|
||||
the replacement texts are not equal (apart from leading and trailing
|
||||
white space).
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Recursive use of macros is detected by the compiler.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Standard #\f5defined\fP macros are
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
\f5__FILE__\fP name of current input file as string constant
|
||||
\f5__DATE__\fP curent date as string constant; e.g. \f5"Tue Wed 2 14:45:23 1986"\fP
|
||||
\f5__LINE__\fP current line number as an integer
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
No message is given if \fIidentifier\fP is not known in
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.ft 5
|
||||
#undef \fIidentifier\fP
|
||||
.ft
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
12.2 File inclusion
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A newline character is appended to each file which is included.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
12.3 Conditional compilation
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The #\f5if\fP, #\f5ifdef\fP and #\f5ifndef\fP control lines may be followed
|
||||
by an arbitrary number of
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.ft 5
|
||||
#elif \fIconstant-expression\fP
|
||||
.ft
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
control lines, before the corresponding #\f5else\fP or #\f5endif\fP
|
||||
is encountered.
|
||||
The construct
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.ft 5
|
||||
#elif \fIconstant-expression\fP
|
||||
some text
|
||||
#endif /* corresponding to #elif */
|
||||
.ft
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
is equivalent to
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.ft 5
|
||||
#else
|
||||
#if \fIconstant-expression\fP
|
||||
some text
|
||||
#endif /* corresponding to #if */
|
||||
#endif /* corresponding to #else */
|
||||
.ft
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The \fIconstant-expression\fP in #\f5if\fP and #\f5elif\fP control lines
|
||||
may contain the construction
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.ft 5
|
||||
defined(\fIidentifier\fP)
|
||||
.ft
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
which is replaced by \f51\fP, if \fIidentifier\fP has been #\f5defined\fP,
|
||||
and by \f50\fP, if not.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Comments in skipped lines are interpreted as such.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
12.4 Line control
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Line directives may occur in the following forms:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.ft 5
|
||||
#line \fIconstant\fP
|
||||
#line \fIconstant\fP "\fIfilename\fP"
|
||||
#\fIconstant\fP
|
||||
#\fIconstant\fP "\fIfilename\fP"
|
||||
.ft
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
Note that \fIfilename\fP is enclosed in double quotes.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
14.2 Functions
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
If a pointer to a function is called, the function the pointer points to
|
||||
is called instead.
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
15 Constant expressions
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The compiler distinguishes the following types of integral constant expressions
|
||||
.IP \(bu
|
||||
field-width specifier
|
||||
.IP \(bu
|
||||
case-entry specifier
|
||||
.IP \(bu
|
||||
array-size specifier
|
||||
.IP \(bu
|
||||
global variable initialization value
|
||||
.IP \(bu
|
||||
enum-value specifier
|
||||
.IP \(bu
|
||||
truth value in \f5#if\fP control line
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Constant integral expressions are compile-time evaluated while an effort
|
||||
is made to report overflow.
|
||||
Constant floating expressions are not compile-time evaluated.
|
||||
.NH
|
||||
Compiler flags
|
||||
.IP \fB\-C\fR
|
||||
Run the preprocessor stand-alone while maintaining the comments.
|
||||
Line directives are produced whenever needed.
|
||||
.IP \fB\-D\fP\fIname\fP=\fIstring-of-characters\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Define \fIname\fR as macro with \fIstring-of-characters\fR as
|
||||
replacement text.
|
||||
.IP \fB\-D\fP\fIname\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Equal to \fB\-D\fP\fIname\fP\fB=1\fP.
|
||||
.IP \fB\-E\fP
|
||||
Run the preprocessor stand alone, i.e.,
|
||||
list the sequence of input tokens and delete any comments.
|
||||
Line directives are produced whenever needed.
|
||||
.IP \fB\-I\fIpath\fR
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Prepend \fIpath\fR to the list of include directories.
|
||||
To put the directories "include", "sys/h" and "util/h" into the
|
||||
include directory list in that order, the user has to specify
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.ft 5
|
||||
-Iinclude -Isys/h -Iutil/h
|
||||
.ft R
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
An empty \fIpath\fP causes the standard include
|
||||
directory (usually \f5/usr/include\fP) to be forgotten.
|
||||
.IP \fB\-M\fP\fIn\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Set maximum significant identifier length to \fIn\fP.
|
||||
.IP \fB\-n\fP
|
||||
Suppress EM register messages.
|
||||
The user-declared variables are not stored into registers on the target
|
||||
machine.
|
||||
.IP \fB\-p\fP
|
||||
Generate the EM \fBfil\fP and \fBlin\fP instructions in order to enable
|
||||
an interpreter to keep track of the current location in the source code.
|
||||
.IP \fB\-P\fP
|
||||
Equivalent with \fB\-E\fP, but without line directives.
|
||||
.IP \fB\-R\fP
|
||||
Interpret the input as restricted C (according to the language as
|
||||
described in [1]).
|
||||
.IP \fB\-T\fP\fIpath\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Create temporary files, if necessary, in directory \fIpath\fP.
|
||||
.IP \fB\-U\fP\fIname\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Get rid of the compiler-predefined macro \fIname\fP, i.e.,
|
||||
consider
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.ft 5
|
||||
#undef \fIname\fP
|
||||
.ft R
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
to appear in the beginning of the file.
|
||||
.IP \fB\-V\fIcm\fR.\fIn\fR,\ \fB\-V\fIcm\fR.\fIncm\fR.\fIn\fR\ ...
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Set the size and alignment requirements.
|
||||
The letter \fIc\fR indicates the simple type, which is one of
|
||||
\fBs\fR(short), \fBi\fR(int), \fBl\fR(long), \fBf\fR(float), \fBd\fR(double)
|
||||
or \fBp\fR(pointer).
|
||||
If \fIc\fR is \fBS\fP or \fBU\fP, then \fIn\fP is taken to be the initial
|
||||
alignment of structs or unions, respectively.
|
||||
The effective alignment of a struct or union is the least common multiple
|
||||
of the initial struct/union alignment and the alignments of its members.
|
||||
The \fIm\fR parameter can be used to specify the length of the type (in bytes)
|
||||
and the \fIn\fR parameter for the alignment of that type.
|
||||
Absence of \fIm\fR or \fIn\fR causes the default value to be retained.
|
||||
To specify that the bitfields should be right adjusted instead of the
|
||||
default left adjustment, specify \fBr\fR as \fIc\fR parameter.
|
||||
.IP \fB\-w\fR
|
||||
Suppress warning messages
|
||||
.IP \fB\-\-\fIcharacter\fR
|
||||
.br
|
||||
Set debug-flag \fIcharacter\fP.
|
||||
This enables some special features offered by a debug and develop version of
|
||||
the compiler.
|
||||
Some particular flags may be recognized, others may have surprising effects.
|
||||
.RS
|
||||
.IP \fBd\fP
|
||||
Generate a dependency graph, reflecting the calling structure of functions.
|
||||
Lines of the form
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.ft 5
|
||||
DFA: \fIcalling-function\fP: \fIcalled-function\fP
|
||||
.ft
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
are generated whenever a function call is encountered.
|
||||
.IP \fBf\fP
|
||||
Dump whole identifier table, including macros and reserved words.
|
||||
.IP \fBh\fP
|
||||
Supply hash-table statistics.
|
||||
.IP \fBi\fP
|
||||
Print names of included files.
|
||||
.IP \fBm\fP
|
||||
Supply statistics concerning the memory allocation.
|
||||
.IP \fBt\fP
|
||||
Dump table of identifiers.
|
||||
.IP \fBu\fP
|
||||
Generate extra statistics concerning the predefined types and identifiers.
|
||||
Works in combination with \fBf\fP or \fBt\fP.
|
||||
.IP \fBx\fP
|
||||
Print expression trees in human-readable format.
|
||||
.RE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
References
|
||||
.IP [1]
|
||||
Brian W. Kernighan, Dennis M. Ritchie,
|
||||
.I
|
||||
The C Programming Language
|
||||
.R
|
||||
.IP [2]
|
||||
L. Rosler,
|
||||
.I
|
||||
Draft Proposed Standard - Programming Language C,
|
||||
.R
|
||||
ANSI X3J11 Language Subcommittee
|
||||
.IP [3]
|
||||
Erik H. Baalbergen, Dick Grune, Maarten Waage,
|
||||
.I
|
||||
The CEM Compiler,
|
||||
.R
|
||||
Informatica Manual IM-4, Dept. of Mathematics and Computer Science, Vrije
|
||||
Universiteit, Amsterdam, The Netherlands
|
||||
.IP [4]
|
||||
Erik H. Baalbergen,
|
||||
.I
|
||||
Modeling global declarations in C,
|
||||
.R
|
||||
internal paper
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.bp
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
Appendix A - Enumeration Type
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The syntax is
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
.RS
|
||||
.I enum-specifier :
|
||||
.RS
|
||||
\&\f5enum\fP { \fIenum-list\fP }
|
||||
.br
|
||||
\&\f5enum\fP \fIidentifier\fP { \fIenum-list\fP }
|
||||
.br
|
||||
\&\f5enum\fP \fIidentifier\fP
|
||||
.RE
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
\&\fIenum-list\fP :
|
||||
.RS
|
||||
\&\fIenumerator\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
\&\fIenum-list\fP , \fIenumerator\fP
|
||||
.RE
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
\&\fIenumerator\fP :
|
||||
.RS
|
||||
\&\fIidentifier\fP
|
||||
.br
|
||||
\&\fIidentifier\fP = \fIconstant-expression\fP
|
||||
.RE
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
.RE
|
||||
The identifier has the same role as the structure tag in a struct specification.
|
||||
It names a particular enumeration type.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The identifiers in the enum-list are declared as constants, and may appear
|
||||
whenever constants are required.
|
||||
If no enumerators with
|
||||
.B =
|
||||
appear, then the values of the constants begin at 0 and increase by 1 as the
|
||||
declaration is read from left to right.
|
||||
An enumerator with
|
||||
.B =
|
||||
gives the associated identifier the value indicated; subsequent identifiers
|
||||
continue the progression from the assigned value.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Enumeration tags and constants must all be distinct, and, unlike structure
|
||||
tags and members, are drawn from the same set as ordinary identifiers.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Objects of a given enumeration type are regarded as having a type distinct
|
||||
from objects of all other types.
|
||||
.bp
|
||||
.SH
|
||||
Appendix B: C grammar in LL(1) form
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The \fBbold-faced\fP and \fIitalicized\fP tokens represent terminal symbols.
|
||||
.vs 16
|
||||
.nf
|
||||
\fBexternal definitions\fP
|
||||
program: external-definition*
|
||||
external-definition: ext-decl-specifiers [declarator [function | non-function] | '\fB;\fP'] | asm-statement
|
||||
ext-decl-specifiers: decl-specifiers?
|
||||
non-function: initializer? ['\fB,\fP' init-declarator]* '\fB;\fP'
|
||||
function: declaration* compound-statement
|
||||
.sp 1
|
||||
\fBdeclarations\fP
|
||||
declaration: decl-specifiers init-declarator-list? '\fB;\fP'
|
||||
decl-specifiers: other-specifier+ [single-type-specifier other-specifier*]? | single-type-specifier other-specifier*
|
||||
other-specifier: \fBauto\fP | \fBstatic\fP | \fBextern\fP | \fBtypedef\fP | \fBregister\fP | \fBshort\fP | \fBlong\fP | \fBunsigned\fP
|
||||
type-specifier: decl-specifiers
|
||||
single-type-specifier: \fItype-identifier\fP | struct-or-union-specifier | enum-specifier
|
||||
init-declarator-list: init-declarator ['\fB,\fP' init-declarator]*
|
||||
init-declarator: declarator initializer?
|
||||
declarator: primary-declarator ['\fB(\fP' formal-list ? '\fB)\fP' | arrayer]* | '\fB*\fP' declarator
|
||||
primary-declarator: identifier | '\fB(\fP' declarator '\fB)\fP'
|
||||
arrayer: '\fB[\fP' constant-expression? '\fB]\fP'
|
||||
formal-list: formal ['\fB,\fP' formal]*
|
||||
formal: identifier
|
||||
enum-specifier: \fBenum\fP [enumerator-pack | identifier enumerator-pack?]
|
||||
enumerator-pack: '\fB{\fP' enumerator ['\fB,\fP' enumerator]* '\fB,\fP'? '\fB}\fP'
|
||||
enumerator: identifier ['\fB=\fP' constant-expression]?
|
||||
struct-or-union-specifier: [ \fBstruct\fP | \fBunion\fP] [ struct-declaration-pack | identifier struct-declaration-pack?]
|
||||
struct-declaration-pack: '\fB{\fP' struct-declaration+ '\fB}\fP'
|
||||
struct-declaration: type-specifier struct-declarator-list '\fB;\fP'?
|
||||
struct-declarator-list: struct-declarator ['\fB,\fP' struct-declarator]*
|
||||
struct-declarator: declarator bit-expression? | bit-expression
|
||||
bit-expression: '\fB:\fP' constant-expression
|
||||
initializer: '\fB=\fP'? initial-value
|
||||
cast: '\fB(\fP' type-specifier abstract-declarator '\fB)\fP'
|
||||
abstract-declarator: primary-abstract-declarator ['\fB(\fP' '\fB)\fP' | arrayer]* | '\fB*\fP' abstract-declarator
|
||||
primary-abstract-declarator: ['\fB(\fP' abstract-declarator '\fB)\fP']?
|
||||
.sp 1
|
||||
\fBstatements\fP
|
||||
statement:
|
||||
expression-statement
|
||||
| label '\fB:\fP' statement
|
||||
| compound-statement
|
||||
| if-statement
|
||||
| while-statement
|
||||
| do-statement
|
||||
| for-statement
|
||||
| switch-statement
|
||||
| case-statement
|
||||
| default-statement
|
||||
| break-statement
|
||||
| continue-statement
|
||||
| return-statement
|
||||
| jump
|
||||
| '\fB;\fP'
|
||||
| asm-statement
|
||||
;
|
||||
expression-statement: expression '\fB;\fP'
|
||||
label: identifier
|
||||
if-statement: \fBif\fP '\fB(\fP' expression '\fB)\fP' statement [\fBelse\fP statement]?
|
||||
while-statement: \fBwhile\fP '\fB(\fP' expression '\fB)\fP' statement
|
||||
do-statement: \fBdo\fP statement \fBwhile\fP '\fB(\fP' expression '\fB)\fP' '\fB;\fP'
|
||||
for-statement: \fBfor\fP '\fB(\fP' expression? '\fB;\fP' expression? '\fB;\fP' expression? '\fB)\fP' statement
|
||||
switch-statement: \fBswitch\fP '\fB(\fP' expression '\fB)\fP' statement
|
||||
case-statement: \fBcase\fP constant-expression '\fB:\fP' statement
|
||||
default-statement: \fBdefault\fP '\fB:\fP' statement
|
||||
break-statement: \fBbreak\fP '\fB;\fP'
|
||||
continue-statement: \fBcontinue\fP '\fB;\fP'
|
||||
return-statement: \fBreturn\fP expression? '\fB;\fP'
|
||||
jump: \fBgoto\fP identifier '\fB;\fP'
|
||||
compound-statement: '\fB{\fP' declaration* statement* '\fB}\fP'
|
||||
asm-statement: \fBasm\fP '\fB(\fP' \fIstring\fP '\fB)\fP' '\fB;\fP'
|
||||
.sp 1
|
||||
\fBexpressions\fP
|
||||
initial-value: assignment-expression | initial-value-pack
|
||||
initial-value-pack: '\fB{\fP' initial-value-list '\fB}\fP'
|
||||
initial-value-list: initial-value ['\fB,\fP' initial-value]* '\fB,\fP'?
|
||||
primary: \fIidentifier\fP | constant | \fIstring\fP | '\fB(\fP' expression '\fB)\fP'
|
||||
secundary: primary [index-pack | parameter-pack | selection]*
|
||||
index-pack: '\fB[\fP' expression '\fB]\fP'
|
||||
parameter-pack: '\fB(\fP' parameter-list? '\fB)\fP'
|
||||
selection: ['\fB.\fP' | '\fB\->\fP'] identifier
|
||||
parameter-list: assignment-expression ['\fB,\fP' assignment-expression]*
|
||||
postfixed: secundary postop?
|
||||
unary: cast unary | postfixed | unop unary | size-of
|
||||
size-of: \fBsizeof\fP [cast | unary]
|
||||
binary-expression: unary [binop binary-expression]*
|
||||
conditional-expression: binary-expression ['\fB?\fP' expression '\fB:\fP' assignment-expression]?
|
||||
assignment-expression: conditional-expression [asgnop assignment-expression]?
|
||||
expression: assignment-expression ['\fB,\fP' assignment-expression]*
|
||||
unop: '\fB*\fP' | '\fB&\fP' | '\fB\-\fP' | '\fB!\fP' | '\fB~ \fP' | '\fB++\fP' | '\fB\-\-\fP'
|
||||
postop: '\fB++\fP' | '\fB\-\-\fP'
|
||||
multop: '\fB*\fP' | '\fB/\fP' | '\fB%\fP'
|
||||
addop: '\fB+\fP' | '\fB\-\fP'
|
||||
shiftop: '\fB<<\fP' | '\fB>>\fP'
|
||||
relop: '\fB<\fP' | '\fB>\fP' | '\fB<=\fP' | '\fB>=\fP'
|
||||
eqop: '\fB==\fP' | '\fB!=\fP'
|
||||
arithop: multop | addop | shiftop | '\fB&\fP' | '\fB^ \fP' | '\fB|\fP'
|
||||
binop: arithop | relop | eqop | '\fB&&\fP' | '\fB||\fP'
|
||||
asgnop: '\fB=\fP' | '\fB+\fP' '\fB=\fP' | '\fB\-\fP' '\fB=\fP' | '\fB*\fP' '\fB=\fP' | '\fB/\fP' '\fB=\fP' | '\fB%\fP' '\fB=\fP'
|
||||
| '\fB<<\fP' '\fB=\fP' | '\fB>>\fP' '\fB=\fP' | '\fB&\fP' '\fB=\fP' | '\fB^ \fP' '\fB=\fP' | '\fB|\fP' '\fB=\fP'
|
||||
| '\fB+=\fP' | '\fB\-=\fP' | '\fB*=\fP' | '\fB/=\fP' | '\fB%=\fP'
|
||||
| '\fB<<=\fP' | '\fB>>=\fP' | '\fB&=\fP' | '\fB^=\fP' | '\fB|=\fP'
|
||||
constant: \fIinteger\fP | \fIfloating\fP
|
||||
constant-expression: assignment-expression
|
||||
identifier: \fIidentifier\fP | \fItype-identifier\fP
|
||||
.fi
|
||||
18
doc/ego/.distr
Normal file
18
doc/ego/.distr
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
|
||||
Makefile
|
||||
bo
|
||||
ca
|
||||
cf
|
||||
cj
|
||||
cs
|
||||
ic
|
||||
il
|
||||
intro
|
||||
lv
|
||||
ov
|
||||
ra
|
||||
refs.gen
|
||||
refs.opt
|
||||
refs.stat
|
||||
sp
|
||||
sr
|
||||
ud
|
||||
52
doc/ego/Makefile
Normal file
52
doc/ego/Makefile
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
|
||||
REFS=-p refs.opt -p refs.stat -p refs.gen
|
||||
INTRO=intro/intro?
|
||||
OV=ov/ov?
|
||||
IC=ic/ic?
|
||||
CF=cf/cf?
|
||||
IL=il/il?
|
||||
SR=sr/sr?
|
||||
CS=cs/cs?
|
||||
SP=sp/sp?
|
||||
UD=ud/ud?
|
||||
LV=lv/lv?
|
||||
CJ=cj/cj?
|
||||
BO=bo/bo?
|
||||
RA=ra/ra?
|
||||
CA=ca/ca?
|
||||
EGO=$(INTRO) $(OV) $(IC) $(CF) $(IL) $(SR) $(CS) $(SP) $(CJ) $(BO) \
|
||||
$(UD) $(LV) $(RA) $(CA)
|
||||
REFER=refer
|
||||
|
||||
../ego.doc: $(EGO)
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) intro/head $(EGO) intro/tail > ../ego.doc
|
||||
|
||||
ego.f: $(EGO)
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) intro/head $(EGO) intro/tail | nroff -ms > ego.f
|
||||
intro.f: $(INTRO)
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) ov/head $(INTRO) intro/tail | nroff -ms > intro.f
|
||||
ov.f: $(OV)
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) ov/head $(OV) intro/tail | nroff -ms > ov.f
|
||||
ic.f: $(IC)
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) ic/head $(IC) intro/tail | nroff -ms > ic.f
|
||||
cf.f: $(CF)
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) cf/head $(CF) intro/tail | nroff -ms > cf.f
|
||||
il.f: $(IL)
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) il/head $(IL) intro/tail | nroff -ms > il.f
|
||||
sr.f: $(SR)
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) sr/head $(SR) intro/tail | nroff -ms > sr.f
|
||||
cs.f: $(CS)
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) cs/head $(CS) intro/tail | nroff -ms > cs.f
|
||||
sp.f: $(SP)
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) sp/head $(SP) intro/tail | nroff -ms > sp.f
|
||||
cj.f: $(CJ)
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) cj/head $(CJ) intro/tail | nroff -ms > cj.f
|
||||
bo.f: $(BO)
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) bo/head $(BO) intro/tail | nroff -ms > bo.f
|
||||
ud.f: $(UD)
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) ud/head $(UD) intro/tail | nroff -ms > ud.f
|
||||
lv.f: $(LV)
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) lv/head $(LV) intro/tail | nroff -ms > lv.f
|
||||
ra.f: $(RA)
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) ra/head $(RA) intro/tail | nroff -ms > ra.f
|
||||
ca.f: $(CA)
|
||||
$(REFER) -sA+T -l4,2 $(REFS) ca/head $(CA) intro/tail | nroff -ms > ca.f
|
||||
1
doc/ego/bo/.distr
Normal file
1
doc/ego/bo/.distr
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1 @@
|
||||
bo1
|
||||
151
doc/ego/bo/bo1
Normal file
151
doc/ego/bo/bo1
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,151 @@
|
||||
.bp
|
||||
.NH 1
|
||||
Branch Optimization
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Introduction
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The Branch Optimization phase (BO) performs two related
|
||||
(branch) optimizations.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Fusion of basic blocks
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
If two basic blocks B1 and B2 have the following properties:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
SUCC(B1) = {B2}
|
||||
PRED(B2) = {B1}
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
then B1 and B2 can be combined into one basic block.
|
||||
If B1 ends in an unconditional jump to the beginning of B2, this
|
||||
jump can be eliminated,
|
||||
hence saving a little execution time and object code size.
|
||||
This technique can be used to eliminate some deficiencies
|
||||
introduced by the front ends (for example, the "C" front end
|
||||
translates switch statements inefficiently due to its one pass nature).
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
While-loop optimization
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The straightforward way to translate a while loop is to
|
||||
put the test for loop termination at the beginning of the loop.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
while cond loop LAB1: Test cond
|
||||
body of the loop ---> Branch On False To LAB2
|
||||
end loop code for body of loop
|
||||
Branch To LAB1
|
||||
LAB2:
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 10.1 Example of Branch Optimization
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
If the condition fails at the Nth iteration, the following code
|
||||
gets executed (dynamically):
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
N * conditional branch (which fails N-1 times)
|
||||
N-1 * unconditional branch
|
||||
N-1 * body of the loop
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
An alternative translation is:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
Branch To LAB2
|
||||
LAB1:
|
||||
code for body of loop
|
||||
LAB2:
|
||||
Test cond
|
||||
Branch On True To LAB1
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
This translation results in the following profile:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
N * conditional branch (which succeeds N-1 times)
|
||||
1 * unconditional branch
|
||||
N-1 * body of the loop
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
So the second translation will be significantly faster if N >> 2.
|
||||
If N=2, execution time will be slightly increased.
|
||||
On the average, the program will be speeded up.
|
||||
Note that the code sizes of the two translations will be the same.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Implementation
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The basic block fusion technique is implemented
|
||||
by traversing the control flow graph of a procedure,
|
||||
looking for basic blocks B with only one successor (S).
|
||||
If one is found, it is checked if S has only one predecessor
|
||||
(which has to be B).
|
||||
If so, the two basic blocks can in principle be combined.
|
||||
However, as one basic block will have to be moved,
|
||||
the textual order of the basic blocks will be altered.
|
||||
This reordering causes severe problems in the presence
|
||||
of conditional jumps.
|
||||
For example, if S ends in a conditional branch,
|
||||
the basic block that comes textually next to S must stay
|
||||
in that position.
|
||||
So the transformation in Fig. 10.2 is illegal.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
LAB1: S1 LAB1: S1
|
||||
BRA LAB2 S2
|
||||
... --> BEQ LAB3
|
||||
LAB2: S2 ...
|
||||
BEQ LAB3 S3
|
||||
S3
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 10.2 An illegal transformation of Branch Optimization
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
If B is moved towards S the same problem occurs if the block before B
|
||||
ends in a conditional jump.
|
||||
The problem could be solved by adding one extra branch,
|
||||
but this would reduce the gains of the optimization to zero.
|
||||
Hence the optimization will only be done if the block that
|
||||
follows S (in the textual order) is not a successor of S.
|
||||
This condition assures that S does not end in a conditional branch.
|
||||
The condition always holds for the code generated by the "C"
|
||||
front end for a switch statement.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
After the transformation has been performed,
|
||||
some attributes of the basic blocks involved (such as successor and
|
||||
predecessor sets and immediate dominator) must be recomputed.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The while-loop technique is applied to one loop at a time.
|
||||
The list of basic blocks of the loop is traversed to find
|
||||
a block B that satisfies the following conditions:
|
||||
.IP 1.
|
||||
the textually next block to B is not part of the loop
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
the last instruction of B is an unconditional branch;
|
||||
hence B has only one successor, say S
|
||||
.IP 3.
|
||||
the textually next block of B is a successor of S
|
||||
.IP 4.
|
||||
the last instruction of S is a conditional branch
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If such a block B is found, the control flow graph is changed
|
||||
as depicted in Fig. 10.3.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
| |
|
||||
| v
|
||||
v |
|
||||
|-----<------| ----->-----|
|
||||
____|____ | |
|
||||
| | | |-------| |
|
||||
| S1 | | | v |
|
||||
| Bcc | | | .... |
|
||||
|--| | | | |
|
||||
| --------- | | ----|---- |
|
||||
| | | | | |
|
||||
| .... ^ | | S2 | |
|
||||
| | | | | |
|
||||
| --------- | | | | |
|
||||
v | | | ^ --------- |
|
||||
| | S2 | | | | |
|
||||
| | BRA | | | |-----<-----
|
||||
| | | | | v
|
||||
| --------- | | ____|____
|
||||
| | | | | |
|
||||
| ------>------ | | S1 |
|
||||
| | | Bnn |
|
||||
|-------| | | |
|
||||
| | ----|----
|
||||
v | |
|
||||
|----<--|
|
||||
|
|
||||
v
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 10.3 Transformation of the CFG by Branch Optimization
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
1
doc/ego/ca/.distr
Normal file
1
doc/ego/ca/.distr
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1 @@
|
||||
ca1
|
||||
75
doc/ego/ca/ca1
Normal file
75
doc/ego/ca/ca1
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
|
||||
.bp
|
||||
.NH 1
|
||||
Compact assembly generation
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Introduction
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The "Compact Assembly generation phase" (CA) transforms the
|
||||
intermediate code of the optimizer into EM code in
|
||||
Compact Assembly Language (CAL) format.
|
||||
In the intermediate code, all program entities
|
||||
(such as procedures, labels, global variables)
|
||||
are denoted by a unique identifying number (see 3.5).
|
||||
In the CAL output of the optimizer these numbers have to
|
||||
be replaced by normal identifiers (strings).
|
||||
The original identifiers of the input program are used whenever possible.
|
||||
Recall that the IC phase generates two files that can be
|
||||
used to map unique identifying numbers to procedure names and
|
||||
global variable names.
|
||||
For instruction labels CA always generates new names.
|
||||
The reasons for doing so are:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
instruction labels are only visible inside one procedure, so they can
|
||||
not be referenced in other modules
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the names are not very suggestive anyway, as they must be integer numbers
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the optimizer considerably changes the control structure of the program,
|
||||
so there is really no one to one mapping of instruction labels in
|
||||
the input and the output program.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
As the optimizer combines all input modules into one module,
|
||||
visibility problems may occur.
|
||||
Two modules M1 and M2 can both define an identifier X (provided that
|
||||
X is not externally visible in any of these modules).
|
||||
If M1 and M2 are combined into one module M, two distinct
|
||||
entities with the same name would exist in M, which
|
||||
is not allowed.
|
||||
.[~[
|
||||
tanenbaum machine architecture
|
||||
.], section 11.1.4.3]
|
||||
In these cases, CA invents a new unique name for one of the entities.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Implementation
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
CA first reads the files containing the procedure and global variable names
|
||||
and stores the names in two tables.
|
||||
It scans these tables to make sure that all names are different.
|
||||
Subsequently it reads the EM text, one procedure at a time,
|
||||
and outputs it in CAL format.
|
||||
The major part of the code that does the latter transformation
|
||||
is adapted from the EM Peephole Optimizer.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The main problem of the implementation of CA is to
|
||||
assure that the visibility rules are obeyed.
|
||||
If an identifier must be externally visible (i.e.
|
||||
it was externally visible in the input program)
|
||||
and the identifier is defined (in the output program) before
|
||||
being referenced,
|
||||
an EXA or EXP pseudo must be generated for it.
|
||||
(Note that the optimizer may change the order of definitions and
|
||||
references, so some pseudos may be needed that were not
|
||||
present in the input program).
|
||||
On the other hand, an identifier may be only internally visible.
|
||||
If such an identifier is referenced before being defined,
|
||||
an INA or INP pseudo must be emitted prior to its first reference.
|
||||
.UH
|
||||
Acknowledgements
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The author would like to thank Andy Tanenbaum for his guidance,
|
||||
Duk Bekema for implementing the Common Subexpression Elimination phase
|
||||
and writing the initial documentation of that phase,
|
||||
Dick Grune for reading the manuscript of this report
|
||||
and Ceriel Jacobs, Ed Keizer, Martin Kersten, Hans van Staveren
|
||||
and the members of the S.T.W. user's group for their
|
||||
interest and assistance.
|
||||
6
doc/ego/cf/.distr
Normal file
6
doc/ego/cf/.distr
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
|
||||
cf1
|
||||
cf2
|
||||
cf3
|
||||
cf4
|
||||
cf5
|
||||
cf6
|
||||
94
doc/ego/cf/cf1
Normal file
94
doc/ego/cf/cf1
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
|
||||
.bp
|
||||
.NH
|
||||
The Control Flow Phase
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
In the previous chapter we described the intermediate
|
||||
code of the global optimizer.
|
||||
We also specified which part of this code
|
||||
was constructed by the IC phase of the optimizer.
|
||||
The Control Flow Phase (\fICF\fR) does
|
||||
the remainder of the job,
|
||||
i.e. it determines:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the control flow graphs
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the loop tables
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the calling, change and use attributes of
|
||||
the procedure table entries
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
CF operates on one procedure at a time.
|
||||
For every procedure it first reads the EM instructions
|
||||
from the EM-text file and groups them into basic blocks.
|
||||
For every basic block, its successors and
|
||||
predecessors are determined,
|
||||
resulting in the control flow graph.
|
||||
Next, the immediate dominator of every basic block
|
||||
is computed.
|
||||
Using these dominators, any loop in the
|
||||
procedure is detected.
|
||||
Finally, interprocedural analysis is done,
|
||||
after which we will know the global effects of
|
||||
every procedure call on its environment.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
CF uses the same internal data structures
|
||||
for the procedure table and object table as IC.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Partitioning into basic blocks
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
With regard to flow of control, we distinguish
|
||||
three kinds of EM instructions:
|
||||
jump instructions, instruction label definitions and
|
||||
normal instructions.
|
||||
Jump instructions are all conditional or unconditional
|
||||
branch instructions,
|
||||
the case instructions (CSA/CSB)
|
||||
and the RET (return) instruction.
|
||||
A procedure call (CAL) is not considered to be a jump.
|
||||
A defining occurrence of an instruction label
|
||||
is regarded as an EM instruction.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
An instruction starts
|
||||
a new basic block, in any of the following cases:
|
||||
.IP 1.
|
||||
It is the first instruction of a procedure
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
It is the first of a list of instruction label
|
||||
defining occurrences
|
||||
.IP 3.
|
||||
It follows a jump
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If there are several consecutive instruction labels
|
||||
(which is highly unusual),
|
||||
all of them are put in the same basic block.
|
||||
Note that several cases may overlap,
|
||||
e.g. a label definition at the beginning of a procedure
|
||||
or a label following a jump.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A simple Finite State Machine is used to model
|
||||
the above rules.
|
||||
It also recognizes the end of a procedure,
|
||||
marked by an END pseudo.
|
||||
The basic blocks are stored internally as a doubly linked
|
||||
linear list.
|
||||
The blocks are linked in textual order.
|
||||
Every node of this list has the attributes described
|
||||
in the previous chapter (see syntax rule for
|
||||
basic_block).
|
||||
Furthermore, every node contains a pointer to its
|
||||
EM instructions,
|
||||
which are represented internally
|
||||
as a linear, doubly linked list,
|
||||
just as in the IC phase.
|
||||
However, instead of one list per procedure (as in IC)
|
||||
there is now one list per basic block.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
On the fly, a table is build that maps
|
||||
every label identifier to the label definition
|
||||
instruction.
|
||||
This table is used for computing the control flow.
|
||||
The table is stored as a dynamically allocated array.
|
||||
The length of the array is the number of labels
|
||||
of the current procedure;
|
||||
this value can be found in the procedure table,
|
||||
where it was stored by IC.
|
||||
50
doc/ego/cf/cf2
Normal file
50
doc/ego/cf/cf2
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Control Flow
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A \fIsuccessor\fR of a basic block B is a block C
|
||||
that can be executed immediately after B.
|
||||
C is said to be a \fIpredecessor\fR of B.
|
||||
A block ending with a RET instruction
|
||||
has no successors.
|
||||
Such a block is called a \fIreturn block\fR.
|
||||
Any block that has no predecessors cannot be
|
||||
executed at all (i.e. it is unreachable),
|
||||
unless it is the first block of a procedure,
|
||||
called the \fIprocedure entry block\fR.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Internally, the successor and predecessor
|
||||
attributes of a basic block are stored as \fIsets\fR.
|
||||
Alternatively, one may regard all these
|
||||
sets of all basic blocks as a conceptual \fIgraph\fR,
|
||||
in which there is an edge from B to C if C
|
||||
is in the successor set of B.
|
||||
We call this conceptual graph
|
||||
the \fIControl Flow Graph\fR.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The only successor of a basic block ending on an
|
||||
unconditional branch instruction is the block that
|
||||
contains the label definition of the target of the jump.
|
||||
The target instruction can be found via the LAB_ID
|
||||
that is the operand of the jump instruction,
|
||||
by using the label-map table mentioned
|
||||
above.
|
||||
If the last instruction of a block is a
|
||||
conditional jump,
|
||||
the successors are the target block and the textually
|
||||
next block.
|
||||
The last instruction can also be a case jump
|
||||
instruction (CSA or CSB).
|
||||
We then analyze the case descriptor,
|
||||
to find all possible target instructions
|
||||
and their associated blocks.
|
||||
We require the case descriptor to be allocated in
|
||||
a ROM, so it cannot be changed dynamically.
|
||||
A case jump via an alterable descriptor could in principle
|
||||
go to any label in the program.
|
||||
In the presence of such an uncontrolled jump,
|
||||
hardly any optimization can be done.
|
||||
We do not expect any front end to generate such a descriptor,
|
||||
however, because of the controlled nature
|
||||
of case statements in high level languages.
|
||||
If the basic block does not end in a jump instruction,
|
||||
its only successor is the textually next block.
|
||||
53
doc/ego/cf/cf3
Normal file
53
doc/ego/cf/cf3
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Immediate dominators
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A basic block B dominates a block C if every path
|
||||
in the control flow graph from the procedure entry block
|
||||
to C goes through B.
|
||||
The immediate dominator of C is the closest dominator
|
||||
of C on any path from the entry block.
|
||||
See also
|
||||
.[~[
|
||||
aho compiler design
|
||||
.], section 13.1.]
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
There are a number of algorithms to compute
|
||||
the immediate dominator relation.
|
||||
.IP 1.
|
||||
Purdom and Moore give an algorithm that is
|
||||
easy to program and easy to describe (although the
|
||||
description they give is unreadable;
|
||||
it is given in a very messy Algol60 program full of gotos).
|
||||
.[
|
||||
predominators
|
||||
.]
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
Aho and Ullman present a bitvector algorithm, which is also
|
||||
easy to program and to understand.
|
||||
(See
|
||||
.[~[
|
||||
aho compiler design
|
||||
.], section 13.1.]).
|
||||
.IP 3
|
||||
Lengauer and Tarjan introduce a fast algorithm that is
|
||||
hard to understand, yet remarkably easy to implement.
|
||||
.[
|
||||
lengauer dominators
|
||||
.]
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The Purdom-Moore algorithm is very slow if the
|
||||
number of basic blocks in the flow graph is large.
|
||||
The Aho-Ullman algorithm in fact computes the
|
||||
dominator relation,
|
||||
from which the immediate dominator relation can be computed
|
||||
in time quadratic to the number of basic blocks, worst case.
|
||||
The storage requirement is also quadratic to the number
|
||||
of blocks.
|
||||
The running time of the third algorithm is proportional
|
||||
to:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
(number of edges in the graph) * log(number of blocks).
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
We have chosen this algorithm because it is fast
|
||||
(as shown by experiments done by Lengauer and Tarjan),
|
||||
it is easy to program and requires little data space.
|
||||
93
doc/ego/cf/cf4
Normal file
93
doc/ego/cf/cf4
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Loop detection
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Loops are detected by using the loop construction
|
||||
algorithm of.
|
||||
.[~[
|
||||
aho compiler design
|
||||
.], section 13.1.]
|
||||
This algorithm uses \fIback edges\fR.
|
||||
A back edge is an edge from B to C in the CFG,
|
||||
whose head (C) dominates its tail (B).
|
||||
The loop associated with this back edge
|
||||
consists of C plus all nodes in the CFG
|
||||
that can reach B without going through C.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
As an example of how the algorithm works,
|
||||
consider the piece of program of Fig. 4.1.
|
||||
First just look at the program and think for
|
||||
yourself what part of the code constitutes the loop.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
loop
|
||||
if cond then 1
|
||||
-- lots of simple
|
||||
-- assignment
|
||||
-- statements 2 3
|
||||
exit; -- exit loop
|
||||
else
|
||||
S; -- one statement
|
||||
end if;
|
||||
end loop;
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 4.1 A misleading loop
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
Although a human being may be easily deceived
|
||||
by the brackets "loop" and "end loop",
|
||||
the loop detection algorithm will correctly
|
||||
reply that only the test for "cond" and
|
||||
the single statement in the false-part
|
||||
of the if statement are part of the loop!
|
||||
The statements in the true-part only get
|
||||
executed once, so there really is no reason at all
|
||||
to say they're part of the loop too.
|
||||
The CFG contains one back edge, "3->1".
|
||||
As node 3 cannot be reached from node 2,
|
||||
the latter node is not part of the loop.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A source of problems with the algorithm is the fact
|
||||
that different back edges may result in
|
||||
the same loop.
|
||||
Such an ill-structured loop is
|
||||
called a \fImessy\fR loop.
|
||||
After a loop has been constructed, it is checked
|
||||
if it is really a new loop.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Loops can partly overlap, without one being nested
|
||||
inside the other.
|
||||
This is the case in the program of Fig. 4.2.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
1: 1
|
||||
S1;
|
||||
2:
|
||||
S2; 2
|
||||
if cond then
|
||||
goto 4;
|
||||
S3; 3 4
|
||||
goto 1;
|
||||
4:
|
||||
S4;
|
||||
goto 1;
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 4.2 Partly overlapping loops
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
There are two back edges "3->1" and "4->1",
|
||||
resulting in the loops {1,2,3} and {1,2,4}.
|
||||
With every basic block we associate a set of
|
||||
all loops it is part of.
|
||||
It is not sufficient just to record its
|
||||
most enclosing loop.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
After all loops of a procedure are detected, we determine
|
||||
the nesting level of every loop.
|
||||
Finally, we find all strong and firm blocks of the loop.
|
||||
If the loop has only one back edge (i.e. it is not messy),
|
||||
the set of firm blocks consists of the
|
||||
head of this back edge and its dominators
|
||||
in the loop (including the loop entry block).
|
||||
A firm block is also strong if it is not a
|
||||
successor of a block that may exit the loop;
|
||||
a block may exit a loop if it has an (immediate) successor
|
||||
that is not part of the loop.
|
||||
For messy loops we do not determine the strong
|
||||
and firm blocks. These loops are expected
|
||||
to occur very rarely.
|
||||
79
doc/ego/cf/cf5
Normal file
79
doc/ego/cf/cf5
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Interprocedural analysis
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
It is often desirable to know the effects
|
||||
a procedure call may have.
|
||||
The optimization below is only possible if
|
||||
we know for sure that the call to P cannot
|
||||
change A.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
A := 10; A:= 10;
|
||||
P; -- procedure call --> P;
|
||||
B := A + 2; B := 12;
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
Although it is not possible to predict exactly
|
||||
all the effects a procedure call has, we may
|
||||
determine a kind of upper bound for it.
|
||||
So we compute all variables that may be
|
||||
changed by P, although they need not be
|
||||
changed at every invocation of P.
|
||||
We can get hold of this set by just looking
|
||||
at all assignment (store) instructions
|
||||
in the body of P.
|
||||
EM also has a set of \fIindirect\fR assignment
|
||||
instructions,
|
||||
i.e. assignment through a pointer variable.
|
||||
In general, it is not possible to determine
|
||||
which variable is affected by such an assignment.
|
||||
In these cases, we just record the fact that P
|
||||
does an indirect assignment.
|
||||
Note that this does not mean that all variables
|
||||
are potentially affected, as the front ends
|
||||
may generate messages telling that certain
|
||||
variables can never be accessed indirectly.
|
||||
We also set a flag if P does a use (load) indirect.
|
||||
Note that we only have to look at \fIglobal\fR
|
||||
variables.
|
||||
If P changes or uses any of its locals,
|
||||
this has no effect on its environment.
|
||||
Local variables of a lexically enclosing
|
||||
procedure can only be accessed indirectly.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A procedure P may of course call another procedure.
|
||||
To determine the effects of a call to P,
|
||||
we also must know the effects of a call to the second procedure.
|
||||
This second one may call a third one, and so on.
|
||||
Effectively, we need to compute the \fItransitive closure\fR
|
||||
of the effects.
|
||||
To do this, we determine for every procedure
|
||||
which other procedures it calls.
|
||||
This set is the "calling" attribute of a procedure.
|
||||
One may regard all these sets as a conceptual graph,
|
||||
in which there is an edge from P to Q
|
||||
if Q is in the calling set of P. This graph will
|
||||
be referred to as the \fIcall graph\fR.
|
||||
(Note the resemblance with the control flow graph).
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
We can detect which procedures are called by P
|
||||
by looking at all CAL instructions in its body.
|
||||
Unfortunately, a procedure may also be
|
||||
called indirectly, via a CAI instruction.
|
||||
Yet, only procedures that are used as operand of an LPI
|
||||
instruction can be called indirect,
|
||||
because this is the only way to take the address of a procedure.
|
||||
We determine for every procedure whether it does
|
||||
a CAI instruction.
|
||||
We also build a set of all procedures used as
|
||||
operand of an LPI.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
After all procedures have been processed (i.e. all CFGs
|
||||
are constructed, all loops are detected,
|
||||
all procedures are analyzed to see which variables
|
||||
they may change, which procedures they call,
|
||||
whether they do a CAI or are used in an LPI) the
|
||||
transitive closure of all interprocedural
|
||||
information is computed.
|
||||
During the same process,
|
||||
the calling set of every procedure that uses a CAI
|
||||
is extended with the above mentioned set of all
|
||||
procedures that can be called indirect.
|
||||
21
doc/ego/cf/cf6
Normal file
21
doc/ego/cf/cf6
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Source files
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The sources of CF are in the following files and packages:
|
||||
.IP cf.h: 14
|
||||
declarations of global variables and data structures
|
||||
.IP cf.c:
|
||||
the routine main; interprocedural analysis;
|
||||
transitive closure
|
||||
.IP succ:
|
||||
control flow (successor and predecessor)
|
||||
.IP idom:
|
||||
immediate dominators
|
||||
.IP loop:
|
||||
loop detection
|
||||
.IP get:
|
||||
read object and procedure table;
|
||||
read EM text and partition it into basic blocks
|
||||
.IP put:
|
||||
write tables, CFGs and EM text
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
1
doc/ego/cj/.distr
Normal file
1
doc/ego/cj/.distr
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1 @@
|
||||
cj1
|
||||
136
doc/ego/cj/cj1
Normal file
136
doc/ego/cj/cj1
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,136 @@
|
||||
.bp
|
||||
.NH 1
|
||||
Cross jumping
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Introduction
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The "Cross Jumping" optimization technique (CJ)
|
||||
.[
|
||||
wulf design optimizing compiler
|
||||
.]
|
||||
is basically a space optimization technique. It looks for pairs of
|
||||
basic blocks (B1,B2), for which:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
SUCC(B1) = SUCC(B2) = {S}
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
(So B1 and B2 both have one and the same successor).
|
||||
If the last few non-branch instructions are the same for B1 and B2,
|
||||
one such sequence can be eliminated.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
Pascal:
|
||||
|
||||
if cond then
|
||||
S1
|
||||
S3
|
||||
else
|
||||
S2
|
||||
S3
|
||||
|
||||
(pseudo) EM:
|
||||
|
||||
TEST COND TEST COND
|
||||
BNE *1 BNE *1
|
||||
S1 S1
|
||||
S3 ---> BRA *2
|
||||
BRA *2 1:
|
||||
1: S2
|
||||
S2 2:
|
||||
S3 S3
|
||||
2:
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 9.1 An example of Cross Jumping
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
As the basic blocks have the same successor,
|
||||
at least one of them ends in an unconditional branch instruction (BRA).
|
||||
Hence no extra branch instruction is ever needed, just the target
|
||||
of an existing branch needs to be changed; neither the program size
|
||||
nor the execution time will ever increase.
|
||||
In general, the execution time will remain the same, unless
|
||||
further optimizations can be applied because of this optimization.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
This optimization is particularly effective,
|
||||
because it cannot always be done by the programmer at the source level,
|
||||
as demonstrated by the Fig. 8.2.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
Pascal:
|
||||
|
||||
if cond then
|
||||
x := f(4)
|
||||
else
|
||||
x := g(5)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
EM:
|
||||
|
||||
... ...
|
||||
LOC 4 LOC 5
|
||||
CAL F CAL G
|
||||
ASP 2 ASP 2
|
||||
LFR 2 LFR 2
|
||||
STL X STL X
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 9.2 Effectiveness of Cross Jumping
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
At the source level there is no common tail,
|
||||
but at the EM level there is a common tail.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Implementation
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The implementation of cross jumping is rather straightforward.
|
||||
The technique is applied to one procedure at a time.
|
||||
The control flow graph of the procedure
|
||||
is scanned for pairs of basic blocks
|
||||
with the same (single) successor and with common tails.
|
||||
Note that there may be more than two such blocks (e.g. as the result
|
||||
of a case statement).
|
||||
This is dealt with by repeating the entire process until no
|
||||
further optimizations can de done for the current procedure.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
If a suitable pair of basic blocks has been found, the control flow
|
||||
graph must be altered. One of the basic
|
||||
blocks must be split into two.
|
||||
The control flow graphs before and after the optimization are shown
|
||||
in Fig. 9.3 and Fig. 9.4.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
|
||||
-------- --------
|
||||
| | | |
|
||||
| S1 | | S2 |
|
||||
| S3 | | S3 |
|
||||
| | | |
|
||||
-------- --------
|
||||
| |
|
||||
|------------------|--------------------|
|
||||
|
|
||||
v
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 9.3 CFG before optimization
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
|
||||
-------- --------
|
||||
| | | |
|
||||
| S1 | | S2 |
|
||||
| | | |
|
||||
-------- --------
|
||||
| |
|
||||
|--------------------<------------------|
|
||||
v
|
||||
--------
|
||||
| |
|
||||
| S3 |
|
||||
| |
|
||||
--------
|
||||
|
|
||||
v
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 9.4 CFG after optimization
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
Some attributes of the three resulting blocks (such as immediate dominator)
|
||||
are updated.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
In some cases, cross jumping might split the computation of an expression
|
||||
into two, by inserting a branch somewhere in the middle.
|
||||
Most code generators will generate very poor assembly code when
|
||||
presented with such EM code.
|
||||
Therefor, cross jumping is not performed in these cases.
|
||||
5
doc/ego/cs/.distr
Normal file
5
doc/ego/cs/.distr
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
|
||||
cs1
|
||||
cs2
|
||||
cs3
|
||||
cs4
|
||||
cs5
|
||||
42
doc/ego/cs/cs1
Normal file
42
doc/ego/cs/cs1
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
|
||||
.bp
|
||||
.NH 1
|
||||
Common subexpression elimination
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Introduction
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The Common Subexpression Elimination optimization technique (CS)
|
||||
tries to eliminate multiple computations of EM expressions
|
||||
that yield the same result.
|
||||
It places the result of one such computation
|
||||
in a temporary variable,
|
||||
and replaces the other computations by a reference
|
||||
to this temporary variable.
|
||||
The primary goal of this technique is to decrease
|
||||
the execution time of the program,
|
||||
but in general it will save space too.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
As an example of the application of Common Subexpression Elimination,
|
||||
consider the piece of program in Fig. 7.1(a).
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
x := a * b; TMP := a * b; x := a * b;
|
||||
CODE; x := TMP; CODE
|
||||
y := c + a * b; CODE y := x;
|
||||
y := c + TMP;
|
||||
|
||||
(a) (b) (c)
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 7.1 Examples of Common Subexpression Elimination
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
If neither a nor b is changed in CODE,
|
||||
the instructions can be replaced by those of Fig. 7.1(b),
|
||||
which saves one multiplication,
|
||||
but costs an extra store instruction.
|
||||
If the value of x is not changed in CODE either,
|
||||
the instructions can be replaced by those of Fig. 7.1(c).
|
||||
In this case
|
||||
the extra store is not needed.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
In the following sections we will describe
|
||||
which transformations are done
|
||||
by CS and how this phase
|
||||
was implemented.
|
||||
83
doc/ego/cs/cs2
Normal file
83
doc/ego/cs/cs2
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Specification of the Common Subexpression Elimination phase
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
In this section we will describe
|
||||
the window
|
||||
through which CS examines the code,
|
||||
the expressions recognized by CS,
|
||||
and finally the changes made to the code.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
The working window
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The CS algorithm is applied to the
|
||||
largest sequence of textually adjacent basic blocks
|
||||
B1,..,Bn, for which
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
PRED(Bj) = {Bj-1}, j = 2,..,n.
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
Intuitively, this window consists of straight line code,
|
||||
with only one entry point (at the beginning); it may
|
||||
contain jumps, which should all have their targets outside the window.
|
||||
This is illustrated in Fig. 7.2.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
x := a * b; (1)
|
||||
if x < 10 then (2)
|
||||
y := a * b; (3)
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 7.2 The working window of CS
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
Line (2) can only be executed after line (1).
|
||||
Likewise, line (3) can only be executed after
|
||||
line (2).
|
||||
Both a and b have the same values at line (1) and at line (3).
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Larger windows were avoided.
|
||||
In Fig. 7.3, the value of a at line (4) may have been obtained
|
||||
at more than one point.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
x := a * b; (1)
|
||||
if x < 10 then (2)
|
||||
a := 100; (3)
|
||||
y := a * b; (4)
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 7.3 Several working windows
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Recognized expressions.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The computations eliminated by CS need not be normal expressions
|
||||
(like "a * b"),
|
||||
but can even consist of a single operand that is expensive to access,
|
||||
such as an array element or a record field.
|
||||
If an array element is used,
|
||||
its address is computed implicitly.
|
||||
CS is able to eliminate either the element itself or its
|
||||
address, whichever one is most profitable.
|
||||
A variable of a textually enclosing procedure may also be
|
||||
expensive to access, depending on the lexical level difference.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Transformations
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
CS creates a new temporary local variable (TMP)
|
||||
for every eliminated expression,
|
||||
unless it is able to use an existing local variable.
|
||||
It emits code to initialize this variable with the
|
||||
result of the expression.
|
||||
Most recurrences of the expression
|
||||
can simply be replaced by a reference to TMP.
|
||||
If the address of an array element is recognized as
|
||||
a common subexpression,
|
||||
references to the element itself are replaced by
|
||||
indirect references through TMP (see Fig. 7.4).
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
x := A[i]; TMP := &A[i];
|
||||
. . . --> x := *TMP;
|
||||
A[i] := y; . . .
|
||||
*TMP := y;
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 7.4 Elimination of an array address computation
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
Here, '&' is the 'address of' operator,
|
||||
and unary '*' is the indirection operator.
|
||||
(Note that EM actually has different instructions to do
|
||||
a use-indirect or an assign-indirect.)
|
||||
243
doc/ego/cs/cs3
Normal file
243
doc/ego/cs/cs3
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,243 @@
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Implementation
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
The value number method
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
To determine whether two expressions have the same result,
|
||||
there must be some way to determine whether their operands have
|
||||
the same values.
|
||||
We use a system of \fIvalue numbers\fP
|
||||
.[
|
||||
kennedy data flow analysis
|
||||
.]
|
||||
in which each distinct value of whatever type,
|
||||
created or used within the working window,
|
||||
receives a unique identifying number, its value number.
|
||||
Two items have the same value number if and only if,
|
||||
based only upon information from the instructions in the window,
|
||||
their values are provably identical.
|
||||
For example, after processing the statement
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
a := 4;
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
the variable a and the constant 4 have the same value number.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The value number of the result of an expression depends only
|
||||
on the kind of operator and the value number(s) of the operand(s).
|
||||
The expressions need not be textually equal, as shown in Fig. 7.5.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
a := c; (1)
|
||||
use(a * b); (2)
|
||||
d := b; (3)
|
||||
use(c * d); (4)
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 7.5 Different expressions with the same value number
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
At line (1) a receives the same value number as c.
|
||||
At line (2) d receives the same value number as b.
|
||||
At line (4) the expression "c * d" receives the same value number
|
||||
as the expression "a * b" at line (2),
|
||||
because the value numbers of their left and right operands are the same,
|
||||
and the operator (*) is the same.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
As another example of the value number method, consider Fig. 7.6.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
use(a * b); (1)
|
||||
a := 123; (2)
|
||||
use(a * b); (3)
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 7.6 Identical expressions with the different value numbers
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
Although textually the expressions "a * b" in line 1 and line 3 are equal,
|
||||
a will have different value numbers at line 3 and line 1.
|
||||
The two expressions will not mistakenly be recognized as equivalent.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Entities
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The Value Number Method distinguishes between operators and operands.
|
||||
The value numbers of operands are stored in a table,
|
||||
called the \fIsymbol table\fR.
|
||||
The value number of a subexpression depends on the
|
||||
(root) operator of the expression and on the value numbers
|
||||
of its operands.
|
||||
A table of "available expressions" is used to do this mapping.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
CS recognizes the following kinds of EM operands, called \fIentities\fR:
|
||||
.IP
|
||||
- constant
|
||||
- local variable
|
||||
- external variable
|
||||
- indirectly accessed entity
|
||||
- offsetted entity
|
||||
- address of local variable
|
||||
- address of external variable
|
||||
- address of offsetted entity
|
||||
- address of local base
|
||||
- address of argument base
|
||||
- array element
|
||||
- procedure identifier
|
||||
- floating zero
|
||||
- local base
|
||||
- heap pointer
|
||||
- ignore mask
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Whenever a new entity is encountered in the working window,
|
||||
it is entered in the symbol table and given a brand new value number.
|
||||
Most entities have attributes (e.g. the offset in
|
||||
the current stackframe for local variables),
|
||||
which are also stored in the symbol table.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
An entity is called static if its value cannot be changed
|
||||
(e.g. a constant or an address).
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Parsing expressions
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Common subexpressions are recognized by simulating the behaviour
|
||||
of the EM machine.
|
||||
The EM code is parsed from left to right;
|
||||
as EM is postfix code, this is a bottom up parse.
|
||||
At any point the current state of the EM runtime stack is
|
||||
reflected by a simulated "fake stack",
|
||||
containing descriptions of the parsed operands and expressions.
|
||||
A descriptor consists of:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
(1) the value number of the operand or expression
|
||||
(2) the size of the operand or expression
|
||||
(3) a pointer to the first line of EM-code
|
||||
that constitutes the operand or expression
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
Note that operands may consist of several EM instructions.
|
||||
Whenever an operator is encountered, the
|
||||
descriptors of its operands are on top of the fake stack.
|
||||
The operator and the value numbers of the operands
|
||||
are used as indices in the table of available expressions,
|
||||
to determine the value number of the expression.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
During the parsing process,
|
||||
we keep track of the first line of each expression;
|
||||
we need this information when we decide to eliminate the expression.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Updating entities
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
An entity is assigned a value number when it is
|
||||
used for the first time
|
||||
in the working window.
|
||||
If the entity is used as left hand side of an assignment,
|
||||
it gets the value number of the right hand side.
|
||||
Sometimes the effects of an instruction on an entity cannot
|
||||
be determined exactly;
|
||||
the current value and value number of the entity may become
|
||||
inconsistent.
|
||||
Hence the current value number must be forgotten.
|
||||
This is achieved by giving the entity a new value number
|
||||
that was not used before.
|
||||
The entity is said to be \fIkilled\fR.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
As information is lost when an entity is killed,
|
||||
CS tries to save as many entities as possible.
|
||||
In case of an indirect assignment through a pointer,
|
||||
some analysis is done to see which variables cannot be altered.
|
||||
For a procedure call, the interprocedural information contained
|
||||
in the procedure table is used to restrict the set of entities that may
|
||||
be changed by the call.
|
||||
Local variables for which the front end generated
|
||||
a register message can never be changed by an indirect assignment
|
||||
or a procedure call.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Changing the EM text
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
When a new expression comes available,
|
||||
it is checked whether its result is saved in a local
|
||||
that may go in a register.
|
||||
The last line of the expression must be followed
|
||||
by a STL or SDL instruction
|
||||
(depending on the size of the result)
|
||||
and a register message must be present for
|
||||
this local.
|
||||
If there is such a local,
|
||||
it is recorded in the available expressions table.
|
||||
Each time a new occurrence of this expression
|
||||
is found,
|
||||
the value number of the local is compared against
|
||||
the value number of the result.
|
||||
If they are different the local cannot be used and is forgotten.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The available expressions are linked in a list.
|
||||
New expressions are linked at the head of the list.
|
||||
In this way expressions that are contained within other
|
||||
expressions appear later in the list,
|
||||
because EM-expressions are postfix.
|
||||
The elimination process walks through the list,
|
||||
starting at the head, to find the largest expressions first.
|
||||
If an expression is eliminated,
|
||||
any expression later on in the list, contained in the former expression,
|
||||
is removed from the list,
|
||||
as expressions can only be eliminated once.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A STL or SDL is emitted after the first occurrence of the expression,
|
||||
unless there was an existing local variable that could hold the result.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Desirability analysis
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Although the global optimizer works on EM code,
|
||||
the goal is to improve the quality of the object code.
|
||||
Therefore some machine-dependent information is needed
|
||||
to decide whether it is desirable to
|
||||
eliminate a given expression.
|
||||
Because it is impossible for the CS phase to know
|
||||
exactly what code will be generated,
|
||||
some heuristics are used.
|
||||
CS essentially looks for some special cases
|
||||
that should not be eliminated.
|
||||
These special cases can be turned on or off for a given machine,
|
||||
as indicated in a machine descriptor file.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Some operators can sometimes be translated
|
||||
into an addressing mode for the machine at hand.
|
||||
Such an operator is only eliminated
|
||||
if its operand is itself expensive,
|
||||
i.e. it is not just a simple load.
|
||||
The machine descriptor file contains a set of such operators.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Eliminating the loading of the Local Base or
|
||||
the Argument Base by the LXL resp. LXA instruction
|
||||
is only beneficial if the difference in lexical levels
|
||||
exceeds a certain threshold.
|
||||
The machine descriptor file contains this threshold.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Replacing a SAR or a LAR by an AAR followed by a LOI
|
||||
may possibly increase the size of the object code.
|
||||
We assume that this is only possible when the
|
||||
size of the array element is greater than some limit.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
There are back ends that can very efficiently translate
|
||||
the index computing instruction sequence LOC SLI ADS.
|
||||
If this is the case,
|
||||
the SLI instruction between a LOC
|
||||
and an ADS is not eliminated.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
To handle unforseen cases, the descriptor file may also contain
|
||||
a set of operators that should never be eliminated.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
The algorithm
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
After these preparatory explanations,
|
||||
the algorithm itself is easy to understand.
|
||||
For each instruction within the current window,
|
||||
the following steps are performed in the given order :
|
||||
.IP 1.
|
||||
Check if this instruction defines an entity.
|
||||
If so, the set of entities is updated accordingly.
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
Kill all entities that might be affected by this instruction.
|
||||
.IP 3.
|
||||
Simulate the instruction on the fake-stack.
|
||||
If this instruction is an operator,
|
||||
update the list of available expressions accordingly.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The result of this process is
|
||||
a list of available expressions plus the information
|
||||
needed to eliminate them.
|
||||
Expressions that are desirable to eliminate are eliminated.
|
||||
Next, the window is shifted and the process is repeated.
|
||||
305
doc/ego/cs/cs4
Normal file
305
doc/ego/cs/cs4
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,305 @@
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Implementation.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
In this section we will discuss the implementation of the CS phase.
|
||||
We will first describe the basic actions that are undertaken
|
||||
by the algorithm, than the algorithm itself.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Partioning the EM instructions
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
There are over 100 EM instructions.
|
||||
For our purpose we partition this huge set into groups of
|
||||
instructions which can be more or less conveniently handled together.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
There are groups for all sorts of load instructions:
|
||||
simple loads, expensive loads, loads of an array element.
|
||||
A load is considered \fIexpensive\fP when more than one EM instructions
|
||||
are involved in loading it.
|
||||
The load of a lexical entity is also considered expensive.
|
||||
For instance: LOF is expensive, LAL is not.
|
||||
LAR forms a group on its own,
|
||||
because it is not only an expensive load,
|
||||
but also implicitly includes the ternary operator AAR,
|
||||
which computes the address of the array element.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
There are groups for all sorts of operators:
|
||||
unary, binary, and ternary.
|
||||
The groups of operators are further partitioned according to the size
|
||||
of their operand(s) and result.
|
||||
\" .PP
|
||||
\" The distinction between operators and expensive loads is not always clear.
|
||||
\" The ADP instruction for example,
|
||||
\" might seem a unary operator because it pops one item
|
||||
\" (a pointer) from the stack.
|
||||
\" However, two ADP-instructions which pop an item with the same value number
|
||||
\" need not have the same result,
|
||||
\" because the attributes (an offset, to be added to the pointer)
|
||||
\" can be different.
|
||||
\" Is it then a binary operator?
|
||||
\" That would give rise to the strange, and undesirable,
|
||||
\" situation that some binary operators pop two operands
|
||||
\" and others pop one.
|
||||
\" The conclusion is inevitable:
|
||||
\" we have been fooled by the name (ADd Pointer).
|
||||
\" The ADP-instruction is an expensive load.
|
||||
\" In this context LAF, meaning Load Address of oFfsetted,
|
||||
\" would have been a better name,
|
||||
\" corresponding to LOF, like LAL,
|
||||
\" Load Address of Local, corresponds to LOL.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
There are groups for all sorts of stores:
|
||||
direct, indirect, array element.
|
||||
The SAR forms a group on its own for the same reason
|
||||
as appeared with LAR.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The effect of the remaining instructions is less clear.
|
||||
They do not help very much in parsing expressions or
|
||||
in constructing our pseudo symboltable.
|
||||
They are partitioned according to the following criteria:
|
||||
.RS
|
||||
.IP "-"
|
||||
They change the value of an entity without using the stack
|
||||
(e.g. ZRL, DEE).
|
||||
.IP "-"
|
||||
They are subroutine calls (CAI, CAL).
|
||||
.IP "-"
|
||||
They change the stack in some irreproduceable way (e.g. ASP, LFR, DUP).
|
||||
.IP "-"
|
||||
They have no effect whatever on the stack or on the entities.
|
||||
This does not mean they can be deleted,
|
||||
but they can be ignored for the moment
|
||||
(e.g. MES, LIN, NOP).
|
||||
.IP "-"
|
||||
Their effect is too complicate too compute,
|
||||
so we just assume worst case behaviour.
|
||||
Hopefully, they do not occur very often.
|
||||
(e.g. MON, STR, BLM).
|
||||
.IP "-"
|
||||
They signal the end of the basic block (e.g. BLT, RET, TRP).
|
||||
.RE
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Parsing expressions
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
To recognize expressions,
|
||||
we simulate the behaviour of the EM machine,
|
||||
by means of a fake-stack.
|
||||
When we scan the instructions in sequential order,
|
||||
we first encounter the instructions that load
|
||||
the operands on the stack,
|
||||
and then the instruction that indicates the operator,
|
||||
because EM expressions are postfix.
|
||||
When we find an instruction to load an operand,
|
||||
we load on the fake-stack a struct with the following information:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
(1) the value number of the operand
|
||||
(2) the size of the operand
|
||||
(3) a pointer to the first line of EM-code
|
||||
that constitutes the operand
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
In most cases, (3) will point to the line
|
||||
that loaded the operand (e.g. LOL, LOC),
|
||||
i.e. there is only one line that refers to this operand,
|
||||
but sometimes some information must be popped
|
||||
to load the operand (e.g. LOI, LAR).
|
||||
This information must have been pushed before,
|
||||
so we also pop a pointer to the first line that pushed
|
||||
the information.
|
||||
This line is now the first line that defines the operand.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
When we find the operator instruction,
|
||||
we pop its operand(s) from the fake-stack.
|
||||
The first line that defines the first operand is
|
||||
now the first line of the expression.
|
||||
We now have all information to determine
|
||||
whether the just parsed expression has occurred before.
|
||||
We also know the first and last line of the expression;
|
||||
we need this when we decide to eliminate it.
|
||||
Associated with each available expression is a set of
|
||||
which the elements contains the first and last line of
|
||||
a recurrence of this expression.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Not only will the operand(s) be popped from the fake-stack,
|
||||
but the following will be pushed:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
(1) the value number of the result
|
||||
(2) the size of the result
|
||||
(3) a pointer to the first line of the expression
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
In this way an item on the fake-stack always contains
|
||||
the necessary information.
|
||||
As you see, EM expressions are parsed bottum up.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Updating entities
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
As said before,
|
||||
we build our private "symboltable",
|
||||
while scanning the EM-instructions.
|
||||
The behaviour of the EM-machine is not only reflected
|
||||
in the fake-stack,
|
||||
but also in the entities.
|
||||
When an entity is created,
|
||||
we do not yet know its value,
|
||||
so we assign a brand new value number to it.
|
||||
Each time a store-instruction is encountered,
|
||||
we change the value number of the target entity of this store
|
||||
to the value number of the token that was popped
|
||||
from the fake-stack.
|
||||
Because entities may overlap,
|
||||
we must also "forget" the value numbers of entities
|
||||
that might be affected by this store.
|
||||
Each such entity will be \fIkilled\fP,
|
||||
i.e. assigned a brand new valuenumber.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Because we lose information when we forget
|
||||
the value number of an entity,
|
||||
we try to save as much entities as possible.
|
||||
When we store into an external,
|
||||
we don't have to kill locals and vice versa.
|
||||
Furthermore, we can see whether two locals or
|
||||
two externals overlap,
|
||||
because we know the offset from the local base,
|
||||
resp. the offset within the data block,
|
||||
and the size.
|
||||
The situation becomes more complicated when we have
|
||||
to consider indirection.
|
||||
The worst case is that we store through an unknown pointer.
|
||||
In that case we kill all entities except those locals
|
||||
for which a so-called \fIregister message\fP has been generated;
|
||||
this register message indicates that this local can never be
|
||||
accessed indirectly.
|
||||
If we know this pointer we can be more careful.
|
||||
If it points to a local then the entity that is accessed through
|
||||
this pointer can never overlap with an external.
|
||||
If it points to an external this entity can never overlap with a local.
|
||||
Furthermore, in the latter case,
|
||||
we can find the data block this entity belongs to.
|
||||
Since pointer arithmetic is only defined within a data block,
|
||||
this entity can never overlap with entities that are known to
|
||||
belong to another data block.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Not only after a store-instruction but also after a
|
||||
subroutine-call it may be necessary to kill entities;
|
||||
the subroutine may affect global variables or store
|
||||
through a pointer.
|
||||
If a subroutine is called that is not available as EM-text,
|
||||
we assume worst case behaviour,
|
||||
i.e. we kill all entities without register message.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Additions and replacements.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
When a new expression comes available,
|
||||
we check whether the result is saved in a local
|
||||
that may go in a register.
|
||||
The last line of the expression must be followed
|
||||
by a STL or SDL instruction,
|
||||
depending on the size of the result
|
||||
(resp. WS and 2*WS),
|
||||
and a register message must be present for
|
||||
this local.
|
||||
If we have found such a local,
|
||||
we store a pointer to it with the available expression.
|
||||
Each time a new occurrence of this expression
|
||||
is found,
|
||||
we compare the value number of the local against
|
||||
the value number of the result.
|
||||
When they are different we remove the pointer to it,
|
||||
because we cannot use it.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The available expressions are singly linked in a list.
|
||||
When a new expression comes available,
|
||||
we link it at the head of the list.
|
||||
In this way expressions that are contained within other
|
||||
expressions appear later in the list,
|
||||
because EM-expressions are postfix.
|
||||
When we are going to eliminate expressions,
|
||||
we walk through the list,
|
||||
starting at the head, to find the largest expressions first.
|
||||
When we decide to eliminate an expression,
|
||||
we look at the expressions in the tail of the list,
|
||||
starting from where we are now,
|
||||
to delete expressions that are contained within
|
||||
the chosen one because
|
||||
we cannot eliminate an expression more than once.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
When we are going to eliminate expressions,
|
||||
and we do not have a local that holds the result,
|
||||
we emit a STL or SDL after the line where the expression
|
||||
was first found.
|
||||
The other occurrences are simply removed,
|
||||
unless they contain instructions that not only have
|
||||
effect on the stack; e.g. messages, stores, calls.
|
||||
Before each instruction that needs the result on the stack,
|
||||
we emit a LOL or LDL.
|
||||
When the expression was an AAR,
|
||||
but the instruction was a LAR or a SAR,
|
||||
we append a LOI resp. a STI of the number of bytes
|
||||
in an array-element after each LOL/LDL.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Desirability analysis
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Although the global optimizer works on EM code,
|
||||
the goal is to improve the quality of the object code.
|
||||
Therefore we need some machine dependent information
|
||||
to decide whether it is desirable to
|
||||
eliminate a given expression.
|
||||
Because it is impossible for the CS phase to know
|
||||
exactly what code will be generated,
|
||||
we use some heuristics.
|
||||
In most cases it will save time when we eliminate an
|
||||
operator, so we just do it.
|
||||
We only look for some special cases.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Some operators can in some cases be translated
|
||||
into an addressing mode for the machine at hand.
|
||||
We only eliminate such an operator,
|
||||
when its operand is itself "expensive",
|
||||
i.e. not just a simple load.
|
||||
The user of the CS phase has to supply
|
||||
a set of such operators.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Eliminating the loading of the Local Base or
|
||||
the Argument Base by the LXL resp. LXA instruction
|
||||
is only beneficial when the number of lexical levels
|
||||
we have to go back exceeds a certain threshold.
|
||||
This threshold will be different when registers
|
||||
are saved by the back end.
|
||||
The user must supply this threshold.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Replacing a SAR or a LAR by an AAR followed by a LOI
|
||||
may possibly increase the size of the object code.
|
||||
We assume that this is only possible when the
|
||||
size of the array element is greater than some
|
||||
(user-supplied) limit.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
There are back ends that can very efficiently translate
|
||||
the index computing instruction sequence LOC SLI ADS.
|
||||
If this is the case,
|
||||
we do not eliminate the SLI instruction between a LOC
|
||||
and an ADS.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
To handle unforeseen cases, the user may also supply
|
||||
a set of operators that should never be eliminated.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
The algorithm
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
After these preparatory explanations,
|
||||
we can be short about the algorithm itself.
|
||||
For each instruction within our window,
|
||||
the following steps are performed in the order given:
|
||||
.IP 1.
|
||||
We check if this instructin defines an entity.
|
||||
If this is the case the set of entities is updated accordingly.
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
We kill all entities that might be affected by this instruction.
|
||||
.IP 3.
|
||||
The instruction is simulated on the fake-stack.
|
||||
Copy propagation is done.
|
||||
If this instruction is an operator,
|
||||
we update the list of available expressions accordingly.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
When we have processed all instructions this way,
|
||||
we have built a list of available expressions plus the information we
|
||||
need to eliminate them.
|
||||
Those expressions of which desirability analysis tells us so,
|
||||
we eliminate.
|
||||
The we shift our window and continue.
|
||||
46
doc/ego/cs/cs5
Normal file
46
doc/ego/cs/cs5
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Source files of CS
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The sources of CS are in the following files and packages:
|
||||
.IP cs.h 14
|
||||
declarations of global variables and data structures
|
||||
.IP cs.c
|
||||
the routine main;
|
||||
a driving routine to process
|
||||
the basic blocks in the right order
|
||||
.IP vnm
|
||||
implements a procedure that performs
|
||||
the value numbering on one basic block
|
||||
.IP eliminate
|
||||
implements a procedure that does the
|
||||
transformations, if desirable
|
||||
.IP avail
|
||||
implements a procedure that manipulates the list of available expressions
|
||||
.IP entity
|
||||
implements a procedure that manipulates the set of entities
|
||||
.IP getentity
|
||||
implements a procedure that extracts the
|
||||
pseudo symboltable information from EM-instructions;
|
||||
uses a small table
|
||||
.IP kill
|
||||
implements several routines that find the entities
|
||||
that might be changed by EM-instructions
|
||||
and kill them
|
||||
.IP partition
|
||||
implements several routines that partition the huge set
|
||||
of EM-instructions into more or less manageable,
|
||||
more or less logical chunks
|
||||
.IP profit
|
||||
implements a procedure that decides whether it
|
||||
is advantageous to eliminate an expression;
|
||||
also removes expressions with side-effects
|
||||
.IP stack
|
||||
implements the fake-stack and operations on it
|
||||
.IP alloc
|
||||
implements several allocation routines
|
||||
.IP aux
|
||||
implements several auxiliary routines
|
||||
.IP debug
|
||||
implements several routines to provide debugging
|
||||
and verbose output
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
5
doc/ego/ic/.distr
Normal file
5
doc/ego/ic/.distr
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
|
||||
ic1
|
||||
ic2
|
||||
ic3
|
||||
ic4
|
||||
ic5
|
||||
57
doc/ego/ic/ic1
Normal file
57
doc/ego/ic/ic1
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
|
||||
.bp
|
||||
.NH
|
||||
The Intermediate Code and the IC phase
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
In this chapter the intermediate code of the EM global optimizer
|
||||
will be defined.
|
||||
The 'Intermediate Code construction' phase (IC),
|
||||
which builds the initial intermediate code from
|
||||
EM Compact Assembly Language,
|
||||
will be described.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Introduction
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The EM global optimizer is a multi pass program,
|
||||
hence there is a need for an intermediate code.
|
||||
Usually, programs in the Amsterdam Compiler Kit use the
|
||||
Compact Assembly Language format
|
||||
.[~[
|
||||
keizer architecture
|
||||
.], section 11.2]
|
||||
for this purpose.
|
||||
Although this code has some convenient features,
|
||||
such as being compact,
|
||||
it is quite unsuitable in our case,
|
||||
because of a number of reasons.
|
||||
At first, the code lacks global information
|
||||
about whole procedures or whole basic blocks.
|
||||
Second, it uses identifiers ('names') to bind
|
||||
defining and applied occurrences of
|
||||
procedures, data labels and instruction labels.
|
||||
Although this is usual in high level programming
|
||||
languages, it is awkward in an intermediate code
|
||||
that must be read many times.
|
||||
Each pass of the optimizer would have
|
||||
to incorporate an identifier look-up mechanism
|
||||
to associate a defining occurrence with each
|
||||
applied occurrence of an identifier.
|
||||
Finally, EM programs are used to declare blocks of bytes,
|
||||
rather than variables. A 'hol 6' instruction may be used to
|
||||
declare three 2-byte variables.
|
||||
Clearly, the optimizer wants to deal with variables, and
|
||||
not with rows of bytes.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
To overcome these problems, we have developed a new
|
||||
intermediate code.
|
||||
This code does not merely consist of the EM instructions,
|
||||
but also contains global information in the
|
||||
form of tables and graphs.
|
||||
Before describing the intermediate code we will
|
||||
first leap aside to outline
|
||||
the problems one generally encounters
|
||||
when trying to store complex data structures such as
|
||||
graphs outside the program, i.e. in a file.
|
||||
We trust this will enhance the
|
||||
comprehensibility of the
|
||||
intermediate code definition and the design and implementation
|
||||
of the IC phase.
|
||||
146
doc/ego/ic/ic2
Normal file
146
doc/ego/ic/ic2
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,146 @@
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Representation of complex data structures in a sequential file
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Most programmers are quite used to deal with
|
||||
complex data structures, such as
|
||||
arrays, graphs and trees.
|
||||
There are some particular problems that occur
|
||||
when storing such a data structure
|
||||
in a sequential file.
|
||||
We call data that is kept in
|
||||
main memory
|
||||
.UL internal
|
||||
,as opposed to
|
||||
.UL external
|
||||
data
|
||||
that is kept in a file outside the program.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
We assume a simple data structure of a
|
||||
scalar type (integer, floating point number)
|
||||
has some known external representation.
|
||||
An
|
||||
.UL array
|
||||
having elements of a scalar type can be represented
|
||||
externally easily, by successively
|
||||
representing its elements.
|
||||
The external representation may be preceded by a
|
||||
number, giving the length of the array.
|
||||
Now, consider a linear, singly linked list,
|
||||
the elements of which look like:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
record
|
||||
data: scalar_type;
|
||||
next: pointer_type;
|
||||
end;
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
It is significant to note that the "next"
|
||||
fields of the elements only have a meaning within
|
||||
main memory.
|
||||
The field contains the address of some location in
|
||||
main memory.
|
||||
If a list element is written to a file in
|
||||
some program,
|
||||
and read by another program,
|
||||
the element will be allocated at a different
|
||||
address in main memory.
|
||||
Hence this address value is completely
|
||||
useless outside the program.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
One may represent the list by ignoring these "next" fields
|
||||
and storing the data items in the order they are linked.
|
||||
The "next" fields are represented \fIimplicitly\fR.
|
||||
When the file is read again,
|
||||
the same list can be reconstructed.
|
||||
In order to know where the external representation of the
|
||||
list ends,
|
||||
it may be useful to put the length of
|
||||
the list in front of it.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
Note that arrays and linear lists have the
|
||||
same external representation.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A doubly linked, linear list,
|
||||
with elements of the type:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
record
|
||||
data: scalar_type;
|
||||
next,
|
||||
previous: pointer_type;
|
||||
end
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
can be represented in precisely the same way.
|
||||
Both the "next" and the "previous" fields are represented
|
||||
implicitly.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Next, consider a binary tree,
|
||||
the nodes of which have type:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
record
|
||||
data: scalar_type;
|
||||
left,
|
||||
right: pointer_type;
|
||||
end
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
Such a tree can be represented sequentially,
|
||||
by storing its nodes in some fixed order, e.g. prefix order.
|
||||
A special null data item may be used to
|
||||
denote a missing left or right son.
|
||||
For example, let the scalar type be integer,
|
||||
and let the null item be 0.
|
||||
Then the tree of fig. 3.1(a)
|
||||
can be represented as in fig. 3.1(b).
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
4
|
||||
|
||||
9 12
|
||||
|
||||
12 3 4 6
|
||||
|
||||
8 1 5 1
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 3.1(a) A binary tree
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
4 9 12 0 0 3 8 0 0 1 0 0 12 4 0 5 0 0 6 1 0 0 0
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 3.1(b) Its sequential representation
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
We are still able to represent the pointer fields ("left"
|
||||
and "right") implicitly.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Finally, consider a general
|
||||
.UL graph
|
||||
, where each node has a "data" field and
|
||||
pointer fields,
|
||||
with no restriction on where they may point to.
|
||||
Now we're at the end of our tale.
|
||||
There is no way to represent the pointers implicitly,
|
||||
like we did with lists and trees.
|
||||
In order to represent them explicitly,
|
||||
we use the following scheme.
|
||||
Every node gets an extra field,
|
||||
containing some unique number that identifies the node.
|
||||
We call this number its
|
||||
.UL id.
|
||||
A pointer is represented externally as the id of the node
|
||||
it points to.
|
||||
When reading the file we use a table that maps
|
||||
an id to the address of its node.
|
||||
In general this table will not be completely filled in
|
||||
until we have read the entire external representation of
|
||||
the graph and allocated internal memory locations for
|
||||
every node.
|
||||
Hence we cannot reconstruct the graph in one scan.
|
||||
That is, there may be some pointers from node A to B,
|
||||
where B is placed after A in the sequential file than A.
|
||||
When we read the node of A we cannot map the id of B
|
||||
to the address of node B,
|
||||
as we have not yet allocated node B.
|
||||
We can overcome this problem if the size
|
||||
of every node is known in advance.
|
||||
In this case we can allocate memory for a node
|
||||
on first reference.
|
||||
Else, the mapping from id to pointer
|
||||
cannot be done while reading nodes.
|
||||
The mapping can be done either in an extra scan
|
||||
or at every reference to the node.
|
||||
414
doc/ego/ic/ic3
Normal file
414
doc/ego/ic/ic3
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,414 @@
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Definition of the intermediate code
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The intermediate code of the optimizer consists
|
||||
of several components:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the object table
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the procedure table
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the em code
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the control flow graphs
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the loop table
|
||||
.LP -
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
These components are described in
|
||||
the next sections.
|
||||
The syntactic structure of every component
|
||||
is described by a set of context free syntax rules,
|
||||
with the following conventions:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
x a non-terminal symbol
|
||||
A a terminal symbol (in capitals)
|
||||
x: a b c; a grammar rule
|
||||
a | b a or b
|
||||
(a)+ 1 or more occurrences of a
|
||||
{a} 0 or more occurrences of a
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
The object table
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
EM programs declare blocks of bytes rather than (global) variables.
|
||||
A typical program may declare 'HOL 7780'
|
||||
to allocate space for 8 I/O buffers,
|
||||
2 large arrays and 10 scalar variables.
|
||||
The optimizer wants to deal with
|
||||
.UL objects
|
||||
like variables, buffers and arrays
|
||||
and certainly not with huge numbers of bytes.
|
||||
Therefore the intermediate code contains information
|
||||
about which global objects are used.
|
||||
This information can be obtained from an EM program
|
||||
by just looking at the operands of instruction
|
||||
such as LOE, LAE, LDE, STE, SDE, INE, DEE and ZRE.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The object table consists of a list of
|
||||
.UL datablock
|
||||
entries.
|
||||
Each such entry represents a declaration like HOL, BSS,
|
||||
CON or ROM.
|
||||
There are five kinds of datablock entries.
|
||||
The fifth kind,
|
||||
UNKNOWN, denotes a declaration in a
|
||||
separately compiled file that is not made
|
||||
available to the optimizer.
|
||||
Each datablock entry contains the type of the block,
|
||||
its size, and a description of the objects that
|
||||
belong to it.
|
||||
If it is a rom,
|
||||
it also contains a list of values given
|
||||
as arguments to the rom instruction,
|
||||
provided that this list contains only integer numbers.
|
||||
An object has an offset (within its datablock)
|
||||
and a size.
|
||||
The size need not always be determinable.
|
||||
Both datablock and object contain a unique
|
||||
identifying number
|
||||
(see previous section for their use).
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.UL syntax
|
||||
object_table:
|
||||
{datablock} ;
|
||||
datablock:
|
||||
D_ID -- unique identifying number
|
||||
PSEUDO -- one of ROM,CON,BSS,HOL,UNKNOWN
|
||||
SIZE -- # bytes declared
|
||||
FLAGS
|
||||
{value} -- contents of rom
|
||||
{object} ; -- objects of the datablock
|
||||
object:
|
||||
O_ID -- unique identifying number
|
||||
OFFSET -- offset within the datablock
|
||||
SIZE ; -- size of the object in bytes
|
||||
value:
|
||||
argument ;
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
A data block has only one flag: "external", indicating
|
||||
whether the data label is externally visible.
|
||||
The syntax for "argument" will be given later on
|
||||
(see em_text).
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
The procedure table
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The procedure table contains global information
|
||||
about all procedures that are made available
|
||||
to the optimizer
|
||||
and that are needed by the EM program.
|
||||
(Library units may not be needed, see section 3.5).
|
||||
The table has one entry for
|
||||
every procedure.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.UL syntax
|
||||
procedure_table:
|
||||
{procedure}
|
||||
procedure:
|
||||
P_ID -- unique identifying number
|
||||
#LABELS -- number of instruction labels
|
||||
#LOCALS -- number of bytes for locals
|
||||
#FORMALS -- number of bytes for formals
|
||||
FLAGS -- flag bits
|
||||
calling -- procedures called by this one
|
||||
change -- info about global variables changed
|
||||
use ; -- info about global variables used
|
||||
calling:
|
||||
{P_ID} ; -- procedures called
|
||||
change:
|
||||
ext -- external variables changed
|
||||
FLAGS ;
|
||||
use:
|
||||
FLAGS ;
|
||||
ext:
|
||||
{O_ID} ; -- a set of objects
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The number of bytes of formal parameters accessed by
|
||||
a procedure is determined by the front ends and
|
||||
passed via a message (parameter message) to the optimizer.
|
||||
If the front end is not able to determine this number
|
||||
(e.g. the parameter may be an array of dynamic size or
|
||||
the procedure may have a variable number of arguments) the attribute
|
||||
contains the value 'UNKNOWN_SIZE'.
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
A procedure has the following flags:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
external: true if the proc. is externally visible
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
bodyseen: true if its code is available as EM text
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
calunknown: true if it calls a procedure that has its bodyseen
|
||||
flag not set
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
environ: true if it uses or changes a (non-global) variable in
|
||||
a lexically enclosing procedure
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
lpi: true if is used as operand of an lpi instruction, so
|
||||
it may be called indirect
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The change and use attributes both have one flag: "indirect",
|
||||
indicating whether the procedure does a 'use indirect'
|
||||
or a 'store indirect' (indirect means through a pointer).
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
The EM text
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The EM text contains the EM instructions.
|
||||
Every EM instruction has an operation code (opcode)
|
||||
and 0 or 1 operands.
|
||||
EM pseudo instructions can have more than
|
||||
1 operand.
|
||||
The opcode is just a small (8 bit) integer.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
There are several kinds of operands, which we will
|
||||
refer to as
|
||||
.UL types.
|
||||
Many EM instructions can have more than one type of operand.
|
||||
The types and their encodings in Compact Assembly Language
|
||||
are discussed extensively in.
|
||||
.[~[
|
||||
keizer architecture
|
||||
.], section 11.2]
|
||||
Of special interest is the way numeric values
|
||||
are represented.
|
||||
Of prime importance is the machine independency of
|
||||
the representation.
|
||||
Ultimately, one could store every integer
|
||||
just as a string of the characters '0' to '9'.
|
||||
As doing arithmetic on strings is awkward,
|
||||
Compact Assembly Language allows several alternatives.
|
||||
The main idea is to look at the value of the integer.
|
||||
Integers that fit in 16, 32 or 64 bits are
|
||||
represented as a row of resp. 2, 4 and 8 bytes,
|
||||
preceded by an indication of how many bytes are used.
|
||||
Longer integers are represented as strings;
|
||||
this is only allowed within pseudo instructions, however.
|
||||
This concept works very well for target machines
|
||||
with reasonable word sizes.
|
||||
At present, most ACK software cannot be used for word sizes
|
||||
higher than 32 bits,
|
||||
although the handles for using larger word sizes are
|
||||
present in the design of the EM code.
|
||||
In the intermediate code we essentially use the
|
||||
same ideas.
|
||||
We allow three representations of integers.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
integers that fit in a short are represented as a short
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
integers that fit in a long but not in a short are represented
|
||||
as longs
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
all remaining integers are represented as strings
|
||||
(only allowed in pseudos).
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The terms short and long are defined in
|
||||
.[~[
|
||||
ritchie reference manual programming language
|
||||
.], section 4]
|
||||
and depend only on the source machine
|
||||
(i.e. the machine on which ACK runs),
|
||||
not on the target machines.
|
||||
For historical reasons a long will often be called an
|
||||
.UL offset.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Operands can also be instruction labels,
|
||||
objects or procedures.
|
||||
Instruction labels are denoted by a
|
||||
.UL label
|
||||
.UL identifier,
|
||||
which can be distinguished from a normal identifier.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
The operand of a pseudo instruction can be a list of
|
||||
.UL arguments.
|
||||
Arguments can have the same type as operands, except
|
||||
for the type short, which is not used for arguments.
|
||||
Furthermore, an argument can be a string or
|
||||
a string representation of a signed integer, unsigned integer
|
||||
or floating point number.
|
||||
If the number of arguments is not fully determined by
|
||||
the pseudo instruction (e.g. a ROM pseudo can have any number
|
||||
of arguments), then the list is terminated by a special
|
||||
argument of type CEND.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.UL syntax
|
||||
em_text:
|
||||
{line} ;
|
||||
line:
|
||||
INSTR -- opcode
|
||||
OPTYPE -- operand type
|
||||
operand ;
|
||||
operand:
|
||||
empty | -- OPTYPE = NO
|
||||
SHORT | -- OPTYPE = SHORT
|
||||
OFFSET | -- OPTYPE = OFFSET
|
||||
LAB_ID | -- OPTYPE = INSTRLAB
|
||||
O_ID | -- OPTYPE = OBJECT
|
||||
P_ID | -- OPTYPE = PROCEDURE
|
||||
{argument} ; -- OPTYPE = LIST
|
||||
argument:
|
||||
ARGTYPE
|
||||
arg ;
|
||||
arg:
|
||||
empty | -- ARGTYPE = CEND
|
||||
OFFSET |
|
||||
LAB_ID |
|
||||
O_ID |
|
||||
P_ID |
|
||||
string | -- ARGTYPE = STRING
|
||||
const ; -- ARGTYPE = ICON,UCON or FCON
|
||||
string:
|
||||
LENGTH -- number of characters
|
||||
{CHARACTER} ;
|
||||
const:
|
||||
SIZE -- number of bytes
|
||||
string ; -- string representation of (un)signed
|
||||
-- or floating point constant
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
The control flow graphs
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Each procedure can be divided
|
||||
into a number of basic blocks.
|
||||
A basic block is a piece of code with
|
||||
no jumps in, except at the beginning,
|
||||
and no jumps out, except at the end.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Every basic block has a set of
|
||||
.UL successors,
|
||||
which are basic blocks that can follow it immediately in
|
||||
the dynamic execution sequence.
|
||||
The
|
||||
.UL predecessors
|
||||
are the basic blocks of which this one
|
||||
is a successor.
|
||||
The successor and predecessor attributes
|
||||
of all basic blocks of a single procedure
|
||||
are said to form the
|
||||
.UL control
|
||||
.UL flow
|
||||
.UL graph
|
||||
of that procedure.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Another important attribute is the
|
||||
.UL immediate
|
||||
.UL dominator.
|
||||
A basic block B dominates a block C if
|
||||
every path in the graph from the procedure entry block
|
||||
to C goes through B.
|
||||
The immediate dominator of C is the closest dominator
|
||||
of C on any path from the entry block.
|
||||
(Note that the dominator relation is transitive,
|
||||
so the immediate dominator is well defined.)
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A basic block also has an attribute containing
|
||||
the identifiers of every
|
||||
.UL loop
|
||||
that the block belongs to (see next section for loops).
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.UL syntax
|
||||
control_flow_graph:
|
||||
{basic_block} ;
|
||||
basic_block:
|
||||
B_ID -- unique identifying number
|
||||
#INSTR -- number of EM instructions
|
||||
succ
|
||||
pred
|
||||
idom -- immediate dominator
|
||||
loops -- set of loops
|
||||
FLAGS ; -- flag bits
|
||||
succ:
|
||||
{B_ID} ;
|
||||
pred:
|
||||
{B_ID} ;
|
||||
idom:
|
||||
B_ID ;
|
||||
loops:
|
||||
{LP_ID} ;
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
The flag bits can have the values 'firm' and 'strong',
|
||||
which are explained below.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
The loop tables
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Every procedure has an associated
|
||||
.UL loop
|
||||
.UL table
|
||||
containing information about all the loops
|
||||
in the procedure.
|
||||
Loops can be detected by a close inspection of
|
||||
the control flow graph.
|
||||
The main idea is to look for two basic blocks,
|
||||
B and C, for which the following holds:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
B is a successor of C
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
B is a dominator of C
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
B is called the loop
|
||||
.UL entry
|
||||
and C is called the loop
|
||||
.UL end.
|
||||
Intuitively, C contains a jump backwards to
|
||||
the beginning of the loop (B).
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A loop L1 is said to be
|
||||
.UL nested
|
||||
within loop L2 if all basic blocks of L1
|
||||
are also part of L2.
|
||||
It is important to note that loops could
|
||||
originally be written as a well structured for -or
|
||||
while loop or as a messy goto loop.
|
||||
Hence loops may partly overlap without one
|
||||
being nested inside the other.
|
||||
The
|
||||
.UL nesting
|
||||
.UL level
|
||||
of a loop is the number of loops in
|
||||
which it is nested (so it is 0 for
|
||||
an outermost loop).
|
||||
The details of loop detection will be discussed later.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
It is often desirable to know whether a
|
||||
basic block gets executed during every iteration
|
||||
of a loop.
|
||||
This leads to the following definitions:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
A basic block B of a loop L is said to be a \fIfirm\fR block
|
||||
of L if B is executed on all successive iterations of L,
|
||||
with the only possible exception of the last iteration.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
A basic block B of a loop L is said to be a \fIstrong\fR block
|
||||
of L if B is executed on all successive iterations of L.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Note that a strong block is also a firm block.
|
||||
If a block is part of a conditional statement, it is neither
|
||||
strong nor firm, as it may be skipped during some iterations
|
||||
(see Fig. 3.2).
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
loop
|
||||
if cond1 then
|
||||
... -- this code will not
|
||||
-- result in a firm or strong block
|
||||
end if;
|
||||
... -- strong (always executed)
|
||||
exit when cond2;
|
||||
... -- firm (not executed on
|
||||
-- last iteration).
|
||||
end loop;
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 3.2 Example of firm and strong block
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.UL syntax
|
||||
looptable:
|
||||
{loop} ;
|
||||
loop:
|
||||
LP_ID -- unique identifying number
|
||||
LEVEL -- loop nesting level
|
||||
entry -- loop entry block
|
||||
end ;
|
||||
entry:
|
||||
B_ID ;
|
||||
end:
|
||||
B_ID ;
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
80
doc/ego/ic/ic4
Normal file
80
doc/ego/ic/ic4
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
External representation of the intermediate code
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The syntax of the intermediate code was given
|
||||
in the previous section.
|
||||
In this section we will make some remarks about
|
||||
the representation of the code in sequential files.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
We use sequential files in order to avoid
|
||||
the bookkeeping of complex file indices.
|
||||
As a consequence of this decision
|
||||
we can't store all components
|
||||
of the intermediate code
|
||||
in one file.
|
||||
If a phase wishes to change some attribute
|
||||
of a procedure,
|
||||
or wants to add or delete entire procedures
|
||||
(inline substitution may do the latter),
|
||||
the procedure table will only be fully updated
|
||||
after the entire EM text has been scanned.
|
||||
Yet, the next phase undoubtedly wants
|
||||
to read the procedure table before it
|
||||
starts working on the EM text.
|
||||
Hence there is an ordering problem, which
|
||||
can be solved easily by putting the
|
||||
procedure table in a separate file.
|
||||
Similarly, the data block table is kept
|
||||
in a file of its own.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The control flow graphs (CFGs) could be mixed
|
||||
with the EM text.
|
||||
Rather, we have chosen to put them
|
||||
in a separate file too.
|
||||
The control flow graph file should be regarded as a
|
||||
file that imposes some structure on the EM-text file,
|
||||
just as an overhead sheet containing a picture
|
||||
of a Flow Chart may be put on an overhead sheet
|
||||
containing statements.
|
||||
The loop tables are also put in the CFG file.
|
||||
A loop imposes an extra structure on the
|
||||
CFGs and hence on the EM text.
|
||||
So there are four files:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the EM-text file
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the procedure table file
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the object table file
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the CFG and loop tables file
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Every table is preceded by its length, in order to
|
||||
tell where it ends.
|
||||
The CFG file also contains the number of instructions of
|
||||
every basic block,
|
||||
indicating which part of the EM text belongs
|
||||
to that block.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.UL syntax
|
||||
intermediate_code:
|
||||
object_table_file
|
||||
proctable_file
|
||||
em_text_file
|
||||
cfg_file ;
|
||||
object_table_file:
|
||||
LENGTH -- number of objects
|
||||
object_table ;
|
||||
proctable_file:
|
||||
LENGTH -- number of procedures
|
||||
procedure_table ;
|
||||
em_text_file:
|
||||
em_text ;
|
||||
cfg_file:
|
||||
{per_proc} ; -- one for every procedure
|
||||
per_proc:
|
||||
BLENGTH -- number of basic blocks
|
||||
LLENGTH -- number of loops
|
||||
control_flow_graph
|
||||
looptable ;
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
163
doc/ego/ic/ic5
Normal file
163
doc/ego/ic/ic5
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,163 @@
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
The Intermediate Code construction phase
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The first phase of the global optimizer,
|
||||
called
|
||||
.UL IC,
|
||||
constructs a major part of the intermediate code.
|
||||
To be specific, it produces:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the EM text
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the object table
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
part of the procedure table
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The calling, change and use attributes of a procedure
|
||||
and all its flags except the external and bodyseen flags
|
||||
are computed by the next phase (Control Flow phase).
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
As explained before,
|
||||
the intermediate code does not contain
|
||||
any names of variables or procedures.
|
||||
The normal identifiers are replaced by identifying
|
||||
numbers.
|
||||
Yet, the output of the global optimizer must
|
||||
contain normal identifiers, as this
|
||||
output is in Compact Assembly Language format.
|
||||
We certainly want all externally visible names
|
||||
to be the same in the input as in the output,
|
||||
because the optimized EM module may be a library unit,
|
||||
used by other modules.
|
||||
IC dumps the names of all procedures and data labels
|
||||
on two files:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the procedure dump file, containing tuples (P_ID, procedure name)
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the data dump file, containing tuples (D_ID, data label name)
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The names of instruction labels are not dumped,
|
||||
as they are not visible outside the procedure
|
||||
in which they are defined.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The input to IC consists of one or more files.
|
||||
Each file is either an EM module in Compact Assembly Language
|
||||
format, or a Unix archive file (library) containing such modules.
|
||||
IC only extracts those modules from a library that are
|
||||
needed somehow, just as a linker does.
|
||||
It is advisable to present as much code
|
||||
of the EM program as possible to the optimizer,
|
||||
although it is not required to present the whole program.
|
||||
If a procedure is called somewhere in the EM text,
|
||||
but its body (text) is not included in the input,
|
||||
its bodyseen flag in the procedure table will still
|
||||
be off.
|
||||
Whenever such a procedure is called,
|
||||
we assume the worst case for everything;
|
||||
it will change and use all variables it has access to,
|
||||
it will call every procedure etc.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
Similarly, if a data label is used
|
||||
but not defined, the PSEUDO attribute in its data block
|
||||
will be set to UNKNOWN.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Implementation
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Part of the code for the EM Peephole Optimizer
|
||||
.[
|
||||
staveren peephole toplass
|
||||
.]
|
||||
has been used for IC.
|
||||
Especially the routines that read and unravel
|
||||
Compact Assembly Language and the identifier
|
||||
lookup mechanism have been used.
|
||||
New code was added to recognize objects,
|
||||
build the object and procedure tables and to
|
||||
output the intermediate code.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
IC uses singly linked linear lists for both the
|
||||
procedure and object table.
|
||||
Hence there are no limits on the size of such
|
||||
a table (except for the trivial fact that it must fit
|
||||
in main memory).
|
||||
Both tables are outputted after all EM code has
|
||||
been processed.
|
||||
IC reads the EM text of one entire procedure
|
||||
at a time,
|
||||
processes it and appends the modified code to
|
||||
the EM text file.
|
||||
EM code is represented internally as a doubly linked linear
|
||||
list of EM instructions.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Objects are recognized by looking at the operands
|
||||
of instructions that reference global data.
|
||||
If we come across the instructions:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
LDE X+6 -- Load Double External
|
||||
LAE X+20 -- Load Address External
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
we conclude that the data block
|
||||
preceded by the data label X contains an object
|
||||
at offset 6 of size twice the word size,
|
||||
and an object at offset 20 of unknown size.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
A data block entry of the object table is allocated
|
||||
at the first reference to a data label.
|
||||
If this reference is a defining occurrence
|
||||
or a INA pseudo instruction,
|
||||
the label is not externally visible
|
||||
.[~[
|
||||
keizer architecture
|
||||
.], section 11.1.4.3]
|
||||
In this case, the external flag of the data block
|
||||
is turned off.
|
||||
If the first reference is an applied occurrence
|
||||
or a EXA pseudo instruction, the flag is set.
|
||||
We record this information, because the
|
||||
optimizer may change the order of defining and
|
||||
applied occurrences.
|
||||
The INA and EXA pseudos are removed from the EM text.
|
||||
They may be regenerated by the last phase
|
||||
of the optimizer.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
Similar rules hold for the procedure table
|
||||
and the INP and EXP pseudos.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Source files of IC
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The source files of IC consist
|
||||
of the files ic.c, ic.h and several packages.
|
||||
.UL ic.h
|
||||
contains type definitions, macros and
|
||||
variable declarations that may be used by
|
||||
ic.c and by every package.
|
||||
.UL ic.c
|
||||
contains the definitions of these variables,
|
||||
the procedure
|
||||
.UL main
|
||||
and some high level I/O routines used by main.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
Every package xxx consists of two files.
|
||||
ic_xxx.h contains type definitions,
|
||||
macros, variable declarations and
|
||||
procedure declarations that may be used by
|
||||
every .c file that includes this .h file.
|
||||
The file ic_xxx.c provides the
|
||||
definitions of these variables and
|
||||
the implementation of the declared procedures.
|
||||
IC uses the following packages:
|
||||
.IP lookup: 18
|
||||
procedures that loop up procedure, data label
|
||||
and instruction label names; procedures to dump
|
||||
the procedure and data label names.
|
||||
.IP lib:
|
||||
one procedure that gets the next useful input module;
|
||||
while scanning archives, it skips unnecessary modules.
|
||||
.IP aux:
|
||||
several auxiliary routines.
|
||||
.IP io:
|
||||
low-level I/O routines that unravel the Compact
|
||||
Assembly Language.
|
||||
.IP put:
|
||||
routines that output the intermediate code
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
6
doc/ego/il/.distr
Normal file
6
doc/ego/il/.distr
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
|
||||
il1
|
||||
il2
|
||||
il3
|
||||
il4
|
||||
il5
|
||||
il6
|
||||
112
doc/ego/il/il1
Normal file
112
doc/ego/il/il1
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
|
||||
.bp
|
||||
.NH 1
|
||||
Inline substitution
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Introduction
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The Inline Substitution technique (IL)
|
||||
tries to decrease the overhead associated
|
||||
with procedure calls (invocations).
|
||||
During a procedure call, several actions
|
||||
must be undertaken to set up the right
|
||||
environment for the called procedure.
|
||||
.[
|
||||
johnson calling sequence
|
||||
.]
|
||||
On return from the procedure, most of these
|
||||
effects must be undone.
|
||||
This entire process introduces significant
|
||||
costs in execution time as well as
|
||||
in object code size.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The inline substitution technique replaces
|
||||
some of the calls by the modified body of
|
||||
the called procedure, hence eliminating
|
||||
the overhead.
|
||||
Furthermore, as the calling and called procedure
|
||||
are now integrated, they can be optimized
|
||||
together, using other techniques of the optimizer.
|
||||
This often leads to extra opportunities for
|
||||
optimization
|
||||
.[
|
||||
ball predicting effects
|
||||
.]
|
||||
.[
|
||||
carter code generation cacm
|
||||
.]
|
||||
.[
|
||||
scheifler inline cacm
|
||||
.]
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
An inline substitution of a call to a procedure P increases
|
||||
the size of the program, unless P is very small or P is
|
||||
called only once.
|
||||
In the latter case, P can be eliminated.
|
||||
In practice, procedures that are called only once occur
|
||||
quite frequently, due to the
|
||||
introduction of structured programming.
|
||||
(Carter
|
||||
.[
|
||||
carter umi ann arbor
|
||||
.]
|
||||
states that almost 50% of the Pascal procedures
|
||||
he analyzed were called just once).
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Scheifler
|
||||
.[
|
||||
scheifler inline cacm
|
||||
.]
|
||||
has a more general view of inline substitution.
|
||||
In his model, the program under consideration is
|
||||
allowed to grow by a certain amount,
|
||||
i.e. code size is sacrificed to speed up the program.
|
||||
The above two cases are just special cases of
|
||||
his model, obtained by setting the size-change to
|
||||
(approximately) zero.
|
||||
He formulates the substitution problem as follows:
|
||||
.IP
|
||||
"Given a program, a subset of all invocations,
|
||||
a maximum program size, and a maximum procedure size,
|
||||
find a sequence of substitutions that minimizes
|
||||
the expected execution time."
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Scheifler shows that this problem is NP-complete
|
||||
.[~[
|
||||
aho hopcroft ullman analysis algorithms
|
||||
.], chapter 10]
|
||||
by reduction to the Knapsack Problem.
|
||||
Heuristics will have to be used to find a near-optimal
|
||||
solution.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
In the following chapters we will extend
|
||||
Scheifler's view and adapt it to the EM Global Optimizer.
|
||||
We will first describe the transformations that have
|
||||
to be applied to the EM text when a call is substituted
|
||||
in line.
|
||||
Next we will examine in which cases inline substitution
|
||||
is not possible or desirable.
|
||||
Heuristics will be developed for
|
||||
chosing a good sequence of substitutions.
|
||||
These heuristics make no demand on the user
|
||||
(such as making profiles
|
||||
.[
|
||||
scheifler inline cacm
|
||||
.]
|
||||
or giving pragmats
|
||||
.[~[
|
||||
ichbiah ada military standard
|
||||
.], section 6.3.2]),
|
||||
although the model could easily be extended
|
||||
to use such information.
|
||||
Finally, we will discuss the implementation
|
||||
of the IL phase of the optimizer.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
We will often use the term inline expansion
|
||||
as a synonym of inline substitution.
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
The inverse technique of procedure abstraction
|
||||
(automatic subroutine generation)
|
||||
.[
|
||||
shaffer subroutine generation
|
||||
.]
|
||||
will not be discussed in this report.
|
||||
93
doc/ego/il/il2
Normal file
93
doc/ego/il/il2
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Parameters and local variables.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
In the EM calling sequence, the calling procedure
|
||||
pushes its parameters on the stack
|
||||
before doing the CAL.
|
||||
The called routine first saves some
|
||||
status information on the stack and then
|
||||
allocates space for its own locals
|
||||
(also on the stack).
|
||||
Usually, one special purpose register,
|
||||
the Local Base (LB) register,
|
||||
is used to access both the locals and the
|
||||
parameters.
|
||||
If memory is highly segmented,
|
||||
the stack frames of the caller and the callee
|
||||
may be allocated in different fragments;
|
||||
an extra Argument Base (AB) register is used
|
||||
in this case to access the actual parameters.
|
||||
See 4.2 of
|
||||
.[
|
||||
keizer architecture
|
||||
.]
|
||||
for further details.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
If a procedure call is expanded in line,
|
||||
there are two problems:
|
||||
.IP 1. 3
|
||||
No stack frame will be allocated for the called procedure;
|
||||
we must find another place to put its locals.
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
The LB register cannot be used to access the actual
|
||||
parameters;
|
||||
as the CAL instruction is deleted, the LB will
|
||||
still point to the local base of the \fIcalling\fR procedure.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The local variables of the called procedure will
|
||||
be put in the stack frame of the calling procedure,
|
||||
just after its own locals.
|
||||
The size of the stack frame of the
|
||||
calling procedure will be increased
|
||||
during its entire lifetime.
|
||||
Therefore our model will allow a
|
||||
limit to be set on the number of bytes
|
||||
for locals that the called procedure may have
|
||||
(see next section).
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
There are several alternatives to access the parameters.
|
||||
An actual parameter may be any auxiliary expression,
|
||||
which we will refer to as
|
||||
the \fIactual parameter expression\fR.
|
||||
The value of this expression is stored
|
||||
in a location on the stack (see above),
|
||||
the \fIparameter location\fR.
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
The alternatives for accessing parameters are:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
save the value of the stackpointer at the point of the CAL
|
||||
in a temporary variable X;
|
||||
this variable can be used to simulate the AB register, i.e.
|
||||
parameter locations are accessed via an offset to
|
||||
the value of X.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
create a new temporary local variable T for
|
||||
the parameter (in the stack frame of the caller);
|
||||
every access to the parameter location must be changed
|
||||
into an access to T.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
do not evaluate the actual parameter expression before the call;
|
||||
instead, substitute this expression for every use of the
|
||||
parameter location.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The first method may be expensive if X is not
|
||||
put in a register.
|
||||
We will not use this method.
|
||||
The time required to evaluate and access the
|
||||
parameters when the second method is used
|
||||
will not differ much from the normal
|
||||
calling sequence (i.e. not in line call).
|
||||
It is not expensive, but there are no
|
||||
extra savings either.
|
||||
The third method is essentially the 'by name'
|
||||
parameter mechanism of Algol60.
|
||||
If the actual parameter is just a numeric constant,
|
||||
it is advantageous to use it.
|
||||
Yet, there are several circumstances
|
||||
under which it cannot or should not be used.
|
||||
We will deal with this in the next section.
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
In general we will use the third method,
|
||||
if it is possible and desirable.
|
||||
Such parameters will be called \fIin line parameters\fR.
|
||||
In all other cases we will use the second method.
|
||||
164
doc/ego/il/il3
Normal file
164
doc/ego/il/il3
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,164 @@
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Feasibility and desirability analysis
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Feasibility and desirability analysis
|
||||
of in line substitution differ
|
||||
somewhat from most other techniques.
|
||||
Usually, much effort is needed to find
|
||||
a feasible opportunity for optimization
|
||||
(e.g. a redundant subexpression).
|
||||
Desirability analysis then checks
|
||||
if it is really advantageous to do
|
||||
the optimization.
|
||||
For IL, opportunities are easy to find.
|
||||
To see if an in line expansion is
|
||||
desirable will not be hard either.
|
||||
Yet, the main problem is to find the most
|
||||
desirable ones.
|
||||
We will deal with this problem later and
|
||||
we will first attend feasibility and
|
||||
desirability analysis.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
There are several reasons why a procedure invocation
|
||||
cannot or should not be expanded in line.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
A call to a procedure P cannot be expanded in line
|
||||
in any of the following cases:
|
||||
.IP 1. 3
|
||||
The body of P is not available as EM text.
|
||||
Clearly, there is no way to do the substitution.
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
P, or any procedure called by P (transitively),
|
||||
follows the chain of statically enclosing
|
||||
procedures (via a LXL or LXA instruction)
|
||||
or follows the chain of dynamically enclosing
|
||||
procedures (via a DCH).
|
||||
If the call were expanded in line,
|
||||
one level would be removed from the chains,
|
||||
leading to total chaos.
|
||||
This chaos could be solved by patching up
|
||||
every LXL, LXA or DCH in all procedures
|
||||
that could be part of the chains,
|
||||
but this is hard to implement.
|
||||
.IP 3.
|
||||
P, or any procedure called by P (transitively),
|
||||
calls a procedure whose body is not
|
||||
available as EM text.
|
||||
The unknown procedure may use an LXL, LXA or DCH.
|
||||
However, in several languages a separately
|
||||
compiled procedure has no access to the
|
||||
static or dynamic chain.
|
||||
In this case
|
||||
this point does not apply.
|
||||
.IP 4.
|
||||
P, or any procedure called by P (transitively),
|
||||
uses the LPB instruction, which converts a
|
||||
local base to an argument base;
|
||||
as the locals and parameters are stored
|
||||
in a non-standard way (differing from the
|
||||
normal EM calling sequence) this instruction
|
||||
would yield incorrect results.
|
||||
.IP 5.
|
||||
The total number of bytes of the parameters
|
||||
of P is not known.
|
||||
P may be a procedure with a variable number
|
||||
of parameters or may have an array of dynamic size
|
||||
as value parameter.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
It is undesirable to expand a call to a procedure P in line
|
||||
in any of the following cases:
|
||||
.IP 1. 3
|
||||
P is large, i.e. the number of EM instructions
|
||||
of P exceeds some threshold.
|
||||
The expanded code would be large too.
|
||||
Furthermore, several programs in ACK,
|
||||
including the global optimizer itself,
|
||||
may run out of memory if they they have to run
|
||||
in a small address space and are provided
|
||||
very large procedures.
|
||||
The threshold may be set to infinite,
|
||||
in which case this point does not apply.
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
P has many local variables.
|
||||
All these variables would have to be allocated
|
||||
in the stack frame of the calling procedure.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
If a call may be expanded in line, we have to
|
||||
decide how to access its parameters.
|
||||
In the previous section we stated that we would
|
||||
use in line parameters whenever possible and desirable.
|
||||
There are several reasons why a parameter
|
||||
cannot or should not be expanded in line.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
No parameter of a procedure P can be expanded in line,
|
||||
in any of the following cases:
|
||||
.IP 1. 3
|
||||
P, or any procedure called by P (transitively),
|
||||
does a store-indirect or a use-indirect (i.e. through
|
||||
a pointer).
|
||||
However, if the front-end has generated messages
|
||||
telling that certain parameters can not be accessed
|
||||
indirectly, those parameters may be expanded in line.
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
P, or any procedure called by P (transitively),
|
||||
calls a procedure whose body is not available as EM text.
|
||||
The unknown procedure may do a store-indirect
|
||||
or a use-indirect.
|
||||
However, the same remark about front-end messages
|
||||
as for 1. holds here.
|
||||
.IP 3.
|
||||
The address of a parameter location is taken (via a LAL).
|
||||
In the normal calling sequence, all parameters
|
||||
are stored sequentially. If the address of one
|
||||
parameter location is taken, the address of any
|
||||
other parameter location can be computed from it.
|
||||
Hence we must put every parameter in a temporary location;
|
||||
furthermore, all these locations must be in
|
||||
the same order as for the normal calling sequence.
|
||||
.IP 4.
|
||||
P has overlapping parameters; for example, it uses
|
||||
the parameter at offset 10 both as a 2 byte and as a 4 byte
|
||||
parameter.
|
||||
Such code may be produced by the front ends if
|
||||
the formal parameter is of some record type
|
||||
with variants.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Sometimes a specific parameter must not be expanded in line.
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
An actual parameter expression cannot be expanded in line
|
||||
in any of the following cases:
|
||||
.IP 1. 3
|
||||
P stores into the parameter location.
|
||||
Even if the actual parameter expression is a simple
|
||||
variable, it is incorrect to change the 'store into
|
||||
formal' into a 'store into actual', because of
|
||||
the parameter mechanism used.
|
||||
In Pascal, the following expansion is incorrect:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
procedure p (x:integer);
|
||||
begin
|
||||
x := 20;
|
||||
end;
|
||||
...
|
||||
a := 10; a := 10;
|
||||
p(a); ---> a := 20;
|
||||
write(a); write(a);
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
P changes any of the operands of the
|
||||
actual parameter expression.
|
||||
If the expression is expanded and evaluated
|
||||
after the operand has been changed,
|
||||
the wrong value will be used.
|
||||
.IP 3.
|
||||
The actual parameter expression has side effects.
|
||||
It must be evaluated only once,
|
||||
at the place of the call.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
It is undesirable to expand an actual parameter in line
|
||||
in the following case:
|
||||
.IP 1. 3
|
||||
The parameter is used more than once
|
||||
(dynamically) and the actual parameter expression
|
||||
is not just a simple variable or constant.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
132
doc/ego/il/il4
Normal file
132
doc/ego/il/il4
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Heuristic rules
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Using the information described
|
||||
in the previous section,
|
||||
we can find all calls that can
|
||||
be expanded in line, and for which
|
||||
this expansion is desirable.
|
||||
In general, we cannot expand all these calls,
|
||||
so we have to choose the 'best' ones.
|
||||
With every CAL instruction
|
||||
that may be expanded, we associate
|
||||
a \fIpay off\fR,
|
||||
which expresses how desirable it is
|
||||
to expand this specific CAL.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
Let Tc denote the portion of EM text involved
|
||||
in a specific call, i.e. the pushing of the actual
|
||||
parameter expressions, the CAL itself,
|
||||
the popping of the parameters and the
|
||||
pushing of the result (if any, via an LFR).
|
||||
Let Te denote the EM text that would be obtained
|
||||
by expanding the call in line.
|
||||
Let Pc be the original program and Pe the program
|
||||
with Te substituted for Tc.
|
||||
The pay off of the CAL depends on two factors:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
T = execution_time(Pe) - execution_time(Pc)
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
S = code_size(Pe) - code_size(Pc)
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The change in execution time (T) depends on:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
T1 = execution_time(Te) - execution_time(Tc)
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
N = number of times Te or Tc get executed.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
We assume that T1 will be the same every
|
||||
time the code gets executed.
|
||||
This is a reasonable assumption.
|
||||
(Note that we are talking about one CAL,
|
||||
not about different calls to the same procedure).
|
||||
Hence
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
T = N * T1
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
T1 can be estimated by a careful analysis
|
||||
of the transformations that are performed.
|
||||
Below, we list everything that will be
|
||||
different when a call is expanded in line:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The CAL instruction is not executed.
|
||||
This saves a subroutine jump.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The instructions in the procedure prolog
|
||||
are not executed.
|
||||
These instructions, generated from the PRO pseudo,
|
||||
save some machine registers
|
||||
(including the old LB), set the new LB and allocate space
|
||||
for the locals of the called routine.
|
||||
The savings may be less if there are no
|
||||
locals to allocate.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
In line parameters are not evaluated before the call
|
||||
and are not pushed on the stack.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
All remaining parameters are stored in local variables,
|
||||
instead of being pushed on the stack.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
If the number of parameters is nonzero,
|
||||
the ASP instruction after the CAL is not executed.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
Every reference to an in line parameter is
|
||||
substituted by the parameter expression.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
RET (return) instructions are replaced by
|
||||
BRA (branch) instructions.
|
||||
If the called procedure 'falls through'
|
||||
(i.e. it has only one RET, at the end of its code),
|
||||
even the BRA is not needed.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
The LFR (fetch function result) is not executed
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Besides these changes, which are caused directly by IL,
|
||||
other changes may occur as IL influences other optimization
|
||||
techniques, such as Register Allocation and Constant Propagation.
|
||||
Our heuristic rules do not take into account the quite
|
||||
inpredictable effects on Register Allocation.
|
||||
It does, however, favour calls that have numeric \fIconstants\fR
|
||||
as parameter; especially the constant "0" as an inline
|
||||
parameter gets high scores,
|
||||
as further optimizations may often be possible.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
It cannot be determined statically how often a CAL instruction gets
|
||||
executed.
|
||||
We will use \fIloop nesting\fR information here.
|
||||
The nesting level of the loop in which
|
||||
the CAL appears (if any) will be used as an
|
||||
indication for the number of times it gets executed.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Based on all these facts,
|
||||
the pay off of a call will be computed.
|
||||
The following model was developed empirically.
|
||||
Assume procedure P calls procedure Q.
|
||||
The call takes place in basic block B.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
ZP = # zero parameters
|
||||
CP = # constant parameters - ZP
|
||||
LN = Loop Nesting level (0 if outside any loop)
|
||||
F = \fIif\fR # formal parameters of Q > 0 \fIthen\fR 1 \fIelse\fR 0
|
||||
FT = \fIif\fR Q falls through \fIthen\fR 1 \fIelse\fR 0
|
||||
S = size(Q) - 1 - # inline_parameters - F
|
||||
L = \fIif\fR # local variables of P > 0 \fIthen\fR 0 \fIelse\fR -1
|
||||
A = CP + 2 * ZP
|
||||
N = \fIif\fR LN=0 and P is never called from a loop \fIthen\fR 0 \fIelse\fR (LN+1)**2
|
||||
FM = \fIif\fR B is a firm block \fIthen\fR 2 \fIelse\fR 1
|
||||
|
||||
pay_off = (100/S + FT + F + L + A) * N * FM
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
S stands for the size increase of the program,
|
||||
which is slightly less than the size of Q.
|
||||
The size of a procedure is taken to be its number
|
||||
of (non-pseudo) EM instructions.
|
||||
The terms "loop nesting level" and "firm" were defined
|
||||
in the chapter on the Intermediate Code (section "loop tables").
|
||||
If a call is not inside a loop and the calling procedure
|
||||
is itself never called from a loop (transitively),
|
||||
then the call will probably be executed at most once.
|
||||
Such a call is never expanded in line (its pay off is zero).
|
||||
If the calling procedure doesn't have local variables, a penalty (L)
|
||||
is introduced, as it will most likely get local variables if the
|
||||
call gets expanded.
|
||||
440
doc/ego/il/il5
Normal file
440
doc/ego/il/il5
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,440 @@
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Implementation
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A major factor in the implementation
|
||||
of Inline Substitution is the requirement
|
||||
not to use an excessive amount of memory.
|
||||
IL essentially analyzes the entire program;
|
||||
it makes decisions based on which procedure calls
|
||||
appear in the whole program.
|
||||
Yet, because of the memory restriction, it is
|
||||
not feasible to read the entire program
|
||||
in main memory.
|
||||
To solve this problem, the IL phase has been
|
||||
split up into three subphases that are executed sequentially:
|
||||
.IP 1.
|
||||
analyze every procedure; see how it accesses its parameters;
|
||||
simultaneously collect all calls
|
||||
appearing in the whole program an put them
|
||||
in a \fIcall-list\fR.
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
use the call-list and decide which calls will be substituted
|
||||
in line.
|
||||
.IP 3.
|
||||
take the decisions of subphase 2 and modify the
|
||||
program accordingly.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Subphases 1 and 3 scan the input program; only
|
||||
subphase 3 modifies it.
|
||||
It is essential that the decisions can be made
|
||||
in subphase 2
|
||||
without using the input program,
|
||||
provided that subphase 1 puts enough information
|
||||
in the call-list.
|
||||
Subphase 2 keeps the entire call-list in main memory
|
||||
and repeatedly scans it, to
|
||||
find the next best candidate for expansion.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
We will specify the
|
||||
data structures used by IL before
|
||||
describing the subphases.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Data structures
|
||||
.NH 4
|
||||
The procedure table
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
In subphase 1 information is gathered about every procedure
|
||||
and added to the procedure table.
|
||||
This information is used by the heuristic rules.
|
||||
A proctable entry for procedure p has
|
||||
the following extra information:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
is it allowed to substitute an invocation of p in line?
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
is it allowed to put any parameter of such a call in line?
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the size of p (number of EM instructions)
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
does p 'fall through'?
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
a description of the formal parameters that p accesses; this information
|
||||
is obtained by looking at the code of p. For every parameter f,
|
||||
we record:
|
||||
.RS
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the offset of f
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the type of f (word, double word, pointer)
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
may the corresponding actual parameter be put in line?
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
is f ever accessed indirectly?
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
if f used: never, once or more than once?
|
||||
.RE
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the number of times p is called (see below)
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the file address of its call-count information (see below).
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.NH 4
|
||||
Call-count information
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
As a result of Inline Substitution, some procedures may
|
||||
become useless, because all their invocations have been
|
||||
substituted in line.
|
||||
One of the tasks of IL is to keep track which
|
||||
procedures are no longer called.
|
||||
Note that IL is especially keen on procedures that are
|
||||
called only once
|
||||
(possibly as a result of expanding all other calls to it).
|
||||
So we want to know how many times a procedure
|
||||
is called \fIduring\fR Inline Substitution.
|
||||
It is not good enough to compute this
|
||||
information afterwards.
|
||||
The task is rather complex, because
|
||||
the number of times a procedure is called
|
||||
varies during the entire process:
|
||||
.IP 1.
|
||||
If a call to p is substituted in line,
|
||||
the number of calls to p gets decremented by 1.
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
If a call to p is substituted in line,
|
||||
and p contains n calls to q, then the number of calls to q
|
||||
gets incremented by n.
|
||||
.IP 3.
|
||||
If a procedure p is removed (because it is no
|
||||
longer called) and p contains n calls to q,
|
||||
then the number of calls to q gets decremented by n.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
(Note that p may be the same as q, if p is recursive).
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
So we actually want to have the following information:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
NRCALL(p,q) = number of call to q appearing in p,
|
||||
|
||||
for all procedures p and q that may be put in line.
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
This information, called \fIcall-count information\fR is
|
||||
computed by the first subphase.
|
||||
It is stored in a file.
|
||||
It is represented as a number of lists, rather than as
|
||||
a (very sparse) matrix.
|
||||
Every procedure has a list of (proc,count) pairs,
|
||||
telling which procedures it calls, and how many times.
|
||||
The file address of its call-count list is stored
|
||||
in its proctable entry.
|
||||
Whenever this information is needed, it is fetched from
|
||||
the file, using direct access.
|
||||
The proctable entry also contains the number of times
|
||||
a procedure is called, at any moment.
|
||||
.NH 4
|
||||
The call-list
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The call-list is the major data structure use by IL.
|
||||
Every item of the list describes one procedure call.
|
||||
It contains the following attributes:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the calling procedure (caller)
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the called procedure (callee)
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
identification of the CAL instruction (sequence number)
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the loop nesting level; our heuristic rules appreciate
|
||||
calls inside a loop (or even inside a loop nested inside
|
||||
another loop, etc.) more than other calls
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the actual parameter expressions involved in the call;
|
||||
for every actual, we record:
|
||||
.RS
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the EM code of the expression
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the number of bytes of its result (size)
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
an indication if the actual may be put in line
|
||||
.RE
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The structure of the call-list is rather complex.
|
||||
Whenever a call is expanded in line, new calls
|
||||
will suddenly appear in the program,
|
||||
that were not contained in the original body
|
||||
of the calling subroutine.
|
||||
These calls are inherited from the called procedure.
|
||||
We will refer to these invocations as \fInested calls\fR
|
||||
(see Fig. 5.1).
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
procedure p is
|
||||
begin .
|
||||
a(); .
|
||||
b(); .
|
||||
end;
|
||||
|
||||
procedure r is procedure r is
|
||||
begin begin
|
||||
x(); x();
|
||||
p(); -- in line a(); -- nested call
|
||||
y(); b(); -- nested call
|
||||
end; y();
|
||||
end;
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 5.1 Example of nested procedure calls
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
Nested calls may subsequently be put in line too
|
||||
(probably resulting in a yet deeper nesting level, etc.).
|
||||
So the call-list does not always reflect the source program,
|
||||
but changes dynamically, as decisions are made.
|
||||
If a call to p is expanded, all calls appearing in p
|
||||
will be added to the call-list.
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
A convenient and elegant way to represent
|
||||
the call-list is to use a LISP-like list.
|
||||
.[
|
||||
poel lisp trac
|
||||
.]
|
||||
Calls that appear at the same level
|
||||
are linked in the CDR direction. If a call C
|
||||
to a procedure p is expanded,
|
||||
all calls appearing in p are put in a sub-list
|
||||
of C, i.e. in its CAR.
|
||||
In the example above, before the decision
|
||||
to expand the call to p is made, the
|
||||
call-list of procedure r looks like:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
(call-to-x, call-to-p, call-to-y)
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
After the decision, it looks like:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
(call-to-x, (call-to-p*, call-to-a, call-to-b), call-to-y)
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
The call to p is marked, because it has been
|
||||
substituted.
|
||||
Whenever IL wants to traverse the call-list of some procedure,
|
||||
it uses the well-known LISP technique of
|
||||
recursion in the CAR direction and
|
||||
iteration in the CDR direction
|
||||
(see page 1.19-2 of
|
||||
.[
|
||||
poel lisp trac
|
||||
.]
|
||||
).
|
||||
All list traversals look like:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
traverse(list)
|
||||
{
|
||||
for (c = first(list); c != 0; c = CDR(c)) {
|
||||
if (c is marked) {
|
||||
traverse(CAR(c));
|
||||
} else {
|
||||
do something with c
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
The entire call-list consists of a number of LISP-like lists,
|
||||
one for every procedure.
|
||||
The proctable entry of a procedure contains a pointer
|
||||
to the beginning of the list.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
The first subphase: procedure analysis
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The tasks of the first subphase are to determine
|
||||
several attributes of every procedure
|
||||
and to construct the basic call-list,
|
||||
i.e. without nested calls.
|
||||
The size of a procedure is determined
|
||||
by simply counting its EM instructions.
|
||||
Pseudo instructions are skipped.
|
||||
A procedure does not 'fall through' if its CFG
|
||||
contains a basic block
|
||||
that is not the last block of the CFG and
|
||||
that ends on a RET instruction.
|
||||
The formal parameters of a procedure are determined
|
||||
by inspection of
|
||||
its code.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The call-list in constructed by looking at all CAL instructions
|
||||
appearing in the program.
|
||||
The call-list should only contain calls to procedures
|
||||
that may be put in line.
|
||||
This fact is only known if the procedure was
|
||||
analyzed earlier.
|
||||
If a call to a procedure p appears in the program
|
||||
before the body of p,
|
||||
the call will always be put in the call-list.
|
||||
If p is later found to be unsuitable,
|
||||
the call will be removed from the list by the
|
||||
second subphase.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
An important issue is the recognition
|
||||
of the actual parameter expressions of the call.
|
||||
The front ends produces messages telling how many
|
||||
bytes of formal parameters every procedure accesses.
|
||||
(If there is no such message for a procedure, it
|
||||
cannot be put in line).
|
||||
The actual parameters together must account for
|
||||
the same number of bytes.A recursive descent parser is used
|
||||
to parse side-effect free EM expressions.
|
||||
It uses a table and some
|
||||
auxiliary routines to determine
|
||||
how many bytes every EM instruction pops from the stack
|
||||
and how many bytes it pushes onto the stack.
|
||||
These numbers depend on the EM instruction, its argument,
|
||||
and the wordsize and pointersize of the target machine.
|
||||
Initially, the parser has to recognize the
|
||||
number of bytes specified in the formals-message,
|
||||
say N.
|
||||
Assume the first instruction before the CAL pops S bytes
|
||||
and pushes R bytes.
|
||||
If R > N, too many bytes are recognized
|
||||
and the parser fails.
|
||||
Else, it calls itself recursively to recognize the
|
||||
S bytes used as operand of the instruction.
|
||||
If it succeeds in doing so, it continues with the next instruction,
|
||||
i.e. the first instruction before the code recognized by
|
||||
the recursive call, to recognize N-R more bytes.
|
||||
The result is a number of EM instructions that collectively push N bytes.
|
||||
If an instruction is come across that has side-effects
|
||||
(e.g. a store or a procedure call) or of which R and S cannot
|
||||
be computed statically (e.g. a LOS), it fails.
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
Note that the parser traverses the code backwards.
|
||||
As EM code is essentially postfix code, the parser works top down.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
If the parser fails to recognize the parameters, the call will not
|
||||
be substituted in line.
|
||||
If the parameters can be determined, they still have to
|
||||
match the formal parameters of the called procedure.
|
||||
This check is performed by the second subphase; it cannot be
|
||||
done here, because it is possible that the called
|
||||
procedure has not been analyzed yet.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The entire call-list is written to a file,
|
||||
to be processed by the second subphase.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
The second subphase: making decisions
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The task of the second subphase is quite easy
|
||||
to understand.
|
||||
It reads the call-list file,
|
||||
builds an incore call-list and deletes every
|
||||
call that may not be expanded in line (either because the called
|
||||
procedure may not be put in line, or because the actual parameters
|
||||
of the call do not match the formal parameters of the called procedure).
|
||||
It assigns a \fIpay-off\fR to every call,
|
||||
indicating how desirable it is to expand it.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The subphase repeatedly scans the call-list and takes
|
||||
the call with the highest ratio.
|
||||
The chosen one gets marked,
|
||||
and the call-list is extended with the nested calls,
|
||||
as described above.
|
||||
These nested calls are also assigned a ratio,
|
||||
and will be considered too during the next scans.
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
After every decision the number of times
|
||||
every procedure is called is updated, using
|
||||
the call-count information.
|
||||
Meanwhile, the subphase keeps track of the amount of space left
|
||||
available.
|
||||
If all space is used, or if there are no more calls left to
|
||||
be expanded, it exits this loop.
|
||||
Finally, calls to procedures that are called only
|
||||
once are also chosen.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The actual parameters of a call are only needed by
|
||||
this subphase to assign a ratio to a call.
|
||||
To save some space, these actuals are not kept in main memory.
|
||||
They are removed after the call has been read and a ratio
|
||||
has been assigned to it.
|
||||
So this subphase works with \fIabstracts\fR of calls.
|
||||
After all work has been done,
|
||||
the actual parameters of the chosen calls are retrieved
|
||||
from a file,
|
||||
as they are needed by the transformation subphase.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
The third subphase: doing transformations
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The third subphase makes the actual modifications to
|
||||
the EM text.
|
||||
It is directed by the decisions made in the previous subphase,
|
||||
as expressed via the call-list.
|
||||
The call-list read by this subphase contains
|
||||
only calls that were selected for expansion.
|
||||
The list is ordered in the same way as the EM text,
|
||||
i.e. if a call C1 appears before a call C2 in the call-list,
|
||||
C1 also appears before C2 in the EM text.
|
||||
So the EM text is traversed linearly,
|
||||
the calls that have to be substituted are determined
|
||||
and the modifications are made.
|
||||
If a procedure is come across that is no longer needed,
|
||||
it is simply not written to the output EM file.
|
||||
The substitution of a call takes place in distinct steps:
|
||||
.IP "change the calling sequence" 7
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
The actual parameter expressions are changed.
|
||||
Parameters that are put in line are removed.
|
||||
All remaining ones must store their result in a
|
||||
temporary local variable, rather than
|
||||
push it on the stack.
|
||||
The CAL instruction and any ASP (to pop actual parameters)
|
||||
or LFR (to fetch the result of a function)
|
||||
are deleted.
|
||||
.IP "fetch the text of the called procedure"
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
Direct disk access is used to to read the text of the
|
||||
called procedure.
|
||||
The file offset is obtained from the proctable entry.
|
||||
.IP "allocate bytes for locals and temporaries"
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
The local variables of the called procedure will be put in the
|
||||
stack frame of the calling procedure.
|
||||
The same applies to any temporary variables
|
||||
that hold the result of parameters
|
||||
that were not put in line.
|
||||
The proctable entry of the caller is updated.
|
||||
.IP "put a label after the CAL"
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
If the called procedure contains a RET (return) instruction
|
||||
somewhere in the middle of its text (i.e. it does
|
||||
not fall through), the RET must be changed into
|
||||
a BRA (branch), to jump over the
|
||||
remainder of the text.
|
||||
This label is not needed if the called
|
||||
procedure falls through.
|
||||
.IP "copy the text of the called procedure and modify it"
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
References to local variables of the called routine
|
||||
and to parameters that are not put in line
|
||||
are changed to refer to the
|
||||
new local of the caller.
|
||||
References to in line parameters are replaced
|
||||
by the actual parameter expression.
|
||||
Returns (RETs) are either deleted or
|
||||
replaced by a BRA.
|
||||
Messages containing information about local
|
||||
variables or parameters are changed.
|
||||
Global data declarations and the PRO and END pseudos
|
||||
are removed.
|
||||
Instruction labels and references to them are
|
||||
changed to make sure they do not have the
|
||||
same identifying number as
|
||||
labels in the calling procedure.
|
||||
.IP "insert the modified text"
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
The pseudos of the called procedure are put after the pseudos
|
||||
of the calling procedure.
|
||||
The real text of the callee is put at
|
||||
the place where the CAL was.
|
||||
.IP "take care of nested substitutions"
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
The expanded procedure may contain calls that
|
||||
have to be expanded too (nested calls).
|
||||
If the descriptor of this call contains actual
|
||||
parameter expressions,
|
||||
the code of the expressions has to be changed
|
||||
the same way as the code of the callee was changed.
|
||||
Next, the entire process of finding CALs and doing
|
||||
the substitutions is repeated recursively.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
27
doc/ego/il/il6
Normal file
27
doc/ego/il/il6
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Source files of IL
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The sources of IL are in the following files
|
||||
and packages (the prefixes 1_, 2_ and 3_ refer to the three subphases):
|
||||
.IP il.h: 14
|
||||
declarations of global variables and
|
||||
data structures
|
||||
.IP il.c:
|
||||
the routine main; the driving routines of the three subphases
|
||||
.IP 1_anal:
|
||||
contains a subroutine that analyzes a procedure
|
||||
.IP 1_cal:
|
||||
contains a subroutine that analyzes a call
|
||||
.IP 1_aux:
|
||||
implements auxiliary procedures used by subphase 1
|
||||
.IP 2_aux:
|
||||
implements auxiliary procedures used by subphase 2
|
||||
.IP 3_subst:
|
||||
the driving routine for doing the substitution
|
||||
.IP 3_change:
|
||||
lower level routines that do certain modifications
|
||||
.IP 3_aux:
|
||||
implements auxiliary procedures used by subphase 3
|
||||
.IP aux
|
||||
implements auxiliary procedures used by several subphases.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
3
doc/ego/intro/.distr
Normal file
3
doc/ego/intro/.distr
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
|
||||
head
|
||||
intro1
|
||||
tail
|
||||
7
doc/ego/intro/head
Normal file
7
doc/ego/intro/head
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
|
||||
.ND
|
||||
.ll 80m
|
||||
.nr LL 80m
|
||||
.nr tl 78m
|
||||
.tr ~
|
||||
.ds >. .
|
||||
.ds [. " \[
|
||||
79
doc/ego/intro/intro1
Normal file
79
doc/ego/intro/intro1
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
|
||||
.TL
|
||||
The design and implementation of
|
||||
the EM Global Optimizer
|
||||
.AU
|
||||
H.E. Bal
|
||||
.AI
|
||||
Vrije Universiteit
|
||||
Wiskundig Seminarium, Amsterdam
|
||||
.AB
|
||||
The EM Global Optimizer is part of the Amsterdam Compiler Kit,
|
||||
a toolkit for making retargetable compilers.
|
||||
It optimizes the intermediate code common to all compilers of
|
||||
the toolkit (EM),
|
||||
so it can be used for all programming languages and
|
||||
all processors supported by the kit.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The optimizer is based on well-understood concepts like
|
||||
control flow analysis and data flow analysis.
|
||||
It performs the following optimizations:
|
||||
Inline Substitution, Strength Reduction, Common Subexpression Elimination,
|
||||
Stack Pollution, Cross Jumping, Branch Optimization, Copy Propagation,
|
||||
Constant Propagation, Dead Code Elimination and Register Allocation.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
This report describes the design of the optimizer and several
|
||||
of its implementation issues.
|
||||
.AE
|
||||
.bp
|
||||
.NH 1
|
||||
Introduction
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
.FS
|
||||
This work was supported by the
|
||||
Stichting Technische Wetenschappen (STW)
|
||||
under grant VWI00.0001.
|
||||
.FE
|
||||
The EM Global Optimizer is part of a software toolkit
|
||||
for making production-quality retargetable compilers.
|
||||
This toolkit,
|
||||
called the Amsterdam Compiler Kit
|
||||
.[
|
||||
tanenbaum toolkit rapport
|
||||
.]
|
||||
.[
|
||||
tanenbaum toolkit cacm
|
||||
.]
|
||||
runs under the Unix*
|
||||
.FS
|
||||
*Unix is a Trademark of Bell Laboratories
|
||||
.FE
|
||||
operating system.
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
The main design philosophy of the toolkit is to use
|
||||
a language- and machine-independent
|
||||
intermediate code, called EM.
|
||||
.[
|
||||
keizer architecture
|
||||
.]
|
||||
The basic compilation process can be split up into
|
||||
two parts.
|
||||
A language-specific front end translates the source program into EM.
|
||||
A machine-specific back end transforms EM to assembly code
|
||||
of the target machine.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The global optimizer is an optional phase of the
|
||||
compilation process, and can be used to obtain
|
||||
machine code of a higher quality.
|
||||
The optimizer transforms EM-code to better EM-code,
|
||||
so it comes between the front end and the back end.
|
||||
It can be used with any combination of languages
|
||||
and machines, as far as they are supported by
|
||||
the compiler kit.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
This report describes the design of the
|
||||
global optimizer and several of its
|
||||
implementation issues.
|
||||
Measurements can be found in.
|
||||
.[
|
||||
bal tanenbaum global
|
||||
.]
|
||||
3
doc/ego/intro/tail
Normal file
3
doc/ego/intro/tail
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
|
||||
.[
|
||||
$LIST$
|
||||
.]
|
||||
1
doc/ego/lv/.distr
Normal file
1
doc/ego/lv/.distr
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1 @@
|
||||
lv1
|
||||
95
doc/ego/lv/lv1
Normal file
95
doc/ego/lv/lv1
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
|
||||
.bp
|
||||
.NH 1
|
||||
Live-Variable analysis
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Introduction
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The "Live-Variable analysis" optimization technique (LV)
|
||||
performs some code improvements and computes information that may be
|
||||
used by subsequent optimizations.
|
||||
The main task of this phase is the
|
||||
computation of \fIlive-variable information\fR.
|
||||
.[~[
|
||||
aho compiler design
|
||||
.] section 14.4]
|
||||
A variable A is said to be \fIdead\fR at some point p of the
|
||||
program text, if on no path in the control flow graph
|
||||
from p to a RET (return), A can be used before being changed;
|
||||
else A is said to be \fIlive\fR.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A statement of the form
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
VARIABLE := EXPRESSION
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
is said to be dead if the left hand side variable is dead just after
|
||||
the statement and the right hand side expression has no
|
||||
side effects (i.e. it doesn't change any variable).
|
||||
Such a statement can be eliminated entirely.
|
||||
Dead code will seldom be present in the original program,
|
||||
but it may be the result of earlier optimizations,
|
||||
such as copy propagation.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Live-variable information is passed to other phases via
|
||||
messages in the EM code.
|
||||
Live/dead messages are generated at points in the EM text where
|
||||
variables become dead or live.
|
||||
This information is especially useful for the Register
|
||||
Allocation phase.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Implementation
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The implementation uses algorithm 14.6 of.
|
||||
.[
|
||||
aho compiler design
|
||||
.]
|
||||
First two sets DEF and USE are computed for every basic block b:
|
||||
.IP DEF(b) 9
|
||||
the set of all variables that are assigned a value in b before
|
||||
being used
|
||||
.IP USE(b) 9
|
||||
the set of all variables that may be used in b before being changed.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
(So variables that may, but need not, be used resp. changed via a procedure
|
||||
call or through a pointer are included in USE but not in DEF).
|
||||
The next step is to compute the sets IN and OUT :
|
||||
.IP IN[b] 9
|
||||
the set of all variables that are live at the beginning of b
|
||||
.IP OUT[b] 9
|
||||
the set of all variables that are live at the end of b
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
IN and OUT can be computed for all blocks simultaneously by solving the
|
||||
data flow equations:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
(1) IN[b] = OUT[b] - DEF[b] + USE[b]
|
||||
[2] OUT[b] = IN[s1] + ... + IN[sn] ;
|
||||
where SUCC[b] = {s1, ... , sn}
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
The equations are solved by a similar algorithm as for
|
||||
the Use Definition equations (see previous chapter).
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Finally, each basic block is visited in turn to remove its dead code
|
||||
and to emit the live/dead messages.
|
||||
Every basic block b is traversed from its last
|
||||
instruction backwards to the beginning of b.
|
||||
Initially, all variables that are dead at the end
|
||||
of b are marked dead. All others are marked live.
|
||||
If we come across an assignment to a variable X that
|
||||
was marked live, a live-message is put after the
|
||||
assignment and X is marked dead;
|
||||
if X was marked dead, the assignment may be removed, provided that
|
||||
the right hand side expression contains no side effects.
|
||||
If we come across a use of a variable X that
|
||||
was marked dead, a dead-message is put after the
|
||||
use and X is marked live.
|
||||
So at any point, the mark of X tells whether X is
|
||||
live or dead immediately before that point.
|
||||
A message is also generated at the start of a basic block
|
||||
for every variable that was live at the end of the (textually)
|
||||
previous block, but dead at the entry of this block, or v.v.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Only local variables are considered.
|
||||
This significantly reduces the memory needed by this phase,
|
||||
eases the implementation and is hardly less efficient than
|
||||
considering all variables.
|
||||
(Note that it is very hard to prove that an assignment to
|
||||
a global variable is dead).
|
||||
1
doc/ego/ov/.distr
Normal file
1
doc/ego/ov/.distr
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1 @@
|
||||
ov1
|
||||
371
doc/ego/ov/ov1
Normal file
371
doc/ego/ov/ov1
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,371 @@
|
||||
.bp
|
||||
.NH 1
|
||||
Overview of the global optimizer
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
The ACK compilation process
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The EM Global Optimizer is one of three optimizers that are
|
||||
part of the Amsterdam Compiler Kit (ACK).
|
||||
The phases of ACK are:
|
||||
.IP 1.
|
||||
A Front End translates a source program to EM
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
The Peephole Optimizer
|
||||
.[
|
||||
tanenbaum staveren peephole toplass
|
||||
.]
|
||||
reads EM code and produces 'better' EM code.
|
||||
It performs a number of optimizations (mostly peephole
|
||||
optimizations)
|
||||
such as constant folding, strength reduction and unreachable code
|
||||
elimination.
|
||||
.IP 3.
|
||||
The Global Optimizer further improves the EM code.
|
||||
.IP 4.
|
||||
The Code Generator transforms EM to assembly code
|
||||
of the target computer.
|
||||
.IP 5.
|
||||
The Target Optimizer improves the assembly code.
|
||||
.IP 6.
|
||||
An Assembler/Loader generates an executable file.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
For a more extensive overview of the ACK compilation process,
|
||||
we refer to.
|
||||
.[
|
||||
tanenbaum toolkit rapport
|
||||
.]
|
||||
.[
|
||||
tanenbaum toolkit cacm
|
||||
.]
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The input of the Global Optimizer may consist of files and
|
||||
libraries.
|
||||
Every file or module in the library must contain EM code in
|
||||
Compact Assembly Language format.
|
||||
.[~[
|
||||
tanenbaum machine architecture
|
||||
.], section 11.2]
|
||||
The output consists of one such EM file.
|
||||
The input files and libraries together need not
|
||||
constitute an entire program,
|
||||
although as much of the program as possible should be supplied.
|
||||
The more information about the program the optimizer
|
||||
gets, the better its output code will be.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The Global Optimizer is language- and machine-independent,
|
||||
i.e. it can be used for all languages and machines supported by ACK.
|
||||
Yet, it puts some unavoidable restrictions on the EM code
|
||||
produced by the Front End (see below).
|
||||
It must have some knowledge of the target machine.
|
||||
This knowledge is expressed in a machine description table
|
||||
which is passed as argument to the optimizer.
|
||||
This table does not contain very detailed information about the
|
||||
target (such as its instruction set and addressing modes).
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
The EM code
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The definition of EM, the intermediate code of all ACK compilers,
|
||||
is given in a separate document.
|
||||
.[
|
||||
tanenbaum machine architecture
|
||||
.]
|
||||
We will only discuss some features of EM that are most relevant
|
||||
to the Global Optimizer.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
EM is the assembly code of a virtual \fIstack machine\fR.
|
||||
All operations are performed on the top of the stack.
|
||||
For example, the statement "A := B + 3" may be expressed in EM as:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
LOL -4 -- push local variable B
|
||||
LOC 3 -- push constant 3
|
||||
ADI 2 -- add two 2-byte items on top of
|
||||
-- the stack and push the result
|
||||
STL -2 -- pop A
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
So EM is essentially a \fIpostfix\fR code.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
EM has a rich instruction set, containing several arithmetic
|
||||
and logical operators.
|
||||
It also contains special-case instructions (such as INCrement).
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
EM has \fIglobal\fR (\fIexternal\fR) variables, accessible
|
||||
by all procedures and \fIlocal\fR variables, accessible by a few
|
||||
(nested) procedures.
|
||||
The local variables of a lexically enclosing procedure may
|
||||
be accessed via a \fIstatic link\fR.
|
||||
EM has instructions to follow the static chain.
|
||||
There are EM instruction to allow a procedure
|
||||
to access its local variables directly (such as LOL and STL above).
|
||||
Local variables are referenced via an offset in the stack frame
|
||||
of the procedure, rather than by their names (e.g. -2 and -4 above).
|
||||
The EM code does not contain the (source language) type
|
||||
of the variables.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
All structured statements in the source program are expressed in
|
||||
low level jump instructions.
|
||||
Besides conditional and unconditional branch instructions, there are
|
||||
two case instructions (CSA and CSB),
|
||||
to allow efficient translation of case statements.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Requirements on the EM input
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
As the optimizer should be useful for all languages,
|
||||
it clearly should not put severe restrictions on the EM code
|
||||
of the input.
|
||||
There is, however, one immovable requirement:
|
||||
it must be possible to determine the \fIflow of control\fR of the
|
||||
input program.
|
||||
As virtually all global optimizations are based on control flow information,
|
||||
the optimizer would be totally powerless without it.
|
||||
For this reason we restrict the usage of the case jump instructions (CSA/CSB)
|
||||
of EM.
|
||||
Such an instruction is always called with the address of a case descriptor
|
||||
on top the the stack.
|
||||
.[~[
|
||||
tanenbaum machine architecture
|
||||
.] section 7.4]
|
||||
This descriptor contains the labels of all possible
|
||||
destinations of the jump.
|
||||
We demand that all case descriptors are allocated in a global
|
||||
data fragment of type ROM, i.e. the case descriptors
|
||||
may not be modifyable.
|
||||
Furthermore, any case instruction should be immediately preceded by
|
||||
a LAE (Load Address External) instruction, that loads the
|
||||
address of the descriptor,
|
||||
so the descriptor can be uniquely identified.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The optimizer will work improperly if the user deceives the control flow.
|
||||
We will give two methods to do this.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
In "C" the notorious library routines "setjmp" and "longjmp"
|
||||
.[
|
||||
unix programmer's manual McIlroy
|
||||
.]
|
||||
may be used to jump out of a procedure,
|
||||
but can also be used for a number of other stuffy purposes,
|
||||
for example, to create an extra entry point in a loop.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
while (condition) {
|
||||
....
|
||||
setjmp(buf);
|
||||
...
|
||||
}
|
||||
...
|
||||
longjmp(buf);
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
The invocation to longjmp actually is a jump to the place of
|
||||
the last call to setjmp with the same argument (buf).
|
||||
As the calls to setjmp and longjmp are indistinguishable from
|
||||
normal procedure calls, the optimizer will not see the danger.
|
||||
No need to say that several loop optimizations will behave
|
||||
unexpectedly when presented with such pathological input.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Another way to deceive the flow of control is
|
||||
by using exception handling routines.
|
||||
Ada*
|
||||
.FS
|
||||
* Ada is a registered trademark of the U.S. Government
|
||||
(Ada Joint Program Office).
|
||||
.FE
|
||||
has clearly recognized the dangers of exception handling,
|
||||
but other languages (such as PL/I) have not.
|
||||
.[
|
||||
ada rationale
|
||||
.]
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The optimizer will be more effective if the EM input contains
|
||||
some extra information about the source program.
|
||||
Especially the \fIregister message\fR is very important.
|
||||
These messages indicate which local variables may never be
|
||||
accessed indirectly.
|
||||
Most optimizations benefit significantly by this information.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The Inline Substitution technique needs to know how many bytes
|
||||
of formal parameters every procedure accesses.
|
||||
Only calls to procedures for which the EM code contains this information
|
||||
will be substituted in line.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Structure of the optimizer
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The Global Optimizer is organized as a number of \fIphases\fR,
|
||||
each one performing some task.
|
||||
The main structure is as follows:
|
||||
.IP IC 6
|
||||
the Intermediate Code construction phase transforms EM into the
|
||||
intermediate code (ic) of the optimizer
|
||||
.IP CF
|
||||
the Control Flow phase extends the ic with control flow
|
||||
information and interprocedural information
|
||||
.IP OPTs
|
||||
zero or more optimization phases, each one performing one or
|
||||
more related optimizations
|
||||
.IP CA
|
||||
the Compact Assembly phase generates Compact Assembly Language EM code
|
||||
out of ic.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
An important issue in the design of a global optimizer is the
|
||||
interaction between optimization techniques.
|
||||
It is often advantageous to combine several techniques in
|
||||
one algorithm that takes into account all interactions between them.
|
||||
Ideally, one single algorithm should be developed that does
|
||||
all optimizations simultaneously and deals with all possible interactions.
|
||||
In practice, such an algorithm is still far out of reach.
|
||||
Instead some rather ad hoc (albeit important) combinations are chosen,
|
||||
such as Common Subexpression Elimination and Register Allocation.
|
||||
.[
|
||||
prabhala sethi common subexpressions
|
||||
.]
|
||||
.[
|
||||
sethi ullman optimal code
|
||||
.]
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
In the Em Global Optimizer there is one separate algorithm for
|
||||
every technique.
|
||||
Note that this does not mean that all techniques are independent
|
||||
of each other.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
In principle, the optimization phases can be run in any order;
|
||||
a phase may even be run more than once.
|
||||
However, the following rules should be obeyed:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the Live Variable analysis phase (LV) must be run prior to
|
||||
Register Allocation (RA), as RA uses information outputted by LV.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
RA should be the last phase; this is a consequence of the way
|
||||
the interface between RA and the Code Generator is defined.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The ordering of the phases has significant impact on
|
||||
the quality of the produced code.
|
||||
In
|
||||
.[
|
||||
wulf overview production quality carnegie-mellon
|
||||
.]
|
||||
two kinds of phase ordering problems are distinguished.
|
||||
If two techniques A and B both take away opportunities of each other,
|
||||
there is a "negative" ordering problem.
|
||||
If, on the other hand, both A and B introduce new optimization
|
||||
opportunities for each other, the problem is called "positive".
|
||||
In the Global Optimizer the following interactions must be
|
||||
taken into account:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
Inline Substitution (IL) may create new opportunities for most
|
||||
other techniques, so it should be run as early as possible
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
Use Definition analysis (UD) may introduce opportunities for LV.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
Strength Reduction may create opportunities for UD
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The optimizer has a default phase ordering, which can
|
||||
be changed by the user.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Structure of this document
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The remaining chapters of this document each describe one
|
||||
phase of the optimizer.
|
||||
For every phase, we describe its task, its design,
|
||||
its implementation, and its source files.
|
||||
The latter two sections are intended to aid the
|
||||
maintenance of the optimizer and
|
||||
can be skipped by the initial reader.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
References
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
There are very
|
||||
few modern textbooks on optimization.
|
||||
Chapters 12, 13, and 14 of
|
||||
.[
|
||||
aho compiler design
|
||||
.]
|
||||
are a good introduction to the subject.
|
||||
Wulf et. al.
|
||||
.[
|
||||
wulf optimizing compiler
|
||||
.]
|
||||
describe one specific optimizing (Bliss) compiler.
|
||||
Anklam et. al.
|
||||
.[
|
||||
anklam vax-11
|
||||
.]
|
||||
discuss code generation and optimization in
|
||||
compilers for one specific machine (a Vax-11).
|
||||
Kirchgaesner et. al.
|
||||
.[
|
||||
optimizing ada compiler
|
||||
.]
|
||||
present a brief description of many
|
||||
optimizations; the report also contains a lengthy (over 60 pages)
|
||||
bibliography.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The number of articles on optimization is quite impressive.
|
||||
The Lowry and Medlock paper on the Fortran H compiler
|
||||
.[
|
||||
object code optimization Lowry Medlock
|
||||
.]
|
||||
is a classical one.
|
||||
Other papers on global optimization are.
|
||||
.[
|
||||
faiman optimizing pascal
|
||||
.]
|
||||
.[
|
||||
perkins sites
|
||||
.]
|
||||
.[
|
||||
harrison general purpose optimizing
|
||||
.]
|
||||
.[
|
||||
morel partial redundancies
|
||||
.]
|
||||
.[
|
||||
Mintz global optimizer
|
||||
.]
|
||||
Freudenberger
|
||||
.[
|
||||
freudenberger setl optimizer
|
||||
.]
|
||||
describes an optimizer for a Very High Level Language (SETL).
|
||||
The Production-Quality Compiler-Compiler (PQCC) project uses
|
||||
very sophisticated compiler techniques, as described in.
|
||||
.[
|
||||
wulf overview ieee
|
||||
.]
|
||||
.[
|
||||
wulf overview carnegie-mellon
|
||||
.]
|
||||
.[
|
||||
wulf machine-relative
|
||||
.]
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Several Ph.D. theses are dedicated to optimization.
|
||||
Davidson
|
||||
.[
|
||||
davidson simplifying
|
||||
.]
|
||||
outlines a machine-independent peephole optimizer that
|
||||
improves assembly code.
|
||||
Katkus
|
||||
.[
|
||||
katkus
|
||||
.]
|
||||
describes how efficient programs can be obtained at little cost by
|
||||
optimizing only a small part of a program.
|
||||
Photopoulos
|
||||
.[
|
||||
photopoulos mixed code
|
||||
.]
|
||||
discusses the idea of generating interpreted intermediate code as well
|
||||
as assembly code, to obtain programs that are both small and fast.
|
||||
Shaffer
|
||||
.[
|
||||
shaffer automatic
|
||||
.]
|
||||
describes the theory of automatic subroutine generation.
|
||||
.]
|
||||
Leverett
|
||||
.[
|
||||
leverett register allocation compilers
|
||||
.]
|
||||
deals with register allocation in the PQCC compilers.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
References to articles about specific optimization techniques
|
||||
will be given in later chapters.
|
||||
4
doc/ego/ra/.distr
Normal file
4
doc/ego/ra/.distr
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
|
||||
ra1
|
||||
ra2
|
||||
ra3
|
||||
ra4
|
||||
33
doc/ego/ra/ra1
Normal file
33
doc/ego/ra/ra1
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
|
||||
.bp
|
||||
.NH 1
|
||||
Register Allocation
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Introduction
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The efficient usage of the general purpose registers
|
||||
of the target machine plays a key role in any optimizing compiler.
|
||||
This subject, often referred to as \fIRegister Allocation\fR,
|
||||
has great impact on both the code generator and the
|
||||
optimizing part of such a compiler.
|
||||
The code generator needs registers for at least the evaluation of
|
||||
arithmetic expressions;
|
||||
the optimizer uses the registers to decrease the access costs
|
||||
of frequently used entities (such as variables).
|
||||
The design of an optimizing compiler must pay great
|
||||
attention to the cooperation of optimization, register allocation
|
||||
and code generation.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Register allocation has received much attention in literature (see
|
||||
.[
|
||||
leverett register allocation compilers
|
||||
.]
|
||||
.[
|
||||
chaitin register coloring
|
||||
.]
|
||||
.[
|
||||
freiburghouse usage counts
|
||||
.]
|
||||
and
|
||||
.[~[
|
||||
sites register
|
||||
.]]).
|
||||
139
doc/ego/ra/ra2
Normal file
139
doc/ego/ra/ra2
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,139 @@
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Usage of registers in ACK compilers
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
We will first describe the major design decisions
|
||||
of the Amsterdam Compiler Kit,
|
||||
as far as they concern register allocation.
|
||||
Subsequently we will outline
|
||||
the role of the Global Optimizer in the register
|
||||
allocation process and the interface
|
||||
between the code generator and the optimizer.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Usage of registers without the intervention of the Global Optimizer
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Registers are used for two purposes:
|
||||
.IP 1.
|
||||
for the evaluation of arithmetic expressions
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
to hold local variables, for the duration of the procedure they
|
||||
are local to.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
It is essential to note that no translation part of the compilers,
|
||||
except for the code generator, knows anything at all
|
||||
about the register set of the target computer.
|
||||
Hence all decisions about registers are ultimately made by
|
||||
the code generator.
|
||||
Earlier phases of a compiler can only \fIadvise\fR the code generator.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The code generator splits the register set into two:
|
||||
a fixed part for the evaluation of expressions (called \fIscratch\fR
|
||||
registers) and a fixed part to store local variables.
|
||||
This partitioning, which depends only on the target computer, significantly
|
||||
reduces the complexity of register allocation, at the penalty
|
||||
of some loss of code quality.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The code generator has some (machine-dependent) knowledge of the access costs
|
||||
of memory locations and registers and of the costs of saving and
|
||||
restoring registers. (Registers are always saved by the \fIcalled\fR
|
||||
procedure).
|
||||
This knowledge is expressed in a set of procedures for each target machine.
|
||||
The code generator also knows how many registers there are and of
|
||||
which type they are.
|
||||
A register can be of type \fIpointer\fR, \fIfloating point\fR
|
||||
or \fIgeneral\fR.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The front ends of the compilers determine which local variables may
|
||||
be put in a register;
|
||||
such a variable may never be accessed indirectly (i.e. through a pointer).
|
||||
The front end also determines the types and sizes of these variables.
|
||||
The type can be any of the register types or the type \fIloop variable\fR,
|
||||
which denotes a general-typed variable that is used as loop variable
|
||||
in a for-statement.
|
||||
All this information is collected in a \fIregister message\fR in
|
||||
the EM code.
|
||||
Such a message is a pseudo EM instruction.
|
||||
This message also contains a \fIscore\fR field,
|
||||
indicating how desirable it is to put this variable in a register.
|
||||
A front end may assign a high score to a variable if it
|
||||
was declared as a register variable (which is only possible in
|
||||
some languages, such as "C").
|
||||
Any compiler phase before the code generator may change this score field,
|
||||
if it has reason to do so.
|
||||
The code generator bases its decisions on the information contained
|
||||
in the register message, most notably on the score.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
If the global optimizer is not used,
|
||||
the score fields are set by the Peephole Optimizer.
|
||||
This optimizer simply counts the number of occurrences
|
||||
of every local (register) variable and adds this count
|
||||
to the score provided by the front end.
|
||||
In this way a simple, yet quite effective
|
||||
register allocation scheme is achieved.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
The role of the Global Optimizer
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The Global Optimizer essentially tries to improve the scheme
|
||||
outlined above.
|
||||
It uses the following principles for this purpose:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
Entities are not always assigned a register for the duration
|
||||
of an entire procedure; smaller regions of the program text
|
||||
may be considered too.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
several variables may be put in the same register simultaneously,
|
||||
provided at most one of them is live at any point.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
besides local variables, other entities (such as constants and addresses of
|
||||
variables and procedures) may be put in a register.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
more accurate cost estimates are used.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
To perform its task, the optimizer must have some
|
||||
knowledge of the target machine.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
The interface between the register allocator and the code generator
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The RA phase of the optimizer must somehow be able to express its
|
||||
decisions.
|
||||
Such decisions may look like: 'put constant 1283 in a register from
|
||||
line 12 to line 40'.
|
||||
To be precise, RA must be able to tell the code generator to:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
initialize a register with some value
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
update an entity from a register
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
replace all occurrences of an entity in a certain region
|
||||
of text by a reference to the register.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
At least three problems occur here: the code generator is only used to
|
||||
put local variables in registers,
|
||||
it only assigns a register to a variable for the duration of an entire
|
||||
procedure and it is not used to have some earlier compiler phase
|
||||
make all the decisions.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
All problems are solved by one mechanism, that involves no changes
|
||||
to the code generator.
|
||||
With every (non-scratch) register R that will be used in
|
||||
a procedure P, we associate a new variable T, local to P.
|
||||
The size of T is the same as the size of R.
|
||||
A register message is generated for T with an exceptionally high score.
|
||||
The scores of all original register messages are set to zero.
|
||||
Consequently, the code generator will always assign precisely those new
|
||||
variables to a register.
|
||||
If the optimizer wants to put some entity, say the constant 1283, in
|
||||
a register, it emits the code "T := 1283" and replaces all occurrences
|
||||
of '1283' by T.
|
||||
Similarly, it can put the address of a procedure in T and replace all
|
||||
calls to that procedure by indirect calls.
|
||||
Furthermore, it can put several different entities in T (and thus in R)
|
||||
during the lifetime of P.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
In principle, the code generated by the optimizer in this way would
|
||||
always be valid EM code, even if the optimizer would be presented
|
||||
a totally wrong description of the target computer register set.
|
||||
In practice, it would be a waste of data as well as text space to
|
||||
allocate memory for these new variables, as they will always be assigned
|
||||
a register (in the correct order of events).
|
||||
Hence, no memory locations are allocated for them.
|
||||
For this reason they are called pseudo local variables.
|
||||
383
doc/ego/ra/ra3
Normal file
383
doc/ego/ra/ra3
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,383 @@
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
The register allocation phase
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Overview
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The RA phase deals with one procedure at a time.
|
||||
For every procedure, it first determines which entities
|
||||
may be put in a register. Such an entity
|
||||
is called an \fIitem\fR.
|
||||
For every item it decides during which parts of the procedure it
|
||||
might be assigned a register.
|
||||
Such a region is called a \fItimespan\fR.
|
||||
For any item, several (possibly overlapping) timespans may
|
||||
be considered.
|
||||
A pair (item,timespan) is called an \fIallocation\fR.
|
||||
If the items of two allocations are both live at some
|
||||
point of time in the intersections of their timespans,
|
||||
these allocations are said to be \fIrivals\fR of each other,
|
||||
as they cannot be assigned the same register.
|
||||
The rivals-set of every allocation is computed.
|
||||
Next, the gains of assigning a register to an allocation are estimated,
|
||||
for every allocation.
|
||||
With all this information, decisions are made which allocations
|
||||
to store in which registers (\fIpacking\fR).
|
||||
Finally, the EM text is transformed to reflect these decisions.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
The item recognition subphase
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
RA tries to put the following entities in a register:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
a local variable for which a register message was found
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the address of a local variable for which no
|
||||
register message was found
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the address of a global variable
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the address of a procedure
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
a numeric constant.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Only the \fIaddress\fR of a global variable
|
||||
may be put in a register, not the variable itself.
|
||||
This approach avoids the very complex problems that would be
|
||||
caused by procedure calls and indirect pointer references (see
|
||||
.[~[
|
||||
aho design compiler
|
||||
.] sections 14.7 and 14.8]
|
||||
and
|
||||
.[~[
|
||||
spillman side-effects
|
||||
.]]).
|
||||
Still, on most machines accessing a global variable using indirect
|
||||
addressing through a register is much cheaper than
|
||||
accessing it via its address.
|
||||
Similarly, if the address of a procedure is put in a register, the
|
||||
procedure can be called via an indirect call.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
With every item we associate a register type.
|
||||
This type is
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
for local variables: the type contained in the register message
|
||||
for addresses of variables and procedures: the pointer type
|
||||
for constants: the general type
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
An entity other than a local variable is not taken to be an item
|
||||
if it is used only once within the current procedure.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
An item is said to be \fIlive\fR at some point of the program text
|
||||
if its value may be used before it is changed.
|
||||
As addresses and constants are never changed, all items but local
|
||||
variables are always live.
|
||||
The region of text during which a local variable is live is
|
||||
determined via the live/dead messages generated by the
|
||||
Live Variable analysis phase of the Global Optimizer.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
The allocation determination subphase
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
If a procedure has more items than registers,
|
||||
it may be advantageous to put an item in a register
|
||||
only during those parts of the procedure where it is most
|
||||
heavily used.
|
||||
Such a part will be called a timespan.
|
||||
With every item we may associate a set of timespans.
|
||||
If two timespans of an item overlap,
|
||||
at most one of them may be granted a register,
|
||||
as there is no use in putting the same item in two
|
||||
registers simultaneously.
|
||||
If two timespans of an item are distinct,
|
||||
both may be chosen;
|
||||
the item will possibly be put in two
|
||||
different registers during different parts of the procedure.
|
||||
The timespan may also consist
|
||||
of the whole procedure.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A list of (item,timespan) pairs (allocations)
|
||||
is build, which will be the input to the decision making
|
||||
subphase of RA (packing subphase).
|
||||
This allocation list is the main data structure of RA.
|
||||
The description of the remainder of RA will be in terms
|
||||
of allocations rather than items.
|
||||
The phrase "to assign a register to an allocation" means "to assign
|
||||
a register to the item of the allocation for the duration of
|
||||
the timespan of the allocation".
|
||||
Subsequent subphases will add more information
|
||||
to this list.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Several factors must be taken into account when a
|
||||
timespan for an item is constructed:
|
||||
.IP 1.
|
||||
At any \fIentry point\fR of the timespan where the
|
||||
item is live,
|
||||
the register must be initialized with the item
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
At any exit point of the timespan where the item is live,
|
||||
the item must be updated.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
In order to decrease these costs, we will only consider timespans with
|
||||
one entry point
|
||||
and no live exit points.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
The rivals computation subphase
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
As stated before, several different items may be put in the
|
||||
same register, provided they are not live simultaneously.
|
||||
For every allocation we determine the intersection
|
||||
of its timespan and the lifetime of its item (i.e. the part of the
|
||||
procedure during which the item is live).
|
||||
The allocation is said to be busy during this intersection.
|
||||
If two allocations are ever busy simultaneously they are
|
||||
said to be rivals of each other.
|
||||
The rivals information is added to the allocation list.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
The profits computation subphase
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
To make good decisions, the packing subphase needs to
|
||||
know which allocations can be assigned the same register
|
||||
(rivals information) and how much is gained by
|
||||
granting an allocation a register.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Besides the gains of using a register instead of an
|
||||
item,
|
||||
two kinds of overhead costs must be
|
||||
taken into account:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the register must be initialized with the item
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the register must be saved at procedure entry
|
||||
and restored at procedure exit.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The latter costs should not be due to a single
|
||||
allocation, as several allocations can be assigned the same register.
|
||||
These costs are dealt with after packing has been done.
|
||||
They do not influence the decisions of the packing algorithm,
|
||||
they may only undo them.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The actual profits consist of improvements
|
||||
of execution time and code size.
|
||||
As the former is far more difficult to estimate , we will
|
||||
discuss code size improvements first.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The gains of putting a certain item in a register
|
||||
depends on how the item is used.
|
||||
Suppose the item is
|
||||
a pointer variable.
|
||||
On machines that do not have a
|
||||
double-indirect addressing mode,
|
||||
two instructions are needed to dereference the variable
|
||||
if it is not in a register, but only one if it is put in a register.
|
||||
If the variable is not dereferenced, but simply copied, one instruction
|
||||
may be sufficient in both cases.
|
||||
So the gains of putting a pointer variable in a register are higher
|
||||
if the variable is dereferenced often.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
To make accurate estimates, detailed knowledge of
|
||||
the target machine and of the code generator
|
||||
would be needed.
|
||||
Therefore, a simplification has been made that substantially limits
|
||||
the amount of target machine information that is needed.
|
||||
The estimation of the number of bytes saved does
|
||||
not take into account how an item is used.
|
||||
Rather, an average number is used.
|
||||
So these gains are computed as follows:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
#bytes_saved = #occurrences * gains_per_occurrence
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
The number of occurrences is derived from
|
||||
the EM code.
|
||||
Note that this is not exact either,
|
||||
as there is no one-to-one correspondence between occurrences in
|
||||
the EM code and in the assembler code.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The gains of one occurrence depend on:
|
||||
.IP 1.
|
||||
the type of the item
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
the size of the item
|
||||
.IP 3.
|
||||
the type of the register
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
and for local variables and addresses of local variables:
|
||||
.IP 4.
|
||||
the type of the local variable
|
||||
.IP 5.
|
||||
the offset of the variable in the stackframe
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
For every allocation we try two types of registers: the register type
|
||||
of the item and the general register type.
|
||||
Only the type with the highest profits will subsequently be used.
|
||||
This type is added to the allocation information.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
To compute the gains, RA uses a machine-dependent table
|
||||
that is read from a machine descriptor file.
|
||||
By means of this table the number of bytes saved can be computed
|
||||
as a function of the five properties.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The costs of initializing a register with an item
|
||||
is determined in a similar way.
|
||||
The cost of one initialization is also
|
||||
obtained from the descriptor file.
|
||||
Note that there can be at most one initialization for any
|
||||
allocation.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
To summarize, the number of bytes a certain allocation would
|
||||
save is computed as follows:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
net_bytes_saved = bytes_saved - init_cost
|
||||
bytes_saved = #occurrences * gains_per_occ
|
||||
init_cost = #initializations * costs_per_init
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
It is inherently more difficult to estimate the execution
|
||||
time saved by putting an item in a register,
|
||||
because it is impossible to predict how
|
||||
many times an item will be used dynamically.
|
||||
If an occurrence is part of a loop,
|
||||
it may be executed many times.
|
||||
If it is part of a conditional statement,
|
||||
it may never be executed at all.
|
||||
In the latter case, the speed of the program may even get
|
||||
worse if an initialization is needed.
|
||||
As a clear example, consider the piece of "C" code in Fig. 13.1.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
switch(expr) {
|
||||
case 1: p(); break;
|
||||
case 2: p(); p(); break;
|
||||
case 3: p(); break;
|
||||
default: break;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 13.1 A "C" switch statement
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
Lots of bytes may be saved by putting the address of procedure p
|
||||
in a register, as p is called four times (statically).
|
||||
Dynamically, p will be called zero, one or two times,
|
||||
depending on the value of the expression.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The optimizer uses the following strategy for optimizing
|
||||
execution time:
|
||||
.IP 1.
|
||||
try to put items in registers during \fIloops\fR first
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
always keep the initializing code outside the loop
|
||||
.IP 3.
|
||||
if an item is not used in a loop, do not put it in a register if
|
||||
the initialization costs may be higher than the gains
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The latter condition can be checked by determining the
|
||||
minimal number of usages (dynamically) of the item during the procedure,
|
||||
via a shortest path algorithm.
|
||||
In the example above, this minimal number is zero, so the address of
|
||||
p is not put in a register.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The costs of one occurrence is estimated as described above for the
|
||||
code size.
|
||||
The number of dynamic occurrences is guessed by looking at the
|
||||
loop nesting level of every occurrence.
|
||||
If the item is never used in a loop,
|
||||
the minimal number of occurrences is used.
|
||||
From these facts, the execution time improvement is assessed
|
||||
for every allocation.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
The packing subphase
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The packing subphase takes as input the allocation
|
||||
list and outputs a
|
||||
description of which allocations should be put
|
||||
in which registers.
|
||||
So it is essentially the decision making part of RA.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The packing system tries to assign a register to allocations one
|
||||
at a time, in some yet to be defined order.
|
||||
For every allocation A, it first checks if there is a register
|
||||
(of the right type)
|
||||
that is already assigned to one or more allocations,
|
||||
none of which are rivals of A.
|
||||
In this case A is assigned the same register.
|
||||
Else, A is assigned a new register, if one exists.
|
||||
A table containing the number of free registers for every type
|
||||
is maintained.
|
||||
It is initialized with the number of non-scratch registers of
|
||||
the target computer and updated whenever a
|
||||
new register is handed out.
|
||||
The packing algorithm stops when no more allocations can
|
||||
or need be assigned a register.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
After an allocation A has been packed,
|
||||
all allocations with non-disjunct timespans (including
|
||||
A itself) are removed from the allocation list.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
In case the number of items exceeds the number of registers, it
|
||||
is important to choose the most profitable allocations.
|
||||
Due to the possibility of having several allocations
|
||||
occupying the same register,
|
||||
this problem is quite complex.
|
||||
Our packing algorithm uses simple heuristic rules
|
||||
and avoids any combinatorial search.
|
||||
It has distinct rules for different costs measures.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
If object code size is the most important factor,
|
||||
the algorithm is greedy and chooses allocations in
|
||||
decreasing order of their profits attribute.
|
||||
It does not take into account the fact that
|
||||
other allocations may be passed over because of
|
||||
this decision.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
If execution time is at prime stake, the algorithm
|
||||
first considers allocations whose timespans consist of loops.
|
||||
After all these have been packed, it considers the remaining
|
||||
allocations.
|
||||
Within the two subclasses, it considers allocations
|
||||
with the highest profits first.
|
||||
When assigning a register to an allocation with a loop
|
||||
as timespan, the algorithm checks if the item has
|
||||
already been put in a register during another loop.
|
||||
If so, it tries to use the same register for the
|
||||
new allocation.
|
||||
After all packing has been done,
|
||||
it checks if the item has always been assigned the same
|
||||
register (although not necessarily during all loops).
|
||||
If so, it tries to put the item in that register during
|
||||
the entire procedure. This is possible
|
||||
if the allocation (item,whole_procedure) is not a rival
|
||||
of any allocation with a different item that has been
|
||||
assigned to the same register.
|
||||
Note that this approach is essentially 'bottom up',
|
||||
as registers are first assigned over small regions
|
||||
of text which are later collapsed into larger regions.
|
||||
The advantage of this approach is the fact that
|
||||
the decisions for one loop can be made independently
|
||||
of all other loops.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
After the entire packing process has been completed,
|
||||
we compute for each register how much is gained in using
|
||||
this register, by simply adding the net profits
|
||||
of all allocations assigned to it.
|
||||
This total yield should outweigh the costs of
|
||||
saving/restoring the register at procedure entry/exit.
|
||||
As most modern processors (e.g. 68000, Vax) have special
|
||||
instructions to save/restore several registers,
|
||||
the differential costs of saving one extra register are by
|
||||
no means constant.
|
||||
The costs are read from the machine descriptor file and
|
||||
compared to the total yields of the registers.
|
||||
As a consequence of this analysis, some allocations
|
||||
may have their registers taken away.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
The transformation subphase
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The final subphase of RA transforms the EM text according to the
|
||||
decisions made by the packing system.
|
||||
It traverses the text of the currently optimized procedure and
|
||||
changes all occurrences of items at points where
|
||||
they are assigned a register.
|
||||
It also clears the score field of the register messages for
|
||||
normal local variables and emits register messages with a very
|
||||
high score for the pseudo locals.
|
||||
At points where registers have to be initialized with items,
|
||||
it generates EM code to do so.
|
||||
Finally it tries to decrease the size of the stackframe
|
||||
of the procedure by looking at which local variables need not
|
||||
be given memory locations.
|
||||
28
doc/ego/ra/ra4
Normal file
28
doc/ego/ra/ra4
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Source files of RA
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The sources of RA are in the following files and packages:
|
||||
.IP ra.h: 14
|
||||
declarations of global variables and data structures
|
||||
.IP ra.c:
|
||||
the routine main; initialization of target machine-dependent tables
|
||||
.IP items:
|
||||
a routine to build the list of items of one procedure;
|
||||
routines to manipulate items
|
||||
.IP lifetime:
|
||||
contains a subroutine that determines when items are live/dead
|
||||
.IP alloclist:
|
||||
contains subroutines that build the initial allocations list
|
||||
and that compute the rivals sets.
|
||||
.IP profits:
|
||||
contains a subroutine that computes the profits of the allocations
|
||||
and a routine that determines the costs of saving/restoring registers
|
||||
.IP pack:
|
||||
contains the packing subphase
|
||||
.IP xform:
|
||||
contains the transformation subphase
|
||||
.IP interval:
|
||||
contains routines to manipulate intervals of time
|
||||
.IP aux:
|
||||
contains auxiliary routines
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
120
doc/ego/refs.gen
Normal file
120
doc/ego/refs.gen
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
|
||||
%T A Practical Toolkit for Making Portable Compilers
|
||||
%A A.S. Tanenbaum
|
||||
%A H. van Staveren
|
||||
%A E.G. Keizer
|
||||
%A J.W. Stevenson
|
||||
%I Vrije Universiteit, Amsterdam
|
||||
%R Rapport nr IR-74
|
||||
%D October 1981
|
||||
|
||||
%T A Practical Toolkit for Making Portable Compilers
|
||||
%A A.S. Tanenbaum
|
||||
%A H. van Staveren
|
||||
%A E.G. Keizer
|
||||
%A J.W. Stevenson
|
||||
%J CACM
|
||||
%V 26
|
||||
%N 9
|
||||
%P 654-660
|
||||
%D September 1983
|
||||
|
||||
%T A Unix Toolkit for Making Portable Compilers
|
||||
%A A.S. Tanenbaum
|
||||
%A H. van Staveren
|
||||
%A E.G. Keizer
|
||||
%A J.W. Stevenson
|
||||
%J Proceedings USENIX conf.
|
||||
%C Toronto, Canada
|
||||
%V 26
|
||||
%D July 1983
|
||||
%P 255-261
|
||||
|
||||
%T Using Peephole Optimization on Intermediate Code
|
||||
%A A.S. Tanenbaum
|
||||
%A H. van Staveren
|
||||
%A J.W. Stevenson
|
||||
%J TOPLAS
|
||||
%V 4
|
||||
%N 1
|
||||
%P 21-36
|
||||
%D January 1982
|
||||
|
||||
%T Language- and Machine-independent Global Optimization on Intermediate Code
|
||||
%A H.E. Bal
|
||||
%A A.S. Tanenbaum
|
||||
%J Computer Languages
|
||||
%V 11
|
||||
%N 2
|
||||
%P 105-121
|
||||
%D April 1986
|
||||
|
||||
%T Description of a machine architecture for use with
|
||||
block structured languages
|
||||
%A A.S. Tanenbaum
|
||||
%A H. van Staveren
|
||||
%A E.G. Keizer
|
||||
%A J.W. Stevenson
|
||||
%I Vrije Universiteit, Amsterdam
|
||||
%R Rapport nr IR-81
|
||||
%D August 1983
|
||||
|
||||
%T Amsterdam Compiler Kit documentation
|
||||
%A A.S. Tanenbaum et. al.
|
||||
%I Vrije Universiteit, Amsterdam
|
||||
%R Rapport nr IR-90
|
||||
%D June 1984
|
||||
|
||||
%T The C Programming Language - Reference Manual
|
||||
%A D.M. Ritchie
|
||||
%I Bell Laboratories
|
||||
%C Murray Hill, New Jersey
|
||||
%D 1978
|
||||
|
||||
%T Unix programmer's manual, Seventh Edition
|
||||
%A B.W. Kernighan
|
||||
%A M.D. McIlroy
|
||||
%I Bell Laboratories
|
||||
%C Murray Hill, New Jersey
|
||||
%V 1
|
||||
%D January 1979
|
||||
|
||||
%T A Tour Through the Portable C Compiler
|
||||
%A S.C. Johnson
|
||||
%I Bell Laboratories
|
||||
%B Unix programmer's manual, Seventh Edition
|
||||
%C Murray Hill, New Jersey
|
||||
%D January 1979
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
%T Ada Programming Language - MILITARY STANDARD
|
||||
%A J.D. Ichbiah
|
||||
%I U.S. Department of Defense
|
||||
%R ANSI/MIL-STD-1815A
|
||||
%D 22 January 1983
|
||||
|
||||
%T Rationale for the Design of the Ada Programming Language
|
||||
%A J.D. Ichbiah
|
||||
%J SIGPLAN Notices
|
||||
%V 14
|
||||
%N 6
|
||||
%D June 1979
|
||||
|
||||
%T The Programming Languages LISP and TRAC
|
||||
%A W.L. van der Poel
|
||||
%I Technische Hogeschool Delft
|
||||
%C Delft
|
||||
%D 1972
|
||||
|
||||
%T Compiler construction
|
||||
%A W.M. Waite
|
||||
%A G. Goos
|
||||
%I Springer-Verlag
|
||||
%C New York
|
||||
%D 1984
|
||||
|
||||
%T The C Programming Language
|
||||
%A B.W. Kernighan
|
||||
%A D.M. Ritchie
|
||||
%I Prentice-Hall, Inc
|
||||
%C Englewood Cliffs,NJ
|
||||
%D 1978
|
||||
546
doc/ego/refs.opt
Normal file
546
doc/ego/refs.opt
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,546 @@
|
||||
%T Principles of compiler design
|
||||
%A A.V. Aho
|
||||
%A J.D. Ullman
|
||||
%I Addison-Wesley
|
||||
%C Reading, Massachusetts
|
||||
%D 1978
|
||||
|
||||
%T The Design and Analysis of Computer Algorithms
|
||||
%A A.V. Aho
|
||||
%A J.E. Hopcroft
|
||||
%A J.D. Ullman
|
||||
%I Addison-Wesley
|
||||
%C Reading, Massachusetts
|
||||
%D 1974
|
||||
|
||||
%T Code generation in a machine-independent compiler
|
||||
%A R.G.G. Cattell
|
||||
%A J.M. Newcomer
|
||||
%A B.W. Leverett
|
||||
%J SIGPLAN Notices
|
||||
%V 14
|
||||
%N 8
|
||||
%P 65-75
|
||||
%D August 1979
|
||||
|
||||
%T An algorithm for Reduction of Operator Strength
|
||||
%A J. Cocke
|
||||
%A K. Kennedy
|
||||
%J CACM
|
||||
%V 20
|
||||
%N 11
|
||||
%P 850-856
|
||||
%D November 1977
|
||||
|
||||
%T Reduction of Operator Strength
|
||||
%A F.E. Allen
|
||||
%A J. Cocke
|
||||
%A K. Kennedy
|
||||
%B Program Flow Analysis
|
||||
%E S.S. Muchnick and D. Jones
|
||||
%I Prentice-Hall
|
||||
%C Englewood Cliffs, N.J.
|
||||
%D 1981
|
||||
|
||||
%T Simplifying Code Generation Through Peephole Optimization
|
||||
%A J.W. Davidson
|
||||
%R Ph.D. thesis
|
||||
%I Dept. of Computer Science
|
||||
%C Univ. of Arizona
|
||||
%D December 1981
|
||||
|
||||
%T A study of selective optimization techniques
|
||||
%A G.R. Katkus
|
||||
%R Ph.D. Thesis
|
||||
%C University of Southern California
|
||||
%D 1973
|
||||
|
||||
%T Automatic subroutine generation in an optimizing compiler
|
||||
%A J.B. Shaffer
|
||||
%R Ph.D. Thesis
|
||||
%C University of Maryland
|
||||
%D 1978
|
||||
|
||||
%T Optimal mixed code generation for microcomputers
|
||||
%A D.S. Photopoulos
|
||||
%R Ph.D. Thesis
|
||||
%C Northeastern University
|
||||
%D 1981
|
||||
|
||||
%T The Design of an Optimizing Compiler
|
||||
%A W.A. Wulf
|
||||
%A R.K. Johnsson
|
||||
%A C.B. Weinstock
|
||||
%A S.O. Hobbs
|
||||
%A C.M. Geschke
|
||||
%I American Elsevier Publishing Company
|
||||
%C New York
|
||||
%D 1975
|
||||
|
||||
%T Retargetable Compiler Code Generation
|
||||
%A M. Ganapathi
|
||||
%A C.N. Fischer
|
||||
%A J.L. Hennessy
|
||||
%J ACM Computing Surveys
|
||||
%V 14
|
||||
%N 4
|
||||
%P 573-592
|
||||
%D December 1982
|
||||
|
||||
%T An Optimizing Pascal Compiler
|
||||
%A R.N. Faiman
|
||||
%A A.A. Kortesoja
|
||||
%J IEEE Trans. on Softw. Eng.
|
||||
%V 6
|
||||
%N 6
|
||||
%P 512-518
|
||||
%D November 1980
|
||||
|
||||
%T Experience with the SETL Optimizer
|
||||
%A S.M. Freudenberger
|
||||
%A J.T. Schwartz
|
||||
%J TOPLAS
|
||||
%V 5
|
||||
%N 1
|
||||
%P 26-45
|
||||
%D Januari 1983
|
||||
|
||||
%T An Optimizing Ada Compiler
|
||||
%A W. Kirchgaesner
|
||||
%A J. Uhl
|
||||
%A G. Winterstein
|
||||
%A G. Goos
|
||||
%A M. Dausmann
|
||||
%A S. Drossopoulou
|
||||
%I Institut fur Informatik II, Universitat Karlsruhe
|
||||
%D February 1983
|
||||
|
||||
%T A Fast Algorithm for Finding Dominators
|
||||
in a Flowgraph
|
||||
%A T. Lengauer
|
||||
%A R.E. Tarjan
|
||||
%J TOPLAS
|
||||
%V 1
|
||||
%N 1
|
||||
%P 121-141
|
||||
%D July 1979
|
||||
|
||||
%T Optimization of hierarchical directed graphs
|
||||
%A M.T. Lepage
|
||||
%A D.T. Barnard
|
||||
%A A. Rudmik
|
||||
%J Computer Languages
|
||||
%V 6
|
||||
%N 1
|
||||
%P 19-34
|
||||
%D Januari 1981
|
||||
|
||||
%T Object Code Optimization
|
||||
%A E.S. Lowry
|
||||
%A C.W. Medlock
|
||||
%J CACM
|
||||
%V 12
|
||||
%N 1
|
||||
%P 13-22
|
||||
%D Januari 1969
|
||||
|
||||
%T Automatic Program Improvement:
|
||||
Variable Usage Transformations
|
||||
%A B. Maher
|
||||
%A D.H. Sleeman
|
||||
%J TOPLAS
|
||||
%V 5
|
||||
%N 2
|
||||
%P 236-264
|
||||
%D April 1983
|
||||
|
||||
%T The design of a global optimizer
|
||||
%A R.J. Mintz
|
||||
%A G.A. Fisher
|
||||
%A M. Sharir
|
||||
%J SIGPLAN Notices
|
||||
%V 14
|
||||
%N 9
|
||||
%P 226-234
|
||||
%D September 1979
|
||||
|
||||
%T Global Optimization by Suppression of Partial Redundancies
|
||||
%A E. Morel
|
||||
%A C. Renvoise
|
||||
%J CACM
|
||||
%V 22
|
||||
%N 2
|
||||
%P 96-103
|
||||
%D February 1979
|
||||
|
||||
%T Efficient Computation of Expressions with Common Subexpressions
|
||||
%A B. Prabhala
|
||||
%A R. Sethi
|
||||
%J JACM
|
||||
%V 27
|
||||
%N 1
|
||||
%P 146-163
|
||||
%D Januari 1980
|
||||
|
||||
%T An Analysis of Inline Substitution for a Structured
|
||||
Programming Language
|
||||
%A R.W. Scheifler
|
||||
%J CACM
|
||||
%V 20
|
||||
%N 9
|
||||
%P 647-654
|
||||
%D September 1977
|
||||
|
||||
%T Immediate Predominators in a Directed Graph
|
||||
%A P.W. Purdom
|
||||
%A E.F. Moore
|
||||
%J CACM
|
||||
%V 15
|
||||
%N 8
|
||||
%P 777-778
|
||||
%D August 1972
|
||||
|
||||
%T The Generation of Optimal Code for Arithmetic Expressions
|
||||
%A R. Sethi
|
||||
%A J.D. Ullman
|
||||
%J JACM
|
||||
%V 17
|
||||
%N 4
|
||||
%P 715-728
|
||||
%D October 1970
|
||||
|
||||
%T Exposing side-effects in a PL/I optimizing compiler
|
||||
%A T.C. Spillman
|
||||
%B Information Processing 1971
|
||||
%I North-Holland Publishing Company
|
||||
%C Amsterdam
|
||||
%P 376-381
|
||||
%D 1971
|
||||
|
||||
%T Inner Loops in Flowgraphs and Code Optimization
|
||||
%A S. Vasudevan
|
||||
%J Acta Informatica
|
||||
%N 17
|
||||
%P 143-155
|
||||
%D 1982
|
||||
|
||||
%T A New Strategy for Code Generation - the General-Purpose
|
||||
Optimizing Compiler
|
||||
%A W.H. Harrison
|
||||
%J IEEE Trans. on Softw. Eng.
|
||||
%V 5
|
||||
%N 4
|
||||
%P 367-373
|
||||
%D July 1979
|
||||
|
||||
%T PQCC: A Machine-Relative Compiler Technology
|
||||
%A W.M. Wulf
|
||||
%R CMU-CS-80-144
|
||||
%I Carnegie-Mellon University
|
||||
%C Pittsburgh
|
||||
%D 25 september 1980
|
||||
|
||||
%T Machine-independent Pascal code optimization
|
||||
%A D.R. Perkins
|
||||
%A R.L. Sites
|
||||
%J SIGPLAN Notices
|
||||
%V 14
|
||||
%N 8
|
||||
%P 201-207
|
||||
%D August 1979
|
||||
|
||||
%T A Case Study of a New Code Generation Technique for Compilers
|
||||
%A J.L. Carter
|
||||
%J CACM
|
||||
%V 20
|
||||
%N 12
|
||||
%P 914-920
|
||||
%D December 1977
|
||||
|
||||
%T Table-driven Code Generation
|
||||
%A S.L. Graham
|
||||
%J IEEE Computer
|
||||
%V 13
|
||||
%N 8
|
||||
%P 25-33
|
||||
%D August 1980
|
||||
|
||||
%T Register Allocation in Optimizing Compilers
|
||||
%A B.W. Leverett
|
||||
%R Ph.D. Thesis, CMU-CS-81-103
|
||||
%I Carnegie-Mellon University
|
||||
%C Pittsburgh
|
||||
%D February 1981
|
||||
|
||||
%T Register Allocation via Coloring
|
||||
%A G.J. Chaitin
|
||||
%A M.A. Auslander
|
||||
%A A.K. Chandra
|
||||
%A J. Cocke
|
||||
%A M.E. Hopkins
|
||||
%A P.W. Markstein
|
||||
%J Computer Languages
|
||||
%V 6
|
||||
%N 1
|
||||
%P 47-57
|
||||
%D January 1981
|
||||
|
||||
%T How to Call Procedures, or Second Thoughts on
|
||||
Ackermann's Function
|
||||
%A B.A. Wichmann
|
||||
%J Software - Practice and Experience
|
||||
%V 7
|
||||
%P 317-329
|
||||
%D 1977
|
||||
|
||||
%T Register Allocation Via Usage Counts
|
||||
%A R.A. Freiburghouse
|
||||
%J CACM
|
||||
%V 17
|
||||
%N 11
|
||||
%P 638-642
|
||||
%D November 1974
|
||||
|
||||
%T Machine-independent register allocation
|
||||
%A R.L. Sites
|
||||
%J SIGPLAN Notices
|
||||
%V 14
|
||||
%N 8
|
||||
%P 221-225
|
||||
%D August 1979
|
||||
|
||||
%T An Overview of the Production-Quality Compiler-Compiler Project
|
||||
%A B.W. Leverett
|
||||
%A R.G.G Cattell
|
||||
%A S.O. Hobbs
|
||||
%A J.M. Newcomer
|
||||
%A A.H. Reiner
|
||||
%A B.R. Schatz
|
||||
%A W.A. Wulf
|
||||
%J IEEE Computer
|
||||
%V 13
|
||||
%N 8
|
||||
%P 38-49
|
||||
%D August 1980
|
||||
|
||||
%T An Overview of the Production-Quality Compiler-Compiler Project
|
||||
%A B.W. Leverett
|
||||
%A R.G.G Cattell
|
||||
%A S.O. Hobbs
|
||||
%A J.M. Newcomer
|
||||
%A A.H. Reiner
|
||||
%A B.R. Schatz
|
||||
%A W.A. Wulf
|
||||
%R CMU-CS-79-105
|
||||
%I Carnegie-Mellon University
|
||||
%C Pittsburgh
|
||||
%D 1979
|
||||
|
||||
%T Topics in Code Generation and Register Allocation
|
||||
%A B.W. Leverett
|
||||
%R CMU-CS-82-130
|
||||
%I Carnegie-Mellon University
|
||||
%C Pittsburgh
|
||||
%D 28 July 1982
|
||||
|
||||
%T Predicting the Effects of Optimization on a Procedure Body
|
||||
%A J.E. Ball
|
||||
%J SIGPLAN Notices
|
||||
%V 14
|
||||
%N 8
|
||||
%P 214-220
|
||||
%D August 1979
|
||||
|
||||
%T The C Language Calling Sequence
|
||||
%A S.C. Johnson
|
||||
%A D.M. Ritchie
|
||||
%I Bell Laboratories
|
||||
%C Murray Hill, New Jersey
|
||||
%D September 1981
|
||||
|
||||
%T A Generalization of Two Code Ordering Optimizations
|
||||
%A C.W. Fraser
|
||||
%R TR 82-11
|
||||
%I Department of Computer Science
|
||||
%C The University of Arizona, Tucson
|
||||
%D October 1982
|
||||
|
||||
%T A Survey of Data Flow Analysis Techniques
|
||||
%A K. Kennedy
|
||||
%B Program Flow Analysis
|
||||
%E S.S. Muchnick and D. Jones
|
||||
%I Prentice-Hall
|
||||
%C Englewood Cliffs
|
||||
%D 1981
|
||||
|
||||
%T Delayed Binding in PQCC Generated Compilers
|
||||
%A W.A. Wulf
|
||||
%A K.V. Nori
|
||||
%R CMU-CS-82-138
|
||||
%I Carnegie-Mellon University
|
||||
%C Pittsburgh
|
||||
%D 1982
|
||||
|
||||
%T Interprocedural Data Flow Analysis in the presence
|
||||
of Pointers, Procedure Variables, and Label Variables
|
||||
%A W.E. Weihl
|
||||
%J Conf. Rec. of the 7th ACM Symp. on Principles of
|
||||
Programming Languages
|
||||
%C Las Vegas, Nevada
|
||||
%P 83-94
|
||||
%D 1980
|
||||
|
||||
%T Low-Cost, High-Yield Code Optimization
|
||||
%A D.R. Hanson
|
||||
%R TR 82-17
|
||||
%I Department of Computer Science
|
||||
%C The University of Arizona, Tucson
|
||||
%D November 1982
|
||||
|
||||
%T Program Flow Analysis
|
||||
%E S.S. Muchnick and D. Jones
|
||||
%I Prentice-Hall
|
||||
%C Englewood Cliffs
|
||||
%D 1981
|
||||
|
||||
%T A machine independent algorithm for code generation and its
|
||||
use in retargetable compilers
|
||||
%A R. Glanville
|
||||
%R Ph.D. thesis
|
||||
%C University of California, Berkeley
|
||||
%D December 1977
|
||||
|
||||
%T A formal framework for the derivation of machine-specific optimizers
|
||||
%A R. Giegerich
|
||||
%J TOPLAS
|
||||
%V 5
|
||||
%N 3
|
||||
%P 478-498
|
||||
%D July 1983
|
||||
|
||||
%T Engineering a compiler: Vax-11 code generation and optimization
|
||||
%A P. Anklam
|
||||
%A D. Cutler
|
||||
%A R. Heinen
|
||||
%A M. MacLaren
|
||||
%I Digital Equipment Corporation
|
||||
%D 1982
|
||||
|
||||
%T Analyzing exotic instructions for a retargetable code generator
|
||||
%A T.M. Morgan
|
||||
%A L.A. Rowe
|
||||
%J SIGPLAN Notices
|
||||
%V 17
|
||||
%N 6
|
||||
%P 197-204
|
||||
%D June 1982
|
||||
|
||||
%T TCOLAda and the Middle End of the PQCC Ada Compiler
|
||||
%A B.M. Brosgol
|
||||
%J SIGPLAN Notices
|
||||
%V 15
|
||||
%N 11
|
||||
%P 101-112
|
||||
%D November 1980
|
||||
|
||||
%T Implementation Implications of Ada Generics
|
||||
%A G. Bray
|
||||
%J Ada Letters
|
||||
%V III
|
||||
%N 2
|
||||
%P 62-71
|
||||
%D September 1983
|
||||
|
||||
%T Attributed Linear Intermediate Representations for Retargetable
|
||||
Code Generators
|
||||
%A M. Ganapathi
|
||||
%A C.N. Fischer
|
||||
%J Software-Practice and Experience
|
||||
%V 14
|
||||
%N 4
|
||||
%P 347-364
|
||||
%D April 1984
|
||||
|
||||
%T UNCOL: The myth and the fact
|
||||
%A T.B. Steel
|
||||
%J Annu. Rev. Autom. Program.
|
||||
%V 2
|
||||
%D 1960
|
||||
%P 325-344
|
||||
|
||||
%T Experience with a Graham-Glanville Style Code Generator
|
||||
%A P. Aigrain
|
||||
%A S.L. Graham
|
||||
%A R.R. Henry
|
||||
%A M.K. McKusick
|
||||
%A E.P. Llopart
|
||||
%J SIGPLAN Notices
|
||||
%V 19
|
||||
%N 6
|
||||
%D June 1984
|
||||
%P 13-24
|
||||
|
||||
%T Using Dynamic Programming to generate Optimized Code in a
|
||||
Graham-Glanville Style Code Generator
|
||||
%A T.W. Christopher
|
||||
%A P.J. Hatcher
|
||||
%A R.C. Kukuk
|
||||
%J SIGPLAN Notices
|
||||
%V 19
|
||||
%N 6
|
||||
%D June 1984
|
||||
%P 25-36
|
||||
|
||||
%T Peep - An Architectural Description Driven Peephole Optimizer
|
||||
%A R.R. Kessler
|
||||
%J SIGPLAN Notices
|
||||
%V 19
|
||||
%N 6
|
||||
%D June 1984
|
||||
%P 106-110
|
||||
|
||||
%T Automatic Generation of Peephole Optimizations
|
||||
%A J.W. Davidson
|
||||
%A C.W. Fraser
|
||||
%J SIGPLAN Notices
|
||||
%V 19
|
||||
%N 6
|
||||
%D June 1984
|
||||
%P 111-116
|
||||
|
||||
%T Analysing and Compressing Assembly Code
|
||||
%A C.W. Fraser
|
||||
%A E.W. Myers
|
||||
%A A.L. Wendt
|
||||
%J SIGPLAN Notices
|
||||
%V 19
|
||||
%N 6
|
||||
%D June 1984
|
||||
%P 117-121
|
||||
|
||||
%T Register Allocation by Priority-based Coloring
|
||||
%A F. Chow
|
||||
%A J. Hennessy
|
||||
%J SIGPLAN Notices
|
||||
%V 19
|
||||
%N 6
|
||||
%D June 1984
|
||||
%P 222-232
|
||||
%V 19
|
||||
%N 6
|
||||
%D June 1984
|
||||
%P 117-121
|
||||
|
||||
%T Code Selection through Object Code Optimization
|
||||
%A J.W. Davidson
|
||||
%A C.W. Fraser
|
||||
%I Dept. of Computer Science
|
||||
%C Univ. of Arizona
|
||||
%D November 1981
|
||||
|
||||
%T A Portable Machine-Independent Global Optimizer - Design
|
||||
and Measurements
|
||||
%A F.C. Chow
|
||||
%I Computer Systems Laboratory
|
||||
%C Stanford University
|
||||
%D December 1983
|
||||
29
doc/ego/refs.stat
Normal file
29
doc/ego/refs.stat
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
|
||||
%T An analysis of Pascal Programs
|
||||
%A L.R. Carter
|
||||
%I UMI Research Press
|
||||
%C Ann Arbor, Michigan
|
||||
%D 1982
|
||||
|
||||
%T An Emperical Study of FORTRAN Programs
|
||||
%A D.E. Knuth
|
||||
%J Software - Practice and Experience
|
||||
%V 1
|
||||
%P 105-133
|
||||
%D 1971
|
||||
|
||||
%T F77 Performance
|
||||
%A D.A. Mosher
|
||||
%A R.P. Corbett
|
||||
%J ;login:
|
||||
%V 7
|
||||
%N 3
|
||||
%D June 1982
|
||||
|
||||
%T Ada Language Statistics for the iMAX 432 Operating System
|
||||
%A S.F. Zeigler
|
||||
%A R.P. Weicker
|
||||
%J Ada LETTERS
|
||||
%V 2
|
||||
%N 6
|
||||
%P 63-67
|
||||
%D May 1983
|
||||
1
doc/ego/sp/.distr
Normal file
1
doc/ego/sp/.distr
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1 @@
|
||||
sp1
|
||||
171
doc/ego/sp/sp1
Normal file
171
doc/ego/sp/sp1
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,171 @@
|
||||
.bp
|
||||
.NH 1
|
||||
Stack pollution
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Introduction
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The "Stack Pollution" optimization technique (SP) decreases the costs
|
||||
(time as well as space) of procedure calls.
|
||||
In the EM calling sequence, the actual parameters are popped from
|
||||
the stack by the \fIcalling\fR procedure.
|
||||
The ASP (Adjust Stack Pointer) instruction is used for this purpose.
|
||||
A call in EM is shown in Fig. 8.1
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
Pascal: EM:
|
||||
|
||||
f(a,2) LOC 2
|
||||
LOE A
|
||||
CAL F
|
||||
ASP 4 -- pop 4 bytes
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 8.1 An example procedure call in Pascal and EM
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
As procedure calls occur often in most programs,
|
||||
the ASP is one of the most frequently used EM instructions.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The main intention of removing the actual parameters after a procedure call
|
||||
is to avoid the stack size to increase rapidly.
|
||||
Yet, in some cases, it is possible to \fIdelay\fR or even \fIavoid\fR the
|
||||
removal of the parameters without letting the stack grow
|
||||
significantly.
|
||||
In this way, considerable savings in code size and execution time may
|
||||
be achieved, at the cost of a slightly increased stack size.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A stack adjustment may be delayed if there is some other stack adjustment
|
||||
later on in the same basic block.
|
||||
The two ASPs can be combined into one.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
Pascal: EM: optimized EM:
|
||||
|
||||
f(a,2) LOC 2 LOC 2
|
||||
g(3,b,c) LOE A LOE A
|
||||
CAL F CAL F
|
||||
ASP 4 LOE C
|
||||
LOE C LOE B
|
||||
LOE B LOC 3
|
||||
LOC 3 CAL G
|
||||
CAL G ASP 10
|
||||
ASP 6
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 8.2 An example of local Stack Pollution
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
The stacksize will be increased only temporarily.
|
||||
If the basic block contains another ASP, the ASP 10 may subsequently be
|
||||
combined with that next ASP, and so on.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
For some back ends, a stack adjustment also takes place
|
||||
at the point of a procedure return.
|
||||
There is no need to specify the number of bytes to be popped at a
|
||||
return.
|
||||
This provides an opportunity to remove ASPs more globally.
|
||||
If all ASPs outside any loop are removed, the increase of the
|
||||
stack size will still only be small, as no such ASP is executed more
|
||||
than once without an intervening return from the procedure it is part of.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
This second approach is not generally applicable to all target machines,
|
||||
as some back ends require the stack to be cleaned up at the point of
|
||||
a procedure return.
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Implementation
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
There is one main problem the implementation has to solve.
|
||||
In EM, the stack is not only used for passing parameters,
|
||||
but also for evaluating expressions.
|
||||
Hence, ASP instructions can only be combined or removed
|
||||
if certain conditions are satisfied.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Two consecutive ASPs of one basic block can only be combined
|
||||
(as described above) if:
|
||||
.IP 1.
|
||||
On no point of text in between the two ASPs, any item is popped from
|
||||
the stack that was pushed onto it before the first ASP.
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
The number of bytes popped from the stack by the second ASP must equal
|
||||
the number of bytes pushed since the first ASP.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Condition 1. is not satisfied in Fig. 8.3.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
Pascal: EM:
|
||||
|
||||
5 + f(10) + g(30) LOC 5
|
||||
LOC 10
|
||||
CAL F
|
||||
ASP 2 -- cannot be removed
|
||||
LFR 2 -- push function result
|
||||
ADI 2
|
||||
LOC 30
|
||||
CAL G
|
||||
ASP 2
|
||||
LFR 2
|
||||
ADI 2
|
||||
Fig. 8.3 An illegal transformation
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
If the first ASP were removed (delayed), the first ADI would add
|
||||
10 and f(10), instead of 5 and f(10).
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
Condition 2. is not satisfied in Fig. 8.4.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
Pascal: EM:
|
||||
|
||||
f(10) + 5 * g(30) LOC 10
|
||||
CAL F
|
||||
ASP 2
|
||||
LFR 2
|
||||
LOC 5
|
||||
LOC 30
|
||||
CAL G
|
||||
ASP 2
|
||||
LFR 2
|
||||
MLI 2 -- 5 * g(30)
|
||||
ADI 2
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 8.4 A second illegal transformation
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
If the two ASPs were combined into one 'ASP 4', the constant 5 would
|
||||
have been popped, rather than the parameter 10 (so '10 + f(10)*g(30)'
|
||||
would have been computed).
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The second approach to deleting ASPs (i.e. let the procedure return
|
||||
do the stack clean-up)
|
||||
is only applied to the last ASP of every basic block.
|
||||
Any preceding ASPs are dealt with by the first approach.
|
||||
The last ASP of a basic block B will only be removed if:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
on no path in the control flow graph from B to any block containing a
|
||||
RET (return) there is a basic block that, at some point of its text, pops
|
||||
items from the stack that it has not itself pushed earlier.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Clearly, if this condition is satisfied, no harm can be done; no
|
||||
other basic block will ever access items that were pushed
|
||||
on the stack before the ASP.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The number of bytes pushed onto or popped from the stack can be
|
||||
easily encoded in a so called "pop-push table".
|
||||
The numbers in general depend on the target machine word- and pointer
|
||||
size and on the argument given to the instruction.
|
||||
For example, an ADS instruction is described by:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
-a-p+p
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
which means: an 'ADS n' first pops an n-byte value (n being the argument),
|
||||
next pops a pointer-size value and finally pushes a pointer-size value.
|
||||
For some infrequently used EM instructions the pop-push numbers
|
||||
cannot be computed statically.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The stack pollution algorithm first performs a depth first search over
|
||||
the control flow graph and marks all blocks that do not satisfy
|
||||
the global condition.
|
||||
Next it visits all basic blocks in turn.
|
||||
For every pair of adjacent ASPs, it checks conditions 1. and 2. and
|
||||
combines the ASPs if they are satisfied.
|
||||
The new ASP may be used as first ASP in the next pair.
|
||||
If a condition fails, it simply continues with the next ASP.
|
||||
Finally, the last ASP is removed if:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
nothing has been popped from the stack after the last ASP that was
|
||||
pushed before it
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the block was not marked by the depth first search
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the block is not in a loop
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
4
doc/ego/sr/.distr
Normal file
4
doc/ego/sr/.distr
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
|
||||
sr1
|
||||
sr2
|
||||
sr3
|
||||
sr4
|
||||
44
doc/ego/sr/sr1
Normal file
44
doc/ego/sr/sr1
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
|
||||
.bp
|
||||
.NH 1
|
||||
Strength reduction
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Introduction
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The Strength Reduction optimization technique (SR)
|
||||
tries to replace expensive operators
|
||||
by cheaper ones,
|
||||
in order to decrease the execution time
|
||||
of the program.
|
||||
A classical example is replacing a 'multiplication by 2'
|
||||
by an addition or a shift instruction.
|
||||
These kinds of local transformations are already
|
||||
done by the EM Peephole Optimizer.
|
||||
Strength reduction can also be applied
|
||||
more generally to operators used in a loop.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
i := 1; i := 1;
|
||||
while i < 100 loop --> TMP := i * 118;
|
||||
put(i * 118); while i < 100 loop
|
||||
i := i + 1; put(TMP);
|
||||
end loop; i := i + 1;
|
||||
TMP := TMP + 118;
|
||||
end loop;
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 6.1 An example of Strenght Reduction
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
In Fig. 6.1, a multiplication inside a loop is
|
||||
replaced by an addition inside the loop and a multiplication
|
||||
outside the loop.
|
||||
Clearly, this is a global optimization; it cannot
|
||||
be done by a peephole optimizer.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
In some cases a related technique, \fItest replacement\fR,
|
||||
can be used to eliminate the
|
||||
loop variable i.
|
||||
This technique will not be discussed in this report.
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
In the example above, the resulting code
|
||||
can be further optimized by using
|
||||
constant propagation.
|
||||
Obviously, this is not the task of the
|
||||
Strength Reduction phase.
|
||||
217
doc/ego/sr/sr2
Normal file
217
doc/ego/sr/sr2
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,217 @@
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
The model of strength reduction
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
In this section we will describe
|
||||
the transformations performed by
|
||||
Strength Reduction (SR).
|
||||
Before doing so, we will introduce the
|
||||
central notion of an induction variable.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Induction variables
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
SR looks for variables whose
|
||||
values form an arithmetic progression
|
||||
at the beginning of a loop.
|
||||
These variables are called induction variables.
|
||||
The most frequently occurring example of such
|
||||
a variable is a loop-variable in a high-order
|
||||
programming language.
|
||||
Several quite sophisticated models of strength
|
||||
reduction can be found in the literature.
|
||||
.[
|
||||
cocke reduction strength cacm
|
||||
.]
|
||||
.[
|
||||
allen cocke kennedy reduction strength
|
||||
.]
|
||||
.[
|
||||
lowry medlock cacm
|
||||
.]
|
||||
.[
|
||||
aho compiler design
|
||||
.]
|
||||
In these models the notion of an induction variable
|
||||
is far more general than the intuitive notion
|
||||
of a loop-variable.
|
||||
The definition of an induction variable we present here
|
||||
is more restricted,
|
||||
yielding a simpler model and simpler transformations.
|
||||
We think the principle source for strength reduction lies in
|
||||
expressions using a loop-variable,
|
||||
i.e. a variable that is incremented or decremented
|
||||
by the same amount after every loop iteration,
|
||||
and that cannot be changed in any other way.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Of course, the EM code does not contain high level constructs
|
||||
such as for-statements.
|
||||
We will define an induction variable in terms
|
||||
of the Intermediate Code of the optimizer.
|
||||
Note that the notions of a loop in the
|
||||
EM text and of a firm basic block
|
||||
were defined in section 3.3.5.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
.UL definition
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
An induction variable i of a loop L is a local variable
|
||||
that is never accessed indirectly,
|
||||
whose size is the word size of the target machine, and
|
||||
that is assigned exactly once within L,
|
||||
the assignment:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
being of the form i := i + c or i := c +i,
|
||||
c is a constant
|
||||
called the \fIstep value\fR of i.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
occurring in a firm block of L.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
(Note that the first restriction on the assignment
|
||||
is not described in terms of the Intermediate Code;
|
||||
we will give such a description later; the current
|
||||
definition is easier to understand however).
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Recognized expressions
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
SR recognizes certain expressions using
|
||||
an induction variable and replaces
|
||||
them by cheaper ones.
|
||||
Two kinds of expensive operations are recognized:
|
||||
multiplication and array address computations.
|
||||
The expressions that are simplified must
|
||||
use an induction variable
|
||||
as an operand of
|
||||
a multiplication or as index in an array expression.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Often a linear function of an induction variable is used,
|
||||
rather than the variable itself.
|
||||
In these cases optimization is still possible.
|
||||
We call such expressions \fIiv-expressions\fR.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
.UL definition:
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
An iv-expression of an induction variable i of a loop L is
|
||||
an expression that:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
uses only the operators + and - (unary as well as binary)
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
uses i as operand exactly once
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
uses (besides i) only constants or variables that are
|
||||
never changed in L as operands.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The expressions recognized by SR are of the following forms:
|
||||
.IP (1)
|
||||
iv_expression * constant
|
||||
.IP (2)
|
||||
constant * iv_expression
|
||||
.IP (3)
|
||||
A[iv-expression] := (assign to array element)
|
||||
.IP (4)
|
||||
A[iv-expression] (use array element)
|
||||
.IP (5)
|
||||
& A[iv-expression] (take address of array element)
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
(Note that EM has different instructions to use an array element,
|
||||
store into one, or take the address of one, resp. LAR, SAR, and AAR).
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
The size of the elements of A must
|
||||
be known statically.
|
||||
In cases (3) and (4) this size
|
||||
must equal the word size of the
|
||||
target machine.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Transformations
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
With every recognized expression we associate
|
||||
a new temporary local variable TMP,
|
||||
allocated in the stack frame of the
|
||||
procedure containing the expression.
|
||||
At any program point within the loop, TMP will
|
||||
contain the following value:
|
||||
.IP multiplication: 18
|
||||
the current value of iv-expression * constant
|
||||
.IP arrays:
|
||||
the current value of &A[iv-expression].
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
In the second case, TMP essentially is a pointer variable,
|
||||
pointing to the element of A that is currently in use.
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
If the same expression occurs several times in the loop,
|
||||
the same temporary local is used each time.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Three transformations are applied to the EM text:
|
||||
.IP (1)
|
||||
TMP is initialized with the right value.
|
||||
This initialization takes place just
|
||||
before the loop.
|
||||
.IP (2)
|
||||
The recognized expression is simplified.
|
||||
.IP (3)
|
||||
TMP is incremented; this takes place just
|
||||
after the induction variable is incremented.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
For multiplication, the initial value of TMP
|
||||
is the value of the recognized expression at
|
||||
the program point immediately before the loop.
|
||||
For arrays, TMP is initialized with the address
|
||||
of the first array element that is accessed.
|
||||
So the initialization code is:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
TMP := iv-expression * constant; or
|
||||
TMP := &A[iv-expression]
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
At the point immediately before the loop,
|
||||
the induction variable will already have been
|
||||
initialized,
|
||||
so the value used in the code above will be the
|
||||
value it has during the first iteration.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
For multiplication, the recognized expression can simply be
|
||||
replaced by TMP.
|
||||
For array optimizations, the replacement
|
||||
depends on the form:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
\fIform\fR \fIreplacement\fR
|
||||
(3) A[iv-expr] := *TMP := (assign indirect)
|
||||
(4) A[iv-expr] *TMP (use indirect)
|
||||
(5) &A[iv-expr] TMP
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
The '*' denotes the indirect operator. (Note that
|
||||
EM has different instructions to do
|
||||
an assign-indirect and a use-indirect).
|
||||
As the size of the array elements is restricted
|
||||
to be the word size in case (3) and (4),
|
||||
only one EM instruction needs to
|
||||
be generated in all cases.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The amount by which TMP is incremented is:
|
||||
.IP multiplication: 18
|
||||
step value * constant
|
||||
.IP arrays:
|
||||
step value * element size
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Note that the step value (see definition of induction variable above),
|
||||
the constant, and the element size (see previous section) can all
|
||||
be determined statically.
|
||||
If the sign of the induction variable in the
|
||||
iv-expression is negative, the amount
|
||||
must be negated.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The transformations are demonstrated by an example.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
i := 100; i := 100;
|
||||
while i > 1 loop TMP := (6-i) * 5;
|
||||
X := (6-i) * 5 + 2; while i > 1 loop
|
||||
Y := (6-i) * 5 - 8; --> X := TMP + 2;
|
||||
i := i - 3; Y := TMP - 8;
|
||||
end loop; i := i - 3;
|
||||
TMP := TMP + 15;
|
||||
end loop;
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 6.2 Example of complex Strength Reduction transformations
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
The expression '(6-i)*5' is recognized twice. The constant
|
||||
is 5.
|
||||
The step value is -3.
|
||||
The sign of i in the recognized expression is '-'.
|
||||
So the increment value of TMP is -(-3*5) = +15.
|
||||
232
doc/ego/sr/sr3
Normal file
232
doc/ego/sr/sr3
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,232 @@
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Implementation
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Like most phases, SR deals with one procedure
|
||||
at a time.
|
||||
Within a procedure, SR works on one loop at a time.
|
||||
Loops are processed in textual order.
|
||||
If loops are nested inside each other,
|
||||
SR starts with the outermost loop and proceeds in the
|
||||
inwards direction.
|
||||
This order is chosen,
|
||||
because it enables the optimization
|
||||
of multi-dimensional array address computations,
|
||||
if the elements are accessed in the usual way
|
||||
(i.e. row after row, rather than column after column).
|
||||
For every loop, SR first detects all induction variables
|
||||
and then tries to recognize
|
||||
expressions that can be optimized.
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Finding induction variables
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The process of finding induction variables
|
||||
can conveniently be split up
|
||||
into two parts.
|
||||
First, the EM text of the loop is scanned to find
|
||||
all \fIcandidate\fR induction variables,
|
||||
which are word-sized local variables
|
||||
that are assigned precisely once
|
||||
in the loop, within a firm block.
|
||||
Second, for every candidate, the single assignment
|
||||
is inspected, to see if it has the form
|
||||
required by the definition of an induction variable.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Candidates are found by scanning the EM code of the loop.
|
||||
During this scan, two sets are maintained.
|
||||
The set "cand" contains all variables that were
|
||||
assigned exactly once so far, within a firm block.
|
||||
The set "dismiss" contains all variables that
|
||||
should not be made a candidate.
|
||||
Initially, both sets are empty.
|
||||
If a variable is assigned to, it is put
|
||||
in the cand set, if three conditions are met:
|
||||
.IP 1.
|
||||
the variable was not in cand or dismiss already
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
the assignment takes place in a firm block
|
||||
.IP 3.
|
||||
the assignment is not a ZRL instruction (assignment by zero)
|
||||
or a SDL instruction (store double local).
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
If any condition fails, the variable is dismissed from cand
|
||||
(if it was there already) and put in dismiss
|
||||
(if it was not there already).
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
All variables for which no register message was generated (i.e. those
|
||||
variables that may be accessed indirectly) are assumed
|
||||
to be changed in the loop.
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
All variables that remain in cand are candidate induction variables.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
From the set of candidates, the induction variables can
|
||||
be determined, by inspecting the single assignment.
|
||||
The assignment must match one of the EM patterns below.
|
||||
('x' is the candidate. 'ws' is the word size of the target machine.
|
||||
'n' is any number.)
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
\fIpattern\fR \fIstep size\fR
|
||||
INL x | +1
|
||||
DEL x | -1
|
||||
LOL x ; (INC | DEC) ; STL x | +1 | -1
|
||||
LOL x ; LOC n ; (ADI ws | SBI ws) ; STL x | +n | -n
|
||||
LOC n ; LOL x ; ADI ws ; STL x. +n
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
From the patterns the step size of the induction variable
|
||||
can also be determined.
|
||||
These step sizes are displayed on the right hand side.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
For every induction variable we maintain the following information:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the offset of the variable in the stackframe of its procedure
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
a pointer to the EM text of the assignment statement
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the step value
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Optimizing expressions
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
If any induction variables of the loop were found,
|
||||
the EM text of the loop is scanned again,
|
||||
to detect expressions that can be optimized.
|
||||
SR scans for multiplication and array instructions.
|
||||
Whenever it finds such an instruction, it analyses the
|
||||
code in front of it.
|
||||
If an expression is to be optimized, it must
|
||||
be generated by the following syntax rules.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
optimizable_expr:
|
||||
iv_expr const mult |
|
||||
const iv_expr mult |
|
||||
address iv_expr address array_instr;
|
||||
mult:
|
||||
MLI ws |
|
||||
MLU ws ;
|
||||
array_instr:
|
||||
LAR ws |
|
||||
SAR ws |
|
||||
AAR ws ;
|
||||
const:
|
||||
LOC n ;
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
An 'address' is an EM instruction that loads an
|
||||
address on the stack.
|
||||
An instruction like LOL may be an 'address', if
|
||||
the size of an address (pointer size, =ps) is
|
||||
the same as the word size.
|
||||
If the pointer size is twice the word size,
|
||||
instructions like LDL are an 'address'.
|
||||
(The addresses in the third grammar rule
|
||||
denote resp. the array address and the
|
||||
array descriptor address).
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
address:
|
||||
LAE |
|
||||
LAL |
|
||||
LOL if ps=ws |
|
||||
LOE ,, |
|
||||
LIL ,, |
|
||||
LDL if ps=2*ws |
|
||||
LDE ,, ;
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
The notion of an iv-expression was introduced earlier.
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
iv_expr:
|
||||
iv_expr unair_op |
|
||||
iv_expr iv_expr binary_op |
|
||||
loopconst |
|
||||
iv ;
|
||||
unair_op:
|
||||
NGI ws |
|
||||
INC |
|
||||
DEC ;
|
||||
binary_op:
|
||||
ADI ws |
|
||||
ADU ws |
|
||||
SBI ws |
|
||||
SBU ws ;
|
||||
loopconst:
|
||||
const |
|
||||
LOL x if x is not changed in loop ;
|
||||
iv:
|
||||
LOL x if x is an induction variable ;
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
An iv_expression must satisfy one additional constraint:
|
||||
it must use exactly one operand that is an induction
|
||||
variable.
|
||||
A simple, hand written, top-down parser is used
|
||||
to recognize an iv-expression.
|
||||
It scans the EM code from right to left
|
||||
(recall that EM is essentially postfix).
|
||||
It uses semantic attributes (inherited as well as
|
||||
derived) to check the additional constraint.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
All information assembled during the recognition
|
||||
process is put in a 'code_info' structure.
|
||||
This structure contains the following information:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the optimizable code itself
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the loop and basic block the code is part of
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the induction variable
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the iv-expression
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the sign of the induction variable in the
|
||||
iv-expression
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the offset and size of the temporary local variable
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the expensive operator (MLI, LAR etc.)
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
the instruction that loads the constant
|
||||
(for multiplication) or the array descriptor
|
||||
(for arrays).
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
The entire transformation process is driven
|
||||
by this information.
|
||||
As the EM text is represented internally
|
||||
as a list, this process consists
|
||||
mainly of straightforward list manipulations.
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
The initialization code must be put
|
||||
immediately before the loop entry.
|
||||
For this purpose a \fIheader block\fR is
|
||||
created that has the loop entry block as
|
||||
its only successor and that dominates the
|
||||
entry block.
|
||||
The CFG and all relations (SUCC,PRED, IDOM, LOOPS etc.)
|
||||
are updated.
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
An EM instruction that will
|
||||
replace the optimizable code
|
||||
is created and put at the place of the old code.
|
||||
The list representing the old optimizable code
|
||||
is used to create a list for the initializing code,
|
||||
as they are similar.
|
||||
Only two modifications are required:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
if the expensive operator is a LAR or SAR,
|
||||
it must be replaced by an AAR, as the initial value
|
||||
of TMP is the \fIaddress\fR of the first
|
||||
array element that is accessed.
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
code must be appended to store the result of the
|
||||
expression in TMP.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Finally, code to increment TMP is created and put after
|
||||
the code of the single assignment to the
|
||||
induction variable.
|
||||
The generated code uses either an integer addition
|
||||
(ADI) or an integer-to-pointer addition (ADS)
|
||||
to do the increment.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
SR maintains a set of all expressions that have already
|
||||
been recognized in the present loop.
|
||||
Such expressions are said to be \fIavailable\fR.
|
||||
If an expression is recognized that is
|
||||
already available,
|
||||
no new temporary local variable is allocated for it,
|
||||
and the code to initialize and increment the local
|
||||
is not generated.
|
||||
28
doc/ego/sr/sr4
Normal file
28
doc/ego/sr/sr4
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Source files of SR
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The sources of SR are in the following files
|
||||
and packages:
|
||||
.IP sr.h: 14
|
||||
declarations of global variables and
|
||||
data structures
|
||||
.IP sr.c:
|
||||
the routine main; a driving routine to process
|
||||
(possibly nested) loops in the right order
|
||||
.IP iv
|
||||
implements a procedure that finds the induction variables
|
||||
of a loop
|
||||
.IP reduce
|
||||
implements a procedure that finds optimizable expressions
|
||||
and that does the transformations
|
||||
.IP cand
|
||||
implements a procedure that finds the candidate induction
|
||||
variables; used to implement iv
|
||||
.IP xform
|
||||
implements several useful routines that transform
|
||||
lists of EM text or a CFG; used to implement reduce
|
||||
.IP expr
|
||||
implements a procedure that parses iv-expressions
|
||||
.IP aux
|
||||
implements several auxiliary procedures.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
5
doc/ego/ud/.distr
Normal file
5
doc/ego/ud/.distr
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
|
||||
ud1
|
||||
ud2
|
||||
ud3
|
||||
ud4
|
||||
ud5
|
||||
58
doc/ego/ud/ud1
Normal file
58
doc/ego/ud/ud1
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
|
||||
.bp
|
||||
.NH 1
|
||||
Use-Definition analysis
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Introduction
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The "Use-Definition analysis" phase (UD) consists of two related optimization
|
||||
techniques that both depend on "Use-Definition" information.
|
||||
The techniques are Copy Propagation and Constant Propagation.
|
||||
They are best explained via an example (see Figs. 11.1 and 11.2).
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
(1) A := B A := B
|
||||
... --> ...
|
||||
(2) use(A) use(B)
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 11.1 An example of Copy Propagation
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
(1) A := 12 A := 12
|
||||
... --> ...
|
||||
(2) use(A) use(12)
|
||||
|
||||
Fig. 11.2 An example of Constant Propagation
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
Both optimizations have to check that the value of A at line (2)
|
||||
can only be obtained at line (1).
|
||||
Copy Propagation also has to assure that the value of B is
|
||||
the same at line (1) as at line (2).
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
One purpose of both transformations is to introduce
|
||||
opportunities for the Dead Code Elimination optimization.
|
||||
If the variable A is used nowhere else, the assignment A := B
|
||||
becomes useless and can be eliminated.
|
||||
.sp 0
|
||||
If B is less expensive to access than A (e.g. this is sometimes the case
|
||||
if A is a local variable and B is a global variable),
|
||||
Copy Propagation directly improves the code itself.
|
||||
If A is cheaper to access the transformation will not be performed.
|
||||
Likewise, a constant as operand may be cheeper than a variable.
|
||||
Having a constant as operand may also facilitate other optimizations.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The design of UD is based on the theory described in section
|
||||
14.1 and 14.3 of.
|
||||
.[
|
||||
aho compiler design
|
||||
.]
|
||||
As a main departure from that theory,
|
||||
we do not demand the statement A := B to become redundant after
|
||||
Copy Propagation.
|
||||
If B is cheaper to access than A, the optimization is always performed;
|
||||
if B is more expensive than A, we never do the transformation.
|
||||
If A and B are equally expensive UD uses the heuristic rule to
|
||||
replace infrequently used variables by frequently used ones.
|
||||
This rule increases the chances of the assignment to become useless.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
In the next section we will give a brief outline of the data
|
||||
flow theory used
|
||||
for the implementation of UD.
|
||||
64
doc/ego/ud/ud2
Normal file
64
doc/ego/ud/ud2
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Data flow information
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Use-Definition information
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A \fIdefinition\fR of a variable A is an assignment to A.
|
||||
A definition is said to \fIreach\fR a point p if there is a
|
||||
path in the control flow graph from the definition to p, such that
|
||||
A is not redefined on that path.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
For every basic block B, we define the following sets:
|
||||
.IP GEN[b] 9
|
||||
the set of definitions in b that reach the end of b.
|
||||
.IP KILL[b]
|
||||
the set of definitions outside b that define a variable that
|
||||
is changed in b.
|
||||
.IP IN[b]
|
||||
the set of all definitions reaching the beginning of b.
|
||||
.IP OUT[b]
|
||||
the set of all definitions reaching the end of b.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
GEN and KILL can be determined by inspecting the code of the procedure.
|
||||
IN and OUT are computed by solving the following data flow equations:
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
(1) OUT[b] = IN[b] - KILL[b] + GEN[b]
|
||||
(2) IN[b] = OUT[p1] + ... + OUT[pn],
|
||||
where PRED(b) = {p1, ... , pn}
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.NH 3
|
||||
Copy information
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
A \fIcopy\fR is a definition of the form "A := B".
|
||||
A copy is said to be \fIgenerated\fR in a basic block n if
|
||||
it occurs in n and there is no subsequent assignment to B in n.
|
||||
A copy is said to be \fIkilled\fR in n if:
|
||||
.IP (i)
|
||||
it occurs in n and there is a subsequent assignment to B within n, or
|
||||
.IP (ii)
|
||||
it occurs outside n, the definition A := B reaches the beginning of n
|
||||
and B is changed in n (note that a copy also is a definition).
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
A copy \fIreaches\fR a point p, if there are no assignments to B
|
||||
on any path in the control flow graph from the copy to p.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
We define the following sets:
|
||||
.IP C_GEN[b] 11
|
||||
the set of all copies in b generated in b.
|
||||
.IP C_KILL[b]
|
||||
the set of all copies killed in b.
|
||||
.IP C_IN[b]
|
||||
the set of all copies reaching the beginning of b.
|
||||
.IP C_OUT[b]
|
||||
the set of all copies reaching the end of b.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
C_IN and C_OUT are computed by solving the following equations:
|
||||
(root is the entry node of the current procedure; '*' denotes
|
||||
set intersection)
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
(1) C_OUT[b] = C_IN[b] - C_KILL[b] + C_GEN[b]
|
||||
(2) C_IN[b] = C_OUT[p1] * ... * C_OUT[pn],
|
||||
where PRED(b) = {p1, ... , pn} and b /= root
|
||||
C_IN[root] = {all copies}
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
26
doc/ego/ud/ud3
Normal file
26
doc/ego/ud/ud3
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Pointers and subroutine calls
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The theory outlined above assumes that variables can
|
||||
only be changed by a direct assignment.
|
||||
This condition does not hold for EM.
|
||||
In case of an assignment through a pointer variable,
|
||||
it is in general impossible to see which variable is affected
|
||||
by the assignment.
|
||||
Similar problems occur in the presence of procedure calls.
|
||||
Therefore we distinguish two kinds of definitions:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
an \fIexplicit\fR definition is a direct assignment to one
|
||||
specific variable
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
an \fIimplicit\fR definition is the potential alteration of
|
||||
a variable as a result of a procedure call or an indirect assignment.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
An indirect assignment causes implicit definitions to
|
||||
all variables that may be accessed indirectly, i.e.
|
||||
all local variables for which no register message was generated
|
||||
and all global variables.
|
||||
If a procedure contains an indirect assignment it may change the
|
||||
same set of variables, else it may change some global variables directly.
|
||||
The KILL, GEN, IN and OUT sets contain explicit as well
|
||||
as implicit definitions.
|
||||
78
doc/ego/ud/ud4
Normal file
78
doc/ego/ud/ud4
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Implementation
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
UD first builds a number of tables:
|
||||
.IP locals: 9
|
||||
contains information about the local variables of the
|
||||
current procedure (offset,size,whether a register message was found
|
||||
for it and, if so, the score field of that message)
|
||||
.IP defs:
|
||||
a table of all explicit definitions appearing in the
|
||||
current procedure.
|
||||
.IP copies:
|
||||
a table of all copies appearing in the
|
||||
current procedure.
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Every variable (local as well as global), definition and copy
|
||||
is identified by a unique number, which is the index
|
||||
in the table.
|
||||
All tables are constructed by traversing the EM code.
|
||||
A fourth table, "vardefs" is used, indexed by a 'variable number',
|
||||
which contains for every variable the set of explicit definitions of it.
|
||||
Also, for each basic block b, the set CHGVARS containing all variables
|
||||
changed by it is computed.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The GEN sets are obtained in one scan over the EM text,
|
||||
by analyzing every EM instruction.
|
||||
The KILL set of a basic block b is computed by looking at the
|
||||
set of variables
|
||||
changed by b (i.e. CHGVARS[b]).
|
||||
For every such variable v, all explicit definitions to v
|
||||
(i.e. vardefs[v]) that are not in GEN[b] are added to KILL[b].
|
||||
Also, the implicit defininition of v is added to KILL[b].
|
||||
Next, the data flow equations for use-definition information
|
||||
are solved,
|
||||
using a straight forward, iterative algorithm.
|
||||
All sets are represented as bitvectors, so the operations
|
||||
on sets (union, difference) can be implemented efficiently.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The C_GEN and C_KILL sets are computed simultaneously in one scan
|
||||
over the EM text.
|
||||
For every copy A := B appearing in basic block b we do
|
||||
the following:
|
||||
.IP 1.
|
||||
for every basic block n /= b that changes B, see if the definition A := B
|
||||
reaches the beginning of n (i.e. check if the index number of A := B in
|
||||
the "defs" table is an element of IN[n]);
|
||||
if so, add the copy to C_KILL[n]
|
||||
.IP 2.
|
||||
if B is redefined later on in b, add the copy to C_KILL[b], else
|
||||
add it to C_GEN[b]
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
C_IN and C_OUT are computed from C_GEN and C_KILL via the second set of
|
||||
data flow equations.
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
Finally, in one last scan all opportunities for optimization are
|
||||
detected.
|
||||
For every use u of a variable A, we check if
|
||||
there is a unique explicit definition d reaching u.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
If the definition is a copy A := B and B has the same value at d as
|
||||
at u, then the use of A at u may be changed into B.
|
||||
The latter condition can be verified as follows:
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
if u and d are in the same basic block, see if there is
|
||||
any assignment to B in between d and u
|
||||
.IP -
|
||||
if u and d are in different basic blocks, the condition is
|
||||
satisfied if there is no assignment to B in the block of u prior to u
|
||||
and d is in C_IN[b].
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
Before the transformation is actually done, UD first makes sure the
|
||||
alteration is really desirable, as described before.
|
||||
The information needed for this purpose (access costs of local and
|
||||
global variables) is read from a machine descriptor file.
|
||||
.sp
|
||||
If the only definition reaching u has the form "A := constant", the use
|
||||
of A at u is replaced by the constant.
|
||||
|
||||
19
doc/ego/ud/ud5
Normal file
19
doc/ego/ud/ud5
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
|
||||
|
||||
.NH 2
|
||||
Source files of UD
|
||||
.PP
|
||||
The sources of UD are in the following files and packages:
|
||||
.IP ud.h: 14
|
||||
declarations of global variables and data structures
|
||||
.IP ud.c:
|
||||
the routine main; initialization of target machine dependent tables
|
||||
.IP defs:
|
||||
routines to compute the GEN and KILL sets and routines to analyse
|
||||
EM instructions
|
||||
.IP const:
|
||||
routines involved in constant propagation
|
||||
.IP copy:
|
||||
routines involved in copy propagation
|
||||
.IP aux:
|
||||
contains auxiliary routines
|
||||
.LP
|
||||
32
doc/em/.distr
Normal file
32
doc/em/.distr
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
|
||||
Makefile
|
||||
READ_ME
|
||||
addend.n
|
||||
app.codes.nr
|
||||
app.exam.nr
|
||||
app.int.nr
|
||||
assem.nr
|
||||
cont.nr
|
||||
descr.nr
|
||||
dspace.nr
|
||||
em.i
|
||||
env.nr
|
||||
even.c
|
||||
exam.e
|
||||
exam.p
|
||||
int
|
||||
intro.nr
|
||||
ip.awk
|
||||
ispace.nr
|
||||
mach.nr
|
||||
macr.nr
|
||||
mapping.nr
|
||||
mem.nr
|
||||
print
|
||||
show
|
||||
title.nr
|
||||
traps.nr
|
||||
types.nr
|
||||
mkdispatch.c
|
||||
dispat1.sed
|
||||
dispat2.sed
|
||||
dispat3.sed
|
||||
@ -1,31 +1,36 @@
|
||||
head: doc.pr
|
||||
HOME=../..
|
||||
|
||||
TBL=tbl
|
||||
NROFF=nroff
|
||||
FILES = macr.nr title.nr intro.nr mem.nr ispace.nr dspace.nr mapping.nr types.nr descr.nr iotrap.nr mach.nr assem.nr app.nr
|
||||
IOP=../../util/ass/ip_spec.t
|
||||
SUF=pr
|
||||
|
||||
doc.pr: $(FILES) itables em.i
|
||||
tbl $(FILES) | $(NROFF) >doc.pr
|
||||
head: ../em.$(SUF)
|
||||
|
||||
distr: $(FILES) itables em.i
|
||||
tbl $(FILES) | nroff -Tlp >doc.pr
|
||||
FILES = macr.nr title.nr intro.nr mem.nr ispace.nr dspace.nr mapping.nr \
|
||||
types.nr descr.nr env.nr traps.nr mach.nr assem.nr \
|
||||
app.int.nr app.codes.nr app.exam.nr cont.nr
|
||||
|
||||
opr: doc.pr
|
||||
make pr | opr
|
||||
IOP=$(HOME)/util/ass/ip_spec.t# # to construct itables from
|
||||
|
||||
pr:
|
||||
@make "NROFF="$NROFF doc.pr >makepr.out 2>&1
|
||||
@cat doc.pr
|
||||
../em.$(SUF): $(FILES) itables dispatdummy em.i Makefile
|
||||
$(TBL) $(FILES) | $(NROFF) > ../em.$(SUF)
|
||||
|
||||
app.t: itables em.i
|
||||
app.codes.pr: app.codes.nr itables dispatdummy
|
||||
|
||||
em.i: int/em.p
|
||||
@echo Sorry, this copy was edited by hand from int/em.p
|
||||
itables: $(IOP) ip.awk
|
||||
awk -f ip.awk $(IOP) | sed 's/-/\\-/g' | $(TBL) >itables
|
||||
|
||||
itables: $(IOP)
|
||||
awk -f ip.awk $(IOP) | tbl >itables
|
||||
dispatdummy: $(IOP) mkdispatch
|
||||
mkdispatch < $(IOP) > dispatdummy
|
||||
sed -f dispat1.sed < dispatdummy | $(TBL) > dispat1
|
||||
sed -f dispat2.sed < dispatdummy | $(TBL) > dispat2
|
||||
sed -f dispat3.sed < dispatdummy | $(TBL) > dispat3
|
||||
|
||||
mkdispatch: mkdispatch.c
|
||||
cc -I$(HOME)/util/ass -I$(HOME)/h -o mkdispatch mkdispatch.c $(HOME)/lib/em_data.a
|
||||
|
||||
.SUFFIXES : .pr .nr
|
||||
.nr.pr: ; tbl macr.nr $*.nr | $(NROFF) >$@
|
||||
.nr.pr: ; $(TBL) macr.nr $*.nr | $(NROFF) >$@
|
||||
|
||||
cont.t intro.t mem.t ispace.t dspace.t mapping.t succ.t descr.t iotrap.t mach.t assem.t kern.t app.t: macr.nr
|
||||
clean:
|
||||
rm -f *.pr itables *.out dispatdummy dispat? *.o mkdispatch
|
||||
|
||||
@ -1 +1,9 @@
|
||||
Sorry, the kun macro package is not ours to distribute.
|
||||
This it the text of IR-81,
|
||||
DESCRIPTION OF A MACHINE ARCHITECTURE FOR USE WITH BLOCK STRUCTURED LANGUAGES
|
||||
|
||||
The file em.i (text of the defining interpreter) was hand-edited from int/em.p
|
||||
|
||||
To print, set NROFF and TBL in the Makefile and call make.
|
||||
It uses the kun macro package which is also distributed.
|
||||
|
||||
The directory int contains the interpreter.
|
||||
|
||||
153
doc/em/app.codes.nr
Normal file
153
doc/em/app.codes.nr
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,153 @@
|
||||
.BP
|
||||
.AP "EM CODE TABLES"
|
||||
The following table is used by the assembler for EM machine
|
||||
language.
|
||||
It specifies the opcodes used for each instruction and
|
||||
how arguments are mapped to machine language arguments.
|
||||
The table is presented in three columns,
|
||||
each line in each column contains three or four fields.
|
||||
Each line describes a range of interpreter opcodes by
|
||||
specifying for which instruction the range is used, the type of the
|
||||
opcodes (mini, shortie, etc..) and range for the instruction
|
||||
argument.
|
||||
.A
|
||||
The first field on each line gives the EM instruction mnemonic,
|
||||
the second field gives some flags.
|
||||
If the opcodes are minis or shorties the third field specifies
|
||||
how many minis/shorties are used.
|
||||
The last field gives the number of the (first) interpreter
|
||||
opcode.
|
||||
.N 1
|
||||
Flags :
|
||||
.IS 3
|
||||
.N 1
|
||||
Opcode type, only one of the following may be specified.
|
||||
.PS - 5 " "
|
||||
.PT \-
|
||||
opcode without argument
|
||||
.PT m
|
||||
mini
|
||||
.PT s
|
||||
shortie
|
||||
.PT 2
|
||||
opcode with 2-byte signed argument
|
||||
.PT 4
|
||||
opcode with 4-byte signed argument
|
||||
.PT 8
|
||||
opcode with 8-byte signed argument
|
||||
.PE
|
||||
Secondary (escaped) opcodes.
|
||||
.PS - 5 " "
|
||||
.PT e
|
||||
The opcode thus marked is in the secondary opcode group instead
|
||||
of the primary
|
||||
.PE
|
||||
restrictions on arguments
|
||||
.PS - 5 " "
|
||||
.PT N
|
||||
Negative arguments only
|
||||
.PT P
|
||||
Positive and zero arguments only
|
||||
.PE
|
||||
mapping of arguments
|
||||
.PS - 5 " "
|
||||
.PT w
|
||||
argument must be divisible by the wordsize and is divided by the
|
||||
wordsize before use as opcode argument.
|
||||
.PT o
|
||||
argument ( possibly after division ) must be >= 1 and is
|
||||
decremented before use as opcode argument
|
||||
.PE
|
||||
.IE
|
||||
If the opcode type is 2,4 or 8 the resulting argument is used as
|
||||
opcode argument (least significant byte first).
|
||||
.N
|
||||
If the opcode type is mini, the argument is added
|
||||
to the first opcode \- if in range \- .
|
||||
If the argument is negative, the absolute value minus one is
|
||||
used in the algorithm above.
|
||||
.N
|
||||
For shorties with positive arguments the first opcode is used
|
||||
for arguments in the range 0..255, the second for the range
|
||||
256..511, etc..
|
||||
For shorties with negative arguments the first opcode is used
|
||||
for arguments in the range \-1..\-256, the second for the range
|
||||
\-257..\-512, etc..
|
||||
The byte following the opcode contains the least significant
|
||||
byte of the argument.
|
||||
First some examples of these specifications.
|
||||
.PS - 5
|
||||
.PT "aar mwPo 1 34"
|
||||
Indicates that opcode 34 is used as a mini for Positive
|
||||
instruction arguments only.
|
||||
The w and o indicate division and decrementing of the
|
||||
instruction argument.
|
||||
Because the resulting argument must be zero ( only opcode 34 may be used
|
||||
), this mini can only be used for instruction argument 2.
|
||||
Conclusion: opcode 34 is for "AAR 2".
|
||||
.PT "adp sP 1 41"
|
||||
Opcode 41 is used as shortie for ADP with arguments in the range
|
||||
0..255.
|
||||
.PT "bra sN 2 60"
|
||||
Opcode 60 is used as shortie for BRA with arguments \-1..\-256,
|
||||
61 is used for arguments \-257..\-512.
|
||||
.PT "zer e\- 145"
|
||||
Escaped opcode 145 is used for ZER.
|
||||
.PE
|
||||
The interpreter opcode table:
|
||||
.N 1
|
||||
.IS 3
|
||||
.so itables
|
||||
.IE
|
||||
.P
|
||||
The table above results in the following dispatch tables.
|
||||
Dispatch tables are used by interpreters to jump to the
|
||||
routines implementing the EM instructions, indexed by the next opcode.
|
||||
Each line of the dispatch tables gives the routine names
|
||||
of eight consecutive opcodes, preceded by the first opcode number
|
||||
on that line.
|
||||
Routine names consist of an EM mnemonic followed by a suffix.
|
||||
The suffices show the encoding used for each opcode.
|
||||
.N
|
||||
The following suffices exist:
|
||||
.N 1
|
||||
.VS 1 0
|
||||
.IS 4
|
||||
.PS - 11
|
||||
.PT .z
|
||||
no arguments
|
||||
.PT .l
|
||||
16-bit argument
|
||||
.PT .lw
|
||||
16-bit argument divided by the wordsize
|
||||
.PT .p
|
||||
positive 16-bit argument
|
||||
.PT .pw
|
||||
positive 16-bit argument divided by the wordsize
|
||||
.PT .n
|
||||
negative 16-bit argument
|
||||
.PT .nw
|
||||
negative 16-bit argument divided by the wordsize
|
||||
.PT .s<num>
|
||||
shortie with <num> as high order argument byte
|
||||
.PT .w<num>
|
||||
shortie with argument divided by the wordsize
|
||||
.PT .<num>
|
||||
mini with <num> as argument
|
||||
.PT .<num>W
|
||||
mini with <num>*wordsize as argument
|
||||
.PE 1
|
||||
<num> is a possibly negative integer.
|
||||
.VS 1 1
|
||||
.IE
|
||||
The dispatch table for the 256 primary opcodes:
|
||||
.N 1
|
||||
.so dispat1
|
||||
.N 2
|
||||
The list of secondary opcodes (escape1):
|
||||
.N 1
|
||||
.so dispat2
|
||||
.N 2
|
||||
Finally, the list of opcodes with four byte arguments (escape2).
|
||||
.N 1
|
||||
.so dispat3
|
||||
277
doc/em/app.exam.nr
Normal file
277
doc/em/app.exam.nr
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,277 @@
|
||||
.BP
|
||||
.AP "AN EXAMPLE PROGRAM"
|
||||
.A 1 0
|
||||
.NA
|
||||
.ta 4n 8n 12n 16n 20n
|
||||
.nf
|
||||
1 program example(output);
|
||||
2 {This program just demonstrates typical EM code.}
|
||||
3 type rec = record r1: integer; r2:real; r3: boolean end;
|
||||
4 var mi: integer; mx:real; r:rec;
|
||||
5
|
||||
6 function sum(a,b:integer):integer;
|
||||
7 begin
|
||||
8 sum := a + b
|
||||
9 end;
|
||||
10
|
||||
11 procedure test(var r: rec);
|
||||
12 label 1;
|
||||
13 var i,j: integer;
|
||||
14 x,y: real;
|
||||
15 b: boolean;
|
||||
16 c: char;
|
||||
17 a: array[1..100] of integer;
|
||||
18
|
||||
19 begin
|
||||
20 j := 1;
|
||||
21 i := 3 * j + 6;
|
||||
22 x := 4.8;
|
||||
23 y := x/0.5;
|
||||
24 b := true;
|
||||
25 c := 'z';
|
||||
26 for i:= 1 to 100 do a[i] := i * i;
|
||||
27 r.r1 := j+27;
|
||||
28 r.r3 := b;
|
||||
29 r.r2 := x+y;
|
||||
30 i := sum(r.r1, a[j]);
|
||||
31 while i > 0 do begin j := j + r.r1; i := i - 1 end;
|
||||
32 with r do begin r3 := b; r2 := x+y; r1 := 0 end;
|
||||
33 goto 1;
|
||||
34 1: writeln(j, i:6, x:9:3, b)
|
||||
35 end; {test}
|
||||
36 begin {main program}
|
||||
37 mx := 15.96;
|
||||
38 mi := 99;
|
||||
39 test(r)
|
||||
40 end.
|
||||
.fi
|
||||
.AD
|
||||
.BP
|
||||
The EM code as produced by the Pascal-VU compiler is given below. Comments
|
||||
have been added manually. Note that this code has already been optimized.
|
||||
.A 1 0
|
||||
.NA
|
||||
.nf
|
||||
.ta 1n 24n
|
||||
mes 2,2,2 ; wordsize 2, pointersize 2
|
||||
\&.1
|
||||
rom 't.p\e000' ; the name of the source file
|
||||
hol 552,\-32768,0 ; externals and buf occupy 552 bytes
|
||||
exp $sum ; sum can be called from other modules
|
||||
pro $sum,2 ; procedure sum ; 2 bytes local storage
|
||||
lin 8 ; code from source line 8
|
||||
ldl 0 ; load two locals ( a and b )
|
||||
adi 2 ; add them
|
||||
ret 2 ; return the result
|
||||
end 2 ; end of procedure ( still two bytes local storage )
|
||||
\&.2
|
||||
rom 1,99,2 ; descriptor of array a[]
|
||||
exp $test ; the compiler exports all level 0 procedures
|
||||
pro $test,226 ; procedure test, 226 bytes local storage
|
||||
\&.3
|
||||
rom 4.8F8 ; assemble Floating point 4.8 (8 bytes) in
|
||||
\&.4 ; global storage
|
||||
rom 0.5F8 ; same for 0.5
|
||||
mes 3,\-226,2,2 ; compiler temporary not referenced by address
|
||||
mes 3,\-24,2,0 ; the same is true for i, j, b and c in test
|
||||
mes 3,\-22,2,0
|
||||
mes 3,\-4,2,0
|
||||
mes 3,\-2,2,0
|
||||
mes 3,\-20,8,0 ; and for x and y
|
||||
mes 3,\-12,8,0
|
||||
lin 20 ; maintain source line number
|
||||
loc 1
|
||||
stl \-4 ; j := 1
|
||||
lni ; lin 21 prior to optimization
|
||||
lol \-4
|
||||
loc 3
|
||||
mli 2
|
||||
loc 6
|
||||
adi 2
|
||||
stl \-2 ; i := 3 * j + 6
|
||||
lni ; lin 22 prior to optimization
|
||||
lae .3
|
||||
loi 8
|
||||
lal \-12
|
||||
sti 8 ; x := 4.8
|
||||
lni ; lin 23 prior to optimization
|
||||
lal \-12
|
||||
loi 8
|
||||
lae .4
|
||||
loi 8
|
||||
dvf 8
|
||||
lal \-20
|
||||
sti 8 ; y := x / 0.5
|
||||
lni ; lin 24 prior to optimization
|
||||
loc 1
|
||||
stl \-22 ; b := true
|
||||
lni ; lin 25 prior to optimization
|
||||
loc 122
|
||||
stl \-24 ; c := 'z'
|
||||
lni ; lin 26 prior to optimization
|
||||
loc 1
|
||||
stl \-2 ; for i:= 1
|
||||
2
|
||||
lol \-2
|
||||
dup 2
|
||||
mli 2 ; i*i
|
||||
lal \-224
|
||||
lol \-2
|
||||
lae .2
|
||||
sar 2 ; a[i] :=
|
||||
lol \-2
|
||||
loc 100
|
||||
beq *3 ; to 100 do
|
||||
inl \-2 ; increment i and loop
|
||||
bra *2
|
||||
3
|
||||
lin 27
|
||||
lol \-4
|
||||
loc 27
|
||||
adi 2 ; j + 27
|
||||
sil 0 ; r.r1 :=
|
||||
lni ; lin 28 prior to optimization
|
||||
lol \-22 ; b
|
||||
lol 0
|
||||
stf 10 ; r.r3 :=
|
||||
lni ; lin 29 prior to optimization
|
||||
lal \-20
|
||||
loi 16
|
||||
adf 8 ; x + y
|
||||
lol 0
|
||||
adp 2
|
||||
sti 8 ; r.r2 :=
|
||||
lni ; lin 23 prior to optimization
|
||||
lal \-224
|
||||
lol \-4
|
||||
lae .2
|
||||
lar 2 ; a[j]
|
||||
lil 0 ; r.r1
|
||||
cal $sum ; call now
|
||||
asp 4 ; remove parameters from stack
|
||||
lfr 2 ; get function result
|
||||
stl \-2 ; i :=
|
||||
4
|
||||
lin 31
|
||||
lol \-2
|
||||
zle *5 ; while i > 0 do
|
||||
lol \-4
|
||||
lil 0
|
||||
adi 2
|
||||
stl \-4 ; j := j + r.r1
|
||||
del \-2 ; i := i - 1
|
||||
bra *4 ; loop
|
||||
5
|
||||
lin 32
|
||||
lol 0
|
||||
stl \-226 ; make copy of address of r
|
||||
lol \-22
|
||||
lol \-226
|
||||
stf 10 ; r3 := b
|
||||
lal \-20
|
||||
loi 16
|
||||
adf 8
|
||||
lol \-226
|
||||
adp 2
|
||||
sti 8 ; r2 := x + y
|
||||
loc 0
|
||||
sil \-226 ; r1 := 0
|
||||
lin 34 ; note the abscence of the unnecesary jump
|
||||
lae 22 ; address of output structure
|
||||
lol \-4
|
||||
cal $_wri ; write integer with default width
|
||||
asp 4 ; pop parameters
|
||||
lae 22
|
||||
lol \-2
|
||||
loc 6
|
||||
cal $_wsi ; write integer width 6
|
||||
asp 6
|
||||
lae 22
|
||||
lal \-12
|
||||
loi 8
|
||||
loc 9
|
||||
loc 3
|
||||
cal $_wrf ; write fixed format real, width 9, precision 3
|
||||
asp 14
|
||||
lae 22
|
||||
lol \-22
|
||||
cal $_wrb ; write boolean, default width
|
||||
asp 4
|
||||
lae 22
|
||||
cal $_wln ; writeln
|
||||
asp 2
|
||||
ret 0 ; return, no result
|
||||
end 226
|
||||
exp $_main
|
||||
pro $_main,0 ; main program
|
||||
\&.6
|
||||
con 2,\-1,22 ; description of external files
|
||||
\&.5
|
||||
rom 15.96F8
|
||||
fil .1 ; maintain source file name
|
||||
lae .6 ; description of external files
|
||||
lae 0 ; base of hol area to relocate buffer addresses
|
||||
cal $_ini ; initialize files, etc...
|
||||
asp 4
|
||||
lin 37
|
||||
lae .5
|
||||
loi 8
|
||||
lae 2
|
||||
sti 8 ; mx := 15.96
|
||||
lni ; lin 38 prior to optimization
|
||||
loc 99
|
||||
ste 0 ; mi := 99
|
||||
lni ; lin 39 prior to optimization
|
||||
lae 10 ; address of r
|
||||
cal $test
|
||||
asp 2
|
||||
loc 0 ; normal exit
|
||||
cal $_hlt ; cleanup and finish
|
||||
asp 2
|
||||
end 0
|
||||
mes 5 ; reals were used
|
||||
.fi
|
||||
.AD
|
||||
.A 1 0
|
||||
The compact code corresponding to the above program is listed below.
|
||||
Read it horizontally, line by line, not column by column.
|
||||
Each number represents a byte of compact code, printed in decimal.
|
||||
The first two bytes form the magic word.
|
||||
.N 1
|
||||
.IS 3
|
||||
.Dr 33
|
||||
173 0 159 122 122 122 255 242 1 161 250 124 116 46 112 0
|
||||
255 156 245 40 2 245 0 128 120 155 249 123 115 117 109 160
|
||||
249 123 115 117 109 122 67 128 63 120 3 122 88 122 152 122
|
||||
242 2 161 121 219 122 255 155 249 124 116 101 115 116 160 249
|
||||
124 116 101 115 116 245 226 0 242 3 161 253 128 123 52 46
|
||||
56 255 242 4 161 253 128 123 48 46 53 255 159 123 245 30
|
||||
255 122 122 255 159 123 96 122 120 255 159 123 98 122 120 255
|
||||
159 123 116 122 120 255 159 123 118 122 120 255 159 123 100 128
|
||||
120 255 159 123 108 128 120 255 67 140 69 121 113 116 68 73
|
||||
116 69 123 81 122 69 126 3 122 113 118 68 57 242 3 72
|
||||
128 58 108 112 128 68 58 108 72 128 57 242 4 72 128 44
|
||||
128 58 100 112 128 68 69 121 113 98 68 69 245 122 0 113
|
||||
96 68 69 121 113 118 182 73 118 42 122 81 122 58 245 32
|
||||
255 73 118 57 242 2 94 122 73 118 69 220 10 123 54 118
|
||||
18 122 183 67 147 73 116 69 147 3 122 104 120 68 73 98
|
||||
73 120 111 130 68 58 100 72 136 2 128 73 120 4 122 112
|
||||
128 68 58 245 32 255 73 116 57 242 2 59 122 65 120 20
|
||||
249 123 115 117 109 8 124 64 122 113 118 184 67 151 73 118
|
||||
128 125 73 116 65 120 3 122 113 116 41 118 18 124 185 67
|
||||
152 73 120 113 245 30 255 73 98 73 245 30 255 111 130 58
|
||||
100 72 136 2 128 73 245 30 255 4 122 112 128 69 120 104
|
||||
245 30 255 67 154 57 142 73 116 20 249 124 95 119 114 105
|
||||
8 124 57 142 73 118 69 126 20 249 124 95 119 115 105 8
|
||||
126 57 142 58 108 72 128 69 129 69 123 20 249 124 95 119
|
||||
114 102 8 134 57 142 73 98 20 249 124 95 119 114 98 8
|
||||
124 57 142 20 249 124 95 119 108 110 8 122 88 120 152 245
|
||||
226 0 155 249 125 95 109 97 105 110 160 249 125 95 109 97
|
||||
105 110 120 242 6 151 122 119 142 255 242 5 161 253 128 125
|
||||
49 53 46 57 54 255 50 242 1 57 242 6 57 120 20 249
|
||||
124 95 105 110 105 8 124 67 157 57 242 5 72 128 57 122
|
||||
112 128 68 69 219 110 120 68 57 130 20 249 124 116 101 115
|
||||
116 8 122 69 120 20 249 124 95 104 108 116 8 122 152 120
|
||||
159 124 160 255 159 125 255
|
||||
.De
|
||||
.IE
|
||||
8
doc/em/app.int.nr
Normal file
8
doc/em/app.int.nr
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
|
||||
.BP
|
||||
.AP "EM INTERPRETER"
|
||||
.nf
|
||||
.ft CW
|
||||
.ta 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80
|
||||
.so em.i
|
||||
.ft P
|
||||
.fi
|
||||
384
doc/em/assem.nr
384
doc/em/assem.nr
@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ The scope of an instruction label is its procedure.
|
||||
.A
|
||||
The pseudoinstructions CON, ROM and BSS may be preceded by a
|
||||
line containing a
|
||||
1-8 character data label, the first character of which is a
|
||||
1\-8 character data label, the first character of which is a
|
||||
letter, period or underscore.
|
||||
The period may only be followed by
|
||||
digits, the others may be followed by letters, digits and underscores.
|
||||
@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ They do not belong to a specific procedure.
|
||||
All constants in EM are interpreted in the decimal base.
|
||||
The ASCII assembly language accepts constant expressions
|
||||
wherever constants are allowed.
|
||||
The operators recognized are: +, -, *, % and / with the usual
|
||||
The operators recognized are: +, \-, *, % and / with the usual
|
||||
precedence order.
|
||||
Use of the parentheses ( and ) to alter the precedence order is allowed.
|
||||
.S3 "Instruction arguments"
|
||||
@ -109,16 +109,16 @@ integers on top of the stack are to be compared.
|
||||
on top of the stack that specifies the size of the integers to
|
||||
be compared.
|
||||
Thus the following two sequences are equivalent:
|
||||
.N 2
|
||||
.N 1
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
center, tab(:) ;
|
||||
l r 30 l r.
|
||||
LDL:-10:LDL:-10
|
||||
LDL:-14:LDL:-14
|
||||
LDL:\-10:LDL:\-10
|
||||
LDL:\-14:LDL:\-14
|
||||
::LOC:4
|
||||
CMI:4:CMI:
|
||||
ZEQ:*1:ZEQ:*1
|
||||
.TE 2
|
||||
.TE 1
|
||||
Section 11.1.6 shows the arguments allowed for each instruction.
|
||||
.S3 "Pseudoinstruction arguments"
|
||||
Pseudoinstruction arguments can be divided in two classes:
|
||||
@ -139,7 +139,7 @@ initializer's size.
|
||||
This integer is governed by the same restrictions as for
|
||||
transfer of objects to/from memory.
|
||||
As in instruction arguments, initializers include expressions of the form:
|
||||
\&"LABEL+offset" and "LABEL-offset".
|
||||
\&"LABEL+offset" and "LABEL\-offset".
|
||||
The offset must be an unsigned decimal constant.
|
||||
The 'IUF' indicators cannot be used in the offsets.
|
||||
.P
|
||||
@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ double quote:":\e"
|
||||
bit pattern:\fBddd\fP:\e\fBddd\fP
|
||||
.TE
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
The escape \fBddd\fP consists of the backslash followed by 1,
|
||||
The escape \fB\eddd\fP consists of the backslash followed by 1,
|
||||
2, or 3 octal digits specifing the value of
|
||||
the desired character.
|
||||
If the character following a backslash is not one of those
|
||||
@ -190,9 +190,9 @@ instructions and pseudoinstructions.
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
tab(:);
|
||||
l l l.
|
||||
<cst>:\&=:integer constant (current range -2**31..2**31-1)
|
||||
<cst>:\&=:integer constant (current range \-2**31..2**31\-1)
|
||||
<dlb>:\&=:data label
|
||||
<arg>:\&=:<cst> or <dlb> or <dlb>+<cst> or <dlb>-<cst>
|
||||
<arg>:\&=:<cst> or <dlb> or <dlb>+<cst> or <dlb>\-<cst>
|
||||
<con>:\&=:integer constant, unsigned constant, floating-point constant
|
||||
<str>:\&=:string constant (surrounded by double quotes),
|
||||
<ilb>:\&=:instruction label
|
||||
@ -425,13 +425,13 @@ etc. represent the succeeding bytes.
|
||||
tab(:) ;
|
||||
rw17 4 l.
|
||||
0:Reserved for future use
|
||||
1-129:Machine instructions, see Appendix A, alphabetical list
|
||||
130-149:Reserved for future use
|
||||
150-161:BSS,CON,END,EXA,EXC,EXP,HOL,INA,INP,MES,PRO,ROM
|
||||
162-179:Reserved for future pseudoinstructions
|
||||
180-239:Instruction labels 0 - 59 (180 is local label 0 etc.)
|
||||
240-244:See the Common Table below
|
||||
245-255:Not used
|
||||
1\-129:Machine instructions, see Appendix A, alphabetical list
|
||||
130\-149:Reserved for future use
|
||||
150\-161:BSS,CON,END,EXA,EXC,EXP,HOL,INA,INP,MES,PRO,ROM
|
||||
162\-179:Reserved for future pseudoinstructions
|
||||
180\-239:Instruction labels 0 \- 59 (180 is local label 0 etc.)
|
||||
240\-244:See the Common Table below
|
||||
245\-255:Not used
|
||||
.TE 1
|
||||
.DE 0
|
||||
After a label, the assembler is back in neutral state; it can immediately
|
||||
@ -449,9 +449,9 @@ encoded as follows:
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
tab(:);
|
||||
r l.
|
||||
0-239:Offsets from -120 to 119
|
||||
0\-239:Offsets from \-120 to 119
|
||||
|
||||
240-255:See the Common Table below
|
||||
240\-255:See the Common Table below
|
||||
.TE 1
|
||||
Absence of an optional argument is indicated by a special
|
||||
byte.
|
||||
@ -467,8 +467,8 @@ class:bytes:description
|
||||
|
||||
<ilb>:240:b1:Instruction label b1 (Not used for branches)
|
||||
<ilb>:241:b1 b2:16 bit instruction label (256*b2 + b1)
|
||||
<dlb>:242:b1:Global label .0-.255, with b1 being the label
|
||||
<dlb>:243:b1 b2:Global label .0-.32767
|
||||
<dlb>:242:b1:Global label .0\-.255, with b1 being the label
|
||||
<dlb>:243:b1 b2:Global label .0\-.32767
|
||||
:::with 256*b2+b1 being the label
|
||||
<dlb>:244:<string>:Global symbol not of the form .nnn
|
||||
<cst>:245:b1 b2:16 bit constant
|
||||
@ -488,7 +488,7 @@ class:bytes:description
|
||||
The bytes specifying the value of a 16, 32 or 64 bit constant
|
||||
are presented in two's complement notation, with the least
|
||||
significant byte first. For example: the value of a 32 bit
|
||||
constant is ((s4*256+b3)*256+b2)*256+b1, where s4 is b4-256 if
|
||||
constant is ((s4*256+b3)*256+b2)*256+b1, where s4 is b4\-256 if
|
||||
b4 is greater than 128 else s4 takes the value of b4.
|
||||
A <string> consists of a <cst> inmediatly followed by
|
||||
a sequence of bytes with length <cst>.
|
||||
@ -498,10 +498,10 @@ The pseudoinstructions fall into several categories, depending on their
|
||||
arguments:
|
||||
.N 1
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
Group 1 -- EXC, BSS, HOL have a known number of arguments
|
||||
Group 2 -- EXA, EXP, INA, INP have a string as argument
|
||||
Group 3 -- CON, MES, ROM have a variable number of various things
|
||||
Group 4 -- END, PRO have a trailing optional argument.
|
||||
Group 1 \- EXC, BSS, HOL have a known number of arguments
|
||||
Group 2 \- EXA, EXP, INA, INP have a string as argument
|
||||
Group 3 \- CON, MES, ROM have a variable number of various things
|
||||
Group 4 \- END, PRO have a trailing optional argument.
|
||||
.DE 1
|
||||
Groups 1 and 2
|
||||
use the encoding described above.
|
||||
@ -522,7 +522,7 @@ Example ASCII|Example compact
|
||||
2||182
|
||||
1||181
|
||||
LOC|10|69 130
|
||||
LOC|-10|69 110
|
||||
LOC|\-10|69 110
|
||||
LOC|300|69 245 44 1
|
||||
BRA|*19|18 139
|
||||
300||241 44 1
|
||||
@ -531,7 +531,6 @@ Example ASCII|Example compact
|
||||
CON|.35|151 242 35 255
|
||||
.TE 0
|
||||
.IE 0
|
||||
.BP
|
||||
.S2 "Assembly language instruction list"
|
||||
.P
|
||||
For each instruction in the list the range of argument values
|
||||
@ -556,7 +555,7 @@ are indicated by letters:
|
||||
.ds s \fBs\fP
|
||||
.ds z \fBz\fP
|
||||
.ds o \fBo\fP
|
||||
.ds - \fB-\fP
|
||||
.ds - \fB\-\fP
|
||||
.N 1
|
||||
.TS
|
||||
tab(:);
|
||||
@ -589,185 +588,214 @@ Instructions that check for undefined integer or floating-point
|
||||
values and underflow or overflow
|
||||
are indicated below by (*).
|
||||
.N 1
|
||||
.DS B
|
||||
GROUP 1 - LOAD
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.ta 12n
|
||||
GROUP 1 \- LOAD
|
||||
|
||||
LOC \*c : Load constant (i.e. push one word onto the stack)
|
||||
LDC \*d : Load double constant ( push two words )
|
||||
LOL \*l : Load word at \*l-th local (\*l<0) or parameter (\*l>=0)
|
||||
LOE \*g : Load external word \*g
|
||||
LIL \*l : Load word pointed to by \*l-th local or parameter
|
||||
LOF \*f : Load offsetted (top of stack + \*f yield address)
|
||||
LAL \*l : Load address of local or parameter
|
||||
LAE \*g : Load address of external
|
||||
LXL \*n : Load lexical (address of LB \*n static levels back)
|
||||
LXA \*n : Load lexical (address of AB \*n static levels back)
|
||||
LOI \*o : Load indirect \*o bytes (address is popped from the stack)
|
||||
LOS \*w : Load indirect, \*w-byte integer on top of stack gives object size
|
||||
LDL \*l : Load double local or parameter (two consecutive words are stacked)
|
||||
LDE \*g : Load double external (two consecutive externals are stacked)
|
||||
LDF \*f : Load double offsetted (top of stack + \*f yield address)
|
||||
LPI \*p : Load procedure identifier
|
||||
LOC \*c : Load constant (i.e. push one word onto the stack)
|
||||
LDC \*d : Load double constant ( push two words )
|
||||
LOL \*l : Load word at \*l-th local (\*l<0) or parameter (\*l>=0)
|
||||
LOE \*g : Load external word \*g
|
||||
LIL \*l : Load word pointed to by \*l-th local or parameter
|
||||
LOF \*f : Load offsetted (top of stack + \*f yield address)
|
||||
LAL \*l : Load address of local or parameter
|
||||
LAE \*g : Load address of external
|
||||
LXL \*n : Load lexical (address of LB \*n static levels back)
|
||||
LXA \*n : Load lexical (address of AB \*n static levels back)
|
||||
LOI \*o : Load indirect \*o bytes (address is popped from the stack)
|
||||
LOS \*w : Load indirect, \*w-byte integer on top of stack gives object size
|
||||
LDL \*l : Load double local or parameter (two consecutive words are stacked)
|
||||
LDE \*g : Load double external (two consecutive externals are stacked)
|
||||
LDF \*f : Load double offsetted (top of stack + \*f yield address)
|
||||
LPI \*p : Load procedure identifier
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
|
||||
GROUP 2 - STORE
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
GROUP 2 \- STORE
|
||||
|
||||
STL \*l : Store local or parameter
|
||||
STE \*g : Store external
|
||||
SIL \*l : Store into word pointed to by \*l-th local or parameter
|
||||
STF \*f : Store offsetted
|
||||
STI \*o : Store indirect \*o bytes (pop address, then data)
|
||||
STS \*w : Store indirect, \*w-byte integer on top of stack gives object size
|
||||
SDL \*l : Store double local or parameter
|
||||
SDE \*g : Store double external
|
||||
SDF \*f : Store double offsetted
|
||||
STL \*l : Store local or parameter
|
||||
STE \*g : Store external
|
||||
SIL \*l : Store into word pointed to by \*l-th local or parameter
|
||||
STF \*f : Store offsetted
|
||||
STI \*o : Store indirect \*o bytes (pop address, then data)
|
||||
STS \*w : Store indirect, \*w-byte integer on top of stack gives object size
|
||||
SDL \*l : Store double local or parameter
|
||||
SDE \*g : Store double external
|
||||
SDF \*f : Store double offsetted
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
|
||||
GROUP 3 - INTEGER ARITHMETIC
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
GROUP 3 \- INTEGER ARITHMETIC
|
||||
|
||||
ADI \*w : Addition (*)
|
||||
SBI \*w : Subtraction (*)
|
||||
MLI \*w : Multiplication (*)
|
||||
DVI \*w : Division (*)
|
||||
RMI \*w : Remainder (*)
|
||||
NGI \*w : Negate (two's complement) (*)
|
||||
SLI \*w : Shift left (*)
|
||||
SRI \*w : Shift right (*)
|
||||
ADI \*w : Addition (*)
|
||||
SBI \*w : Subtraction (*)
|
||||
MLI \*w : Multiplication (*)
|
||||
DVI \*w : Division (*)
|
||||
RMI \*w : Remainder (*)
|
||||
NGI \*w : Negate (two's complement) (*)
|
||||
SLI \*w : Shift left (*)
|
||||
SRI \*w : Shift right (*)
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
|
||||
GROUP 4 - UNSIGNED ARITHMETIC
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
GROUP 4 \- UNSIGNED ARITHMETIC
|
||||
|
||||
ADU \*w : Addition
|
||||
SBU \*w : Subtraction
|
||||
MLU \*w : Multiplication
|
||||
DVU \*w : Division
|
||||
RMU \*w : Remainder
|
||||
SLU \*w : Shift left
|
||||
SRU \*w : Shift right
|
||||
ADU \*w : Addition
|
||||
SBU \*w : Subtraction
|
||||
MLU \*w : Multiplication
|
||||
DVU \*w : Division
|
||||
RMU \*w : Remainder
|
||||
SLU \*w : Shift left
|
||||
SRU \*w : Shift right
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
|
||||
GROUP 5 - FLOATING POINT ARITHMETIC
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
GROUP 5 \- FLOATING POINT ARITHMETIC
|
||||
|
||||
ADF \*w : Floating add (*)
|
||||
SBF \*w : Floating subtract (*)
|
||||
MLF \*w : Floating multiply (*)
|
||||
DVF \*w : Floating divide (*)
|
||||
NGF \*w : Floating negate (*)
|
||||
FIF \*w : Floating multiply and split integer and fraction part (*)
|
||||
FEF \*w : Split floating number in exponent and fraction part (*)
|
||||
ADF \*w : Floating add (*)
|
||||
SBF \*w : Floating subtract (*)
|
||||
MLF \*w : Floating multiply (*)
|
||||
DVF \*w : Floating divide (*)
|
||||
NGF \*w : Floating negate (*)
|
||||
FIF \*w : Floating multiply and split integer and fraction part (*)
|
||||
FEF \*w : Split floating number in exponent and fraction part (*)
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
|
||||
GROUP 6 - POINTER ARITHMETIC
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
GROUP 6 \- POINTER ARITHMETIC
|
||||
|
||||
ADP \*f : Add \*f to pointer on top of stack
|
||||
ADS \*w : Add \*w-byte value and pointer
|
||||
SBS \*w : Subtract pointers in same fragment and push diff as size \*w integer
|
||||
ADP \*f : Add \*f to pointer on top of stack
|
||||
ADS \*w : Add \*w-byte value and pointer
|
||||
SBS \*w : Subtract pointers in same fragment and push diff as size \*w integer
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
|
||||
GROUP 7 - INCREMENT/DECREMENT/ZERO
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
GROUP 7 \- INCREMENT/DECREMENT/ZERO
|
||||
|
||||
INC \*- : Increment word on top of stack by 1 (*)
|
||||
INL \*l : Increment local or parameter (*)
|
||||
INE \*g : Increment external (*)
|
||||
DEC \*- : Decrement word on top of stack by 1 (*)
|
||||
DEL \*l : Decrement local or parameter (*)
|
||||
DEE \*g : Decrement external (*)
|
||||
ZRL \*l : Zero local or parameter
|
||||
ZRE \*g : Zero external
|
||||
ZRF \*w : Load a floating zero of size \*w
|
||||
ZER \*w : Load \*w zero bytes
|
||||
INC \*- : Increment word on top of stack by 1 (*)
|
||||
INL \*l : Increment local or parameter (*)
|
||||
INE \*g : Increment external (*)
|
||||
DEC \*- : Decrement word on top of stack by 1 (*)
|
||||
DEL \*l : Decrement local or parameter (*)
|
||||
DEE \*g : Decrement external (*)
|
||||
ZRL \*l : Zero local or parameter
|
||||
ZRE \*g : Zero external
|
||||
ZRF \*w : Load a floating zero of size \*w
|
||||
ZER \*w : Load \*w zero bytes
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
|
||||
GROUP 8 - CONVERT (stack: source, source size, dest. size (top))
|
||||
.DS \" ???
|
||||
GROUP 8 \- CONVERT (stack: source, source size, dest. size (top))
|
||||
|
||||
CII \*- : Convert integer to integer (*)
|
||||
CUI \*- : Convert unsigned to integer (*)
|
||||
CFI \*- : Convert floating to integer (*)
|
||||
CIF \*- : Convert integer to floating (*)
|
||||
CUF \*- : Convert unsigned to floating (*)
|
||||
CFF \*- : Convert floating to floating (*)
|
||||
CIU \*- : Convert integer to unsigned
|
||||
CUU \*- : Convert unsigned to unsigned
|
||||
CFU \*- : Convert floating to unsigned
|
||||
CII \*- : Convert integer to integer (*)
|
||||
CUI \*- : Convert unsigned to integer (*)
|
||||
CFI \*- : Convert floating to integer (*)
|
||||
CIF \*- : Convert integer to floating (*)
|
||||
CUF \*- : Convert unsigned to floating (*)
|
||||
CFF \*- : Convert floating to floating (*)
|
||||
CIU \*- : Convert integer to unsigned
|
||||
CUU \*- : Convert unsigned to unsigned
|
||||
CFU \*- : Convert floating to unsigned
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
|
||||
GROUP 9 - LOGICAL
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
GROUP 9 \- LOGICAL
|
||||
|
||||
AND \*w : Boolean and on two groups of \*w bytes
|
||||
IOR \*w : Boolean inclusive or on two groups of \*w bytes
|
||||
XOR \*w : Boolean exclusive or on two groups of \*w bytes
|
||||
COM \*w : Complement (one's complement of top \*w bytes)
|
||||
ROL \*w : Rotate left a group of \*w bytes
|
||||
ROR \*w : Rotate right a group of \*w bytes
|
||||
AND \*w : Boolean and on two groups of \*w bytes
|
||||
IOR \*w : Boolean inclusive or on two groups of \*w bytes
|
||||
XOR \*w : Boolean exclusive or on two groups of \*w bytes
|
||||
COM \*w : Complement (one's complement of top \*w bytes)
|
||||
ROL \*w : Rotate left a group of \*w bytes
|
||||
ROR \*w : Rotate right a group of \*w bytes
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
|
||||
GROUP 10 - SETS
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
GROUP 10 \- SETS
|
||||
|
||||
INN \*w : Bit test on \*w byte set (bit number on top of stack)
|
||||
SET \*w : Create singleton \*w byte set with bit n on (n is top of stack)
|
||||
INN \*w : Bit test on \*w byte set (bit number on top of stack)
|
||||
SET \*w : Create singleton \*w byte set with bit n on (n is top of stack)
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
|
||||
GROUP 11 - ARRAY
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
GROUP 11 \- ARRAY
|
||||
|
||||
LAR \*w : Load array element, descriptor contains integers of size \*w
|
||||
SAR \*w : Store array element
|
||||
AAR \*w : Load address of array element
|
||||
LAR \*w : Load array element, descriptor contains integers of size \*w
|
||||
SAR \*w : Store array element
|
||||
AAR \*w : Load address of array element
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
|
||||
GROUP 12 - COMPARE
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
GROUP 12 \- COMPARE
|
||||
|
||||
CMI \*w : Compare \*w byte integers, Push negative, zero, positive for <, = or >
|
||||
CMF \*w : Compare \*w byte reals
|
||||
CMU \*w : Compare \*w byte unsigneds
|
||||
CMS \*w : Compare \*w byte values, can only be used for bit for bit equality test
|
||||
CMP \*- : Compare pointers
|
||||
CMI \*w : Compare \*w byte integers, Push negative, zero, positive for <, = or >
|
||||
CMF \*w : Compare \*w byte reals
|
||||
CMU \*w : Compare \*w byte unsigneds
|
||||
CMS \*w : Compare \*w byte values, can only be used for bit for bit equality test
|
||||
CMP \*- : Compare pointers
|
||||
|
||||
TLT \*- : True if less, i.e. iff top of stack < 0
|
||||
TLE \*- : True if less or equal, i.e. iff top of stack <= 0
|
||||
TEQ \*- : True if equal, i.e. iff top of stack = 0
|
||||
TNE \*- : True if not equal, i.e. iff top of stack non zero
|
||||
TGE \*- : True if greater or equal, i.e. iff top of stack >= 0
|
||||
TGT \*- : True if greater, i.e. iff top of stack > 0
|
||||
TLT \*- : True if less, i.e. iff top of stack < 0
|
||||
TLE \*- : True if less or equal, i.e. iff top of stack <= 0
|
||||
TEQ \*- : True if equal, i.e. iff top of stack = 0
|
||||
TNE \*- : True if not equal, i.e. iff top of stack non zero
|
||||
TGE \*- : True if greater or equal, i.e. iff top of stack >= 0
|
||||
TGT \*- : True if greater, i.e. iff top of stack > 0
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
|
||||
GROUP 13 - BRANCH
|
||||
.DS \" ???
|
||||
GROUP 13 \- BRANCH
|
||||
|
||||
BRA \*b : Branch unconditionally to label \*b
|
||||
BRA \*b : Branch unconditionally to label \*b
|
||||
|
||||
BLT \*b : Branch less (pop 2 words, branch if top > second)
|
||||
BLE \*b : Branch less or equal
|
||||
BEQ \*b : Branch equal
|
||||
BNE \*b : Branch not equal
|
||||
BGE \*b : Branch greater or equal
|
||||
BGT \*b : Branch greater
|
||||
BLT \*b : Branch less (pop 2 words, branch if top > second)
|
||||
BLE \*b : Branch less or equal
|
||||
BEQ \*b : Branch equal
|
||||
BNE \*b : Branch not equal
|
||||
BGE \*b : Branch greater or equal
|
||||
BGT \*b : Branch greater
|
||||
|
||||
ZLT \*b : Branch less than zero (pop 1 word, branch negative)
|
||||
ZLE \*b : Branch less or equal to zero
|
||||
ZEQ \*b : Branch equal zero
|
||||
ZNE \*b : Branch not zero
|
||||
ZGE \*b : Branch greater or equal zero
|
||||
ZGT \*b : Branch greater than zero
|
||||
ZLT \*b : Branch less than zero (pop 1 word, branch negative)
|
||||
ZLE \*b : Branch less or equal to zero
|
||||
ZEQ \*b : Branch equal zero
|
||||
ZNE \*b : Branch not zero
|
||||
ZGE \*b : Branch greater or equal zero
|
||||
ZGT \*b : Branch greater than zero
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
|
||||
GROUP 14 - PROCEDURE CALL
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
GROUP 14 \- PROCEDURE CALL
|
||||
|
||||
CAI \*- : Call procedure (procedure identifier on stack)
|
||||
CAL \*p : Call procedure (with identifier \*p)
|
||||
LFR \*s : Load function result
|
||||
RET \*z : Return (function result consists of top \*z bytes)
|
||||
CAI \*- : Call procedure (procedure identifier on stack)
|
||||
CAL \*p : Call procedure (with identifier \*p)
|
||||
LFR \*s : Load function result
|
||||
RET \*z : Return (function result consists of top \*z bytes)
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
|
||||
GROUP 15 - MISCELLANEOUS
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
GROUP 15 \- MISCELLANEOUS
|
||||
|
||||
ASP \*f : Adjust the stack pointer by \*f
|
||||
ASS \*w : Adjust the stack pointer by \*w-byte integer
|
||||
BLM \*z : Block move \*z bytes; first pop destination addr, then source addr
|
||||
BLS \*w : Block move, size is in \*w-byte integer on top of stack
|
||||
CSA \*w : Case jump; address of jump table at top of stack
|
||||
CSB \*w : Table lookup jump; address of jump table at top of stack
|
||||
DCH \*- : Follow dynamic chain, convert LB to LB of caller
|
||||
DUP \*s : Duplicate top \*s bytes
|
||||
DUS \*w : Duplicate top \*w bytes
|
||||
EXG \*w : Exchange top \*w bytes
|
||||
FIL \*g : File name (external 4 := \*g)
|
||||
GTO \*g : Non-local goto, descriptor at \*g
|
||||
LIM \*- : Load 16 bit ignore mask
|
||||
LIN \*n : Line number (external 0 := \*n)
|
||||
LNI \*- : Line number increment
|
||||
LOR \*r : Load register (0=LB, 1=SP, 2=HP)
|
||||
LPB \*- : Convert local base to argument base
|
||||
MON \*- : Monitor call
|
||||
NOP \*- : No operation
|
||||
RCK \*w : Range check; trap on error
|
||||
RTT \*- : Return from trap
|
||||
SIG \*- : Trap errors to proc identifier on top of stack, -2 resets default
|
||||
SIM \*- : Store 16 bit ignore mask
|
||||
STR \*r : Store register (0=LB, 1=SP, 2=HP)
|
||||
TRP \*- : Cause trap to occur (Error number on stack)
|
||||
ASP \*f : Adjust the stack pointer by \*f
|
||||
ASS \*w : Adjust the stack pointer by \*w-byte integer
|
||||
BLM \*z : Block move \*z bytes; first pop destination addr, then source addr
|
||||
BLS \*w : Block move, size is in \*w-byte integer on top of stack
|
||||
CSA \*w : Case jump; address of jump table at top of stack
|
||||
CSB \*w : Table lookup jump; address of jump table at top of stack
|
||||
DCH \*- : Follow dynamic chain, convert LB to LB of caller
|
||||
DUP \*s : Duplicate top \*s bytes
|
||||
DUS \*w : Duplicate top \*w bytes
|
||||
EXG \*w : Exchange top \*w bytes
|
||||
FIL \*g : File name (external 4 := \*g)
|
||||
GTO \*g : Non-local goto, descriptor at \*g
|
||||
LIM \*- : Load 16 bit ignore mask
|
||||
LIN \*n : Line number (external 0 := \*n)
|
||||
LNI \*- : Line number increment
|
||||
LOR \*r : Load register (0=LB, 1=SP, 2=HP)
|
||||
LPB \*- : Convert local base to argument base
|
||||
MON \*- : Monitor call
|
||||
NOP \*- : No operation
|
||||
RCK \*w : Range check; trap on error
|
||||
RTT \*- : Return from trap
|
||||
SIG \*- : Trap errors to proc identifier on top of stack, \-2 resets default
|
||||
SIM \*- : Store 16 bit ignore mask
|
||||
STR \*r : Store register (0=LB, 1=SP, 2=HP)
|
||||
TRP \*- : Cause trap to occur (Error number on stack)
|
||||
.DE 0
|
||||
|
||||
6
doc/em/cont.nr
Normal file
6
doc/em/cont.nr
Normal file
@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
|
||||
.MS T A 0
|
||||
.ME
|
||||
.BP
|
||||
.MS B A 0
|
||||
.ME
|
||||
.CT
|
||||
@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ Array descriptors contain the following three integers:
|
||||
.PT
|
||||
lower bound~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~signed
|
||||
.PT
|
||||
upper bound - lower bound~~~~~~~unsigned
|
||||
upper bound \- lower bound~~~~~~~unsigned
|
||||
.PT
|
||||
number of bytes per element~~~~~unsigned
|
||||
.PE
|
||||
@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ LAR n (n is the size of the integers in the descriptor and I)
|
||||
All array instructions first pop the address of the descriptor
|
||||
and the index.
|
||||
If the index is not within the bounds specified, a trap occurs.
|
||||
If ok, (I~-~lower bound) is multiplied
|
||||
If ok, (I~\-~lower bound) is multiplied
|
||||
by the number of bytes per element (the third word). The result is added
|
||||
to the address of A and replaces A on the stack.
|
||||
.A
|
||||
@ -128,12 +128,12 @@ each source language case statement
|
||||
is up to the front end.
|
||||
If the range of the index value is dense, i.e
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
(highest value - lowest value) / number of cases
|
||||
(highest value \- lowest value) / number of cases
|
||||
.DE 1
|
||||
is less than some threshold, then CSA is the obvious choice.
|
||||
If the range is sparse, CSB is better.
|
||||
.N 2
|
||||
.DS
|
||||
.Dr 30
|
||||
|--------------------| |--------------------| high address
|
||||
| pointer for upb | | pointer n-1 |
|
||||
|--------------------| |- - - - - - - |
|
||||
@ -157,7 +157,6 @@ If the range is sparse, CSB is better.
|
||||
|--------------------| |--------------------|
|
||||
|
||||
CSA descriptor CSB descriptor
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Figure 4. Descriptor layout for CSA and CSB
|
||||
.DE
|
||||
.Df
|
||||
Figure 4. Descriptor layout for CSA and CSB
|
||||
.De
|
||||
|
||||
Some files were not shown because too many files have changed in this diff Show More
Loading…
x
Reference in New Issue
Block a user